HORAE SYNOPTICAE

HAWKINS

HENRY FROWDE,

M.A.

PUBLISHER TO THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD

LONDON, EDINBURGH, NEW YORK

TORONTO AND MELBOURNE

HORAE SYNOPTICAE
CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE STUDY OF

THE SYNOPTIC PROBLEM

REV. SIR

JOHN C HAWKINS,
HONORARY CANON OF

ST.

Bart., M.A., D.D.

ALBANS

SECOND EDITION, REVISED AND SUPPLEMENTED

OXFORD
AT THE CLARENDON PRESS
1909

OXFORD
PRINTED AT THE CLARENDON PRESS
BY HORACE HART, M.A.
PRINTER TO THE UNIVERSITY

PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION

The origin, mode

of composition, and mutual relations of

the three Synoptic Gospels form so obscure and so complex

a subject of inquiry that

as the

'

it

has come to be generally known

Synoptic Problem

attempts to deal with

it,

volume has a limited and

this

merely preparatory purpose, which

its title-page.

upon

many modern

the

Among

'.

It is called

by

have tried to indicate

the plural

name Horae
*

Synopticae ', because, while it is the outcome of a good

many hours spent in examination of the Synoptic Gospels

and

in

tabulation

are

results

of

the

results

thus

presented

those

obtained,

separately and

almost

indepen-

dently in the successive sections of the book, no attempt

being

made

combine them as foundations or supports of

to

any system or theory.

the

to

'

study

rather

Synoptic Problem
in

that

And

',

than

to

the

'

is

Contributions

solution

'

of

the

have only been trying to help

process of collecting and sifting

because

preliminary

the sub-title

materials which must be carried

much

further than

it

has

yet been before we can be ready for the solution of the

Problem or, as I would rather express it, of such parts

of

it

as are not

now

For while

insoluble.

it

seems to me,

on the one hand, that there are some aspects of it as to

which we are not likely to advance beyond statements of
conflicting probabilities, unless there are

coveries of documents in

hand

Egypt

some

believe that not a few conclusions

the most important kinds are

fresh dis-

or elsewhere, on the other

likely to

and

those of

be made so clear

Preface to the First Edition

vi

and so practically certain by the patient and careful investigations of the language of the Gospels which are now
being carried on, that before very long they will meet with
general acceptance.^

My

object, then, has

been to collect and to exhibit facts

with as small an admixture of theory as possible.

Part

there

theory.

is,

I think,

scarcely anything that can be called

In Parts II and III, however,

the occasional use of a

'

dispensed with (as on p.

on pp.

(as

ing

was found that

it

'

working hypothesis could not be

1 1 1 ^)
and I have several times
;

and

8i, 128, 152, 162, 185, 212,

briefly stated or implied

Summary)

In

in the

some

Conclud-

inferences,

without which the reason for introducing the facts and

figures could hardly

have been made

But

clear.

have

suppressed, or at least reserved for another opportunity,

some more

detailed hypotheses and conjectures which

occurred to me, or had been recalled to me,

the preparation of these pages.
I

could have claimed a

fair

For some

amount

had

the course of

in

them

of

think

of probability, and they

but they
might have made the book more interesting
would certainly have obscured its designed character of
;

being mainly a collection of materials.

It

be

may

said, perhaps, that these materials are not of

a very solid and trustworthy nature, or at least that they

are of such a kind that their value
rated, especially

by

is

likely to

the compiler of them.

a large extent statistical

and

anything that
*

wished.

doubt there

is

to

'

prove

this danger,

Sanday speaks hopefully of the prospects of solution, both

'
important supplement to the article
Gospels in Smith's Diet, of

the Bible, ed. 2, p. 1228,

*

No

made

Professor
his

in

is

For they are to

statistics are proverbially

misleading, and proverbially liable to be

'

be over-

[These references are

'

and

in Inspiration, p. 282.

now made

to the pages of the second edition.]

however cautious and

try to be

vii

from prejudice the compiler mayand he should remember that he is particularly

free

when the

exposed to

it

collected

is

so small as

say,

that

first,

Edition

to the First

Preface

in

have done

from which the

field
it is

statistics are

the present case.

my

can only

best to guard against this

danger in various ways, and especially by bracketing words

on which stress should not be laid, although their insertion

was necessary (cf. pp.

would say that however misleading
in

the

lists

jectures unsupported

by

Secondly,

178).

2,

statistics

statistics are likely to

be, con-

may
be

still

more

they are supported by evidence of other kinds,

so, unless

such as contemporary, or nearly contemporary, historical

and as to the Synoptic Gospels such evidence

very slight, being almost limited to St. Luke's Preface
1-4)* and to the well-known passage of Papias about

testimonies
is
(i.

Mark

as the interpreter of Peter,

of the

poser

statistical

Thirdly,

Logia.^

method, as here used,

general accordance of

we gather from

its results

the words of St.

and Matthew as the com-

some confidence

may

vague

for proof, or

the

be inspired by the

with such intimations as

Luke and

venture to add, though the matter

(I

in

is

of Papias, and

too wide and too

even for discussion, here) with the

general probabilities of the case, as they are suggested to

us through such other means as

seem

we have

at our

command.^

have devoted a disproportionately large

amount of space to some apparently minor matters, such
If

to

as the use of the Historic Present

Of course these verses

many commentators and
'

demand.

A fresh and

liave

"*

and of Conjunctions

been abundantly and minutely discussed by

as

others,

their

unique importance and interest

them will be found in Blass,

interesting examination of

Philology of the Gospels, pp. 7-20 [also, since then, in Expos. Times,
*
^

The passage

xviii.

395].

given below, p. xiii,

See e.g. the remark on the use of the Gospels in sub-apostolic times,

p. 218,

is

paragraph D.

pp. 143

ff.

pp. 137, 150

ff.

viii

in

Mark, and

St.

the First Edition

to

Preface

the

comparatively slight

differences

between the language of St. Luke's Gospel and of Acts,* it

is because I wished to dwell especially on those points
which, so far as

worked

knew, had either been insufficiently

had not been put before English

out, or at least

students in a distinct

and

On

easily available form.

the

some important departments of the Synoptic

as the number and nature of the sources

other hand,

Problem such

because

Luke only

have

been passed over, merely

could not see that any light would be thrown

used by St.

upon them by such statistics and observations as I had

been able to put together. For of course the volume is far
too small to

make any

pretensions to completeness, or to

due proportion of contents, even as a

collection of materials

for students.

Most

of the following materials

were originally drawn

up for my own use. But Professor Sanday, having seen

some of my papers, advised and encouraged the publication
of them, as being likely to be useful to others

working at the same subject.

He has

My

for

which

made many

helpful

am

extremely grateful.
study of the language of the Gospels has generally

been independent

but of course

rected or supplemented
writers.

In so doing,

have sometimes cor-

my own results by those of other

think my chief obligations have

been to Dr. E. A. Abbott's well-known

Enc.

are

also very kindly read

the proof-sheets of the book, and has

and valuable suggestions,

who

Brit., vol. x,

St, Luke,

to the

list

article

'

'

Gospels

in

and to Dr. Plummer's Commentary on

me to add about fifteen entries

which enabled
of

words and phrases characteristic

Gospel.
J

pp. 177

ff-

of

that

Preface

First Edition

to the

ix

have just referred, there

but
are probably many deficiencies and imperfections
as
use
of
them
perhaps other workers may be able to make
In such

lists

as that to

which

foundations of more complete

lists, or, if

do so themselves, may help

to

me

to

they are unwilling

do so by sending

me

notices of errors and omissions.

J.

H.

C.

Kelston Lodge, Oxford,

October, 1898.

PREFACE TO THE SECOND

EDITION
Very

few prefatory words are required.

For, although

many more hours have been spent over the Synoptic

Gospels with a view to this edition,

it

has not been with

the intention of working in any fresh directions, but only

with the hope of supplying some of the

'

deficiencies

and

'

removing some of the imperfections which, in the last

words of the preceding preface, were spoken of as likely to
be found in a work of this kind.
'

Numerous small supplements have been made

of the

lists,

to

many

and especially to those concerned with the

characteristics of the three Synoptists, in order to render

them
I

as nearly complete as possible.

could not find more than a very few modifications or

ought to make, the only two of any

importance being those referred to on pages 174 f. and 214.
The Section (Pt. II, Sect. V) on the chief non-Marcan

withdrawals that

source used in the First and Third Gospels has been very

Preface

to the

Second Edition

largely rewritten, not because of

my own

much change

of opinion on

order to avoid the appearance of a claim

than
has yet been reached on this subject.
to more certainty
I have only found occasions for a few references to the
part,

but

in

illustrations of the Y^oivr\

Greek of the

New

Testament and

LXX

which are being drawn from the Papyri. No doubt

many more will be suggested by such a work as the Lexicon
which is promised by Drs. J. H. Moulton and G. Milligan,

and some of the materials

for

which they are gradually

publishing in the Expositor.

J.

Kelston Lodge, Oxford,

September, 1909.

C.

H.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Preliminary Notices and Explanations

PART

....

PAGE
xiii

WORDS AND PHRASES CHARACTERISTIC OF EACH

OF THE SYNOPTIC GOSPELS
Section

St.

I,

II. St.

III. St.

Matthew's Gospel
Mark's Gospel

lo

Luke's Gospel

15

IV. General remarks on the Characteristic

Words and
26

Phrases

Appendix

Appendix

II

to Part

Two

Subsidiary Lists of Lucan

Characteristics

to Part

27
References to those

Words and

Phrases which do not stand consecutively

in

a Concordance

Additional Notes to Part

30
I

51

PART

II

INDICATIONS OF SOURCES
Section

I.

II.

III.

Identities in language

Words

54
67

differently applied

Transpositions
Sentences

of

the

Order

of

Words and
^

Appendixto Section IV: He that hath ears, &c.'

V. The Source largely used by Matthew and Luke,
apart from Mark
'

TJ

80

IV. Doublets

PART

106

107

III

FURTHER STATISTICS AND OBSERVATIONS BEARING

ON THE ORIGIN AND COMPOSITION OF EACH GOSPEL
1
A. St. Mark's Gospel
14-153
Section I. Passages which may have been omitted or altered

as being liable to be misunderstood, or to give

.
.
.
offence, or to suggest difficulties

II7

Table

xii

Contents

of.

PAGE

Section

Enlargements of the narrative, which add nothing

to the information conveyed by it, because they

II.

are expressed again, or are directly involved, in

the Context
III.

125

Minor Additions

to the narrative

IV. Rude, harsh, obscure, or unusual words or expressions, which may therefore have been omitted

J.

or replaced by others
V. Duplicate expressions in Mark, of which one or
both of the other Synoptists use one part, or its

131

....

139

Mark

150

equivalent

VI. The Historic Present in Mark

VII. The Conjunction Km preferred to Ae

,,

in

Matthew's Gospel
I. The Quotations from the Old Testament
II. The Shortening of Narratives in Matthew

III.

B. St.

Section

V.

,,

....

The

On

I.

the

St.

Section

I.

of

The

158

163

168

174-197

Linguistic

between

Relations

Luke's Gospel and Acts

174-193

between Luke and Acts

Differences between the language of Luke and
Acts
.

II.

III.

Special consideration

IV.

Subsidiary notice of the similarity between the

language of Luke and of the Pauline Epistles

in relation to

of the

'

We '-Sections

Division

relation

Luke

the Smaller Additions in

Gospel

Appendix A to Part

,,

III.

The
The
in

Additional Notes to Part

St.

III

Mark

189
192

Luke's
194-197

Synoptists and the Septuagint

alterations and small additions
which Matthew and Luke agree

against

177

182

between Luke, Acts, Paul, and Hebrews

On

II.

174

of

Note on the

161

Formulas,

linguistic similarity

Acts

154

Gospel

St. Luke's

Division

and repetition
Matthew

transference

especially in

143

154-173
.

Signs of Compilation in Matthew

IV. Traces of Numerical Arrangements in Matthew

C.

.127

....

198

208
212

Concluding Summary

216

Index

221

PRELIMINARY NOTICES AND

EXPLANATIONS
An

Introduction

of the usual kind

Table of Contents

since the

'

needless here,

is

sufficiently indicates the nature

Contributions to the study of the Synoptic

which the following pages contain. But the

of the separate

Problem

'

'

attention of those

who

use the book

notices and explanations

to these

called

is

'

1.

The passage

of Papias, which contains considerably the

any of the writers whose names

earliest external mention of

are connected with our Gospels,

is

so often alluded to that

be well to print it here for convenience of reference.

Both text and translation are taken from Bishop Lightfoot's
will

it

Apostolic Fathers

Kai

roCro

(i vol.

1891), pp. 517, 529.

And

Trpea^vTepon

also
eAeye'

UiTpov

MdpKos

yevoixevos, ocra ixvi]pi6,

vevaeVy

ixev kpixyjvevTrjs

aKpipias

>

eypaxj/iv,

ov

{j.ivTOLTdit,,TavTrdTovXpi(TTov

^ K^xehra ^ -npaxeivTa.

yap
' '^

TiKOVcre
'

tov

Kvpiov,
^

7TaprjKo\ov6r](Tev avr^,
^

o{>t

ovtc

varepov

the

the Elder said this

Mark having become

of

interpreter

wrote

Peter,

down

accurately
everything that he remem7
bered,^ without

cording

in

however

re-

order what was

done by Christ.
For neither did he hear the
either said or

j-j

t.

tt-

Lord, nor did he follow Him;

but afterwards^ as I said,

Dr. E. A. Abbott, in Enc. Bibl., ii. i8i i, proposes and defends * mentioned ',
taught from memory ', as a preferable ^translation of (fMvrjiiovevaev here, and
also of a-nf^ivrfjiovivaiv a few lines further on.
or

'

Preliminary Notices and Explanations

xiv

(attended) Peter, who adapted

his instructions to the needs

Xpcttts eiroieiro ras StSacrKaXtas,

had no

(of his hearers), but

ak\

wairep (rvvra^iv tS)v

ovx^

KVpiOK&V

TTOlOVIXeVOS

\6y(t>Vy

So then Mark made no mis-

ovhiv

&(TT

design of giving a connected

accountof the Lord's oracles.^

MdpKOS,

ijjxapTe

take,
ovT<as evta ypdxfras

ft)s

made
npovoiavy tov

p.r\t)kv

TtapaXiTTclv

\(/V(racr$ai tl

avTols

rj

bia\KT(D

'E^patbi

Stv rjKova-e

MarOaLos

39),

and

is

it

his

as

he

for

he

one care not to

omit anything that he heard,

or to set

down any

p.cv ovv

statement

therein

to,

false

... So

then Matthew composed the

oracles in the Hebrew lan-

Ao'yia

avra

guage, and each one inter-

bwarbs (Kaaros.

The passage
iii.

things

(v

avveypdi^ffaTo, ^ppirjveva-e b'

o)S ijv

thus wrote

remembered them

kvbs yap (iroL'qcraTO

pLovevafv.

while he

down some

airejuyrj-

preted them as he could.

preserved for us by Eusebius (Hist. Eccl.,

makes it probable that the Presbyter

his context
'

John was the Elder on whose authority Papias gives his

notice of Mark, and presumably of Matthew also.
The
approximate date of the work of Papias may be given as
*

A.D. 130.
2.

the following tables were drawn up before the

of
Moulton and Geden's Concordance. But they
publication
all

Nearly

have been revised and checked with the help of

it, and it is
adopted as the standard as to orthography, order of words,
&c. Where no other Concordance is named, it is assumed

that this one will be in use

but in a few instances there

will

be found a reference to Bruder

(ed. 1888), because in those

cases his arrangement brings out more fully or clearly or

conveniently the usage to which attention

'

Or

'

sayings

',

if

with Lightfoot

is

being called.

we read Kiriw, and not

\o-fi.o3v.

Preliminary Notices and Explanations

xv

3.

The

used

text

is

Westcott and

(WH), with

Hort's

occasional reference to Tischendorfs (Tisch, or T) and to

that of the English Revisers (R). Various readings are
noticed only in the most important cases, as where WH's
margin (mg) agrees with Tisch against their text, or where

the matter in hand

readings,

by the

directly affected

also called to a

Attention has been

Western

is

some

and

variants.

few specially interesting

references

made

to

the

Sinaitic-Syriac version.

4.
'

In the Tables on pp. 4-29 'Acts' and Paul' are placed

in the columns next after Luke ', in order to draw attention
'

throughout to the strong affinities which exist between the

members of the Lucano-Pauline group of writings, and upon

which more

is

said on pp. 189

ff.

5.

When 'John' is referred to, or placed at the head of

a column, only the fourth Gospel is meant: for it is
important sometimes to bring out a similarity or contrast
between

this

and the other historical books.

Therefore the

three Epistles of St. John, as well as the Apocalypse, had to

be placed in the column headed Rest of N. T.' But no
'

expression of opinion as to the authorship of any of those

books is thus intended. Again, it has been found convenient
to class thirteen Epistles under the heading Paul ', but no
assumption is thus made as to the authorship and integrity
of all those Epistles. And on pp. 191 f. a distinctive mark
'

has been placed against words found only in the Pastoral

Epistles.

6.

An

inconsistent

way

of using the names of the Evangelists

Mk, Lk) has been found unavoid-

(or the abbreviations Mt,

able

sometimes the Gospel

itself as it stands,

sometimes

xvi

Preliminary Notices and Explanations

the author or compiler of

thus denoted.

it, is

show

that the context will always

But

hope

a glance which

at

is

meant.
7.

The
writer

figures in thick type after the

(e.

g.

or phrase

is

name

of a

book or

Paul 12, Rev 3) mean that a word

used so many times in that book or by that

Matthew

6,

such cases 'Luke' includes only the third

occurrences
in Acts being enumerated separately;
the
Gospel,
and, as has been already said, John includes only the
writer.

(In

'

'

fourth Gospel.)

that the

Similarly

word or phrase

Septuagint.

LXX
is

4,

LXX

used so

22, &c., denote

many

times in the

HORAE SYNOPTICAE
PART
Words and Phrases

characteristic of each

OF the Synoptic Gospels

That

two

at least of the

Synoptic Gospels are compilaface of them, because of the

the
upon
And
same
materials are used.
different ways in which the
there are other less obvious phenomena which support this

tions

is

evident

conclusion.

But before attempting to discover the number and the

nature of the sources used by the compilers, and so to
enter upon the most obscure part of the Synoptic Problem,
the ground should be cleared as far as possible by a careful
endeavour to discover how much in the Gospels is owing
to those

who used

the sources.

In trying thus to

mark and

made independently by
is

to estimate the additions

each of the authors or compilers,

it

the most obvious and most usual course to lay stress on

the words peculiar to each Gospel, and from them to judge

But though these are
of the style of the several writers.
not to be overlooked (and lists of them, drawn up for
another purpose, can be referred to on pages 1 99 ff. of this
book), their importance for our present purpose may easily
be over-estimated. For by far the larger number of them
viz. five-sevenths of those in Matthew and six-sevenths

of those in
all
is

Mark and Luke are used only once

and

in

three Gospels a smaller proportion than ten per cent,

used more than twice (viz. in Matthew 10 words out

of T12, in

Mark 4

out of 71, and in

Luke

10 out of 261).

IVords and Phrases characteristic

Now

Pt.

words that are not used more than once or twice

cannot have very much weight as proofs of the habitual

It is, therefore, much more important
style of any writer.

examine words which are used more frequently, though

may not be exclusively, and to see which of them are

to
it

used so predominantly in each Gospel as to be apparently

characteristic of each compiler, and therefore presumably

due to him.

To

bring together such 'characteristic words and

phrases' is the object of the first and most elaborate series
of tables in this book.
It will be seen that the number,

of them in

number
which

is

Luke

in the

more

by more than one-thwi the

Matthew (95),
number in the

(151) exceeds

slightly shorter Gospel of

than twice as large as the

very much shorter^ Gospel of Mark (41).

In the case of each Gospel a few words are placed in
brackets ( ) as being less important than the rest, because

they are mainly or entirely accounted for by the subjectmatter, and therefore give little or no indication of the
author's

although their insertion in the lists was

the rules here adopted.''^ And there are some

style,

required by
other entries marked f on which, for various reasons, but
,

little stress

can be

laid.

On

the other hand an asterisk *

prefixed to the most distinctive and important instances.

In the columns headed Peculiar and Common it is

is

'

shown how

'

'

word or phrase occurs respectively

each Gospel which have not, and in

often each

in those portions of

^
Nestle gives, on the authority of American scholars ', the number
of words in the Greek N. T. as being in Luke 19,209, in Matthew 18,222,
in Mark 11,158.
Textual Criticism of N. T., p. 48.
'

"

No

such rules can be quite satisfactory means of excluding all nonand including all characteristic words. But of course it was
necessary to adopt rules of some kind (and I think those here employed are
as fair tests of what is characteristic as can be devised), in order that
the lists may be unaffected by one's own views or opinions or ' personal
equation'. I see that very similar rules were adopted in Carpenter and
Harford-Battersby's Hexateuch (1900) for the purpose of distinguishing words
characteristic,

'

'

and phrases characteristic of the various documentary sources

(i.

183

f.).

of each of the Synoptic Gospels

those portions which have, parallels in one or both of the

other Synoptic Gospels and in the cases of Matthew and
:

Luke, chapters
other

and

ii

'

own.

peculiar

For some of the

see pages

have been kept separate from the

and placed in a column of their

portions,

results

which are thus brought out,

9, 14, 34, 36.

SECTION

WORDS AND PHRASES CHARACTERISTIC OF

ST. MATTHEW'S GOSPEL
'
propose to take as characteristic ', words or phrases
which occur at least four times in this Gospel, and which

foimd at all in Mark or L uke^ or which

Matthew at least twice as often as in Mark

either {a) are not

{b)

are found in

and Luke

together.

95 such words and phrases are here collected and tabulated.

On the grounds explained on page 2, 15 of them
are bracketed, 9 are marked with f, and 14 with *.

and

containing 48 verses, have a column

other passages regarded as peculiar
to Matthew, because without parallels in Mark or Luke,
contain about 390 verses, viz. iii. 14, 15; iv. 13^-16

Chapters

v.

7-10

vi.

1-8

'iJSS

14

16, 17

16-18
X. 5, 6

ii,

The

to themselves.

34

8^

'

'

19-24

vii.

16

28

27,

31

\ib\ 15

36

41

33-38

viii.

xi.

17

ix.

43

13 a

xii.

5-7
14 a; 24-30; 35; 3^-531 xiv
28-31 ; XV. 12, 13 xvi. 17-19 xvii. 24-27 xviii. 10 14
16-20; 23-35; xix. 10-12; XX. i-i6j xxi. 4, 5; 10, 11
;

17-21; ^6, 37; 40;

/5

23

28-30

41

xiii.

14-16; 28-32; 43; xxii. 1-14 (?)i; 40; xxiii. 1-3; 5

7-10; 15-22; 24; 30; 32, 33; xxiv. II, 12; 2o<5; 30a
XXV. 1-12 14-30 (?) 31-46 xxvi. 15^; 25; 50; 52-54
xxvii. 3-10
24, 25
19
36 43 51 6-53 62-66 xxviii
;

2-4; 9-20.
^

The doubt only extends

B 2

to verses i-io.

to

3
th-S

5^
^ o

H
O
iz;

.5"

in

>

(M

KO
CO

><

M
'^
.E t^-"
oj

4)

2
-"

><

>
^ c
^
.- V O
1

CO

.-

(J

>-l

'CQ

*j

c
o

S -

j< B
vS B

S I

>

"-^

I> -^

j^

tn
(U

- c 'Eb
.5 " o

<

-lO 9

-^ 0 xsa^

:^

NHOf

M N M

\0

fO'~

anvj
.o

siDy

0^

axa^;

coV,

feo

XHVI^
SJJBJ

M lO M

UOIUUIOQ

It

'1

"sd^q^

IBJOX

'^S '*"^oo r^io^voco ic^^vo

o
CO

d,
.is

,0

t- ic\o

a.

^
.S

a,
c'C >
e
O J S

00

4)

-3

<->

in

13

<

<3 t3

3<"

os"

S
> X

B u

''

*j

in

c c

T3

ui

or:

u
.~ u
vo S

'^

00

tn

X ?
X i
.S

VO
1^ co;2

^^

" J.
00
SCO

>

>pi!

C ^
_
.5 u
C .p c

>

:=

>

T3 Oi
"^

"a

I-

SO
_

,:il

-e

. -I :!

i^

CO

o.

Words and Phrases

characteristic
H.
tions

:=

>

a.

^-~.

CO

^"^

so

a.

lu

>^

.^
)
-

V
o c S

>.

O
i;

i.

X tovt
" h
N h'2

5-?
g e
rt >
o
C3

4-

Pt. i

I.

of each of the Synoptic Gospels

Mt

Other words and phrases, which do not fall under the

or
rules, but nevertheless are to be noted as more

above

Matthew's Gospel, are

less characteristic of St.

edVLKos,

kraipos, Kara

hia tovto,

'

ovK or ovbiiTOTe aviyvMTe

against
;

koVjuos, ixa$r]Tev(>>, /ixaAaKia,

',

oyXoi, TTOvrjpos (besides the cases

with the article noticed above), aetco, (})r]ixL And see addion the fewness of imperfect tenses (p. 51).

tional note

Some Remarks on

Matthaean Words and

the above

Phrases.

Out

once or more

Luke 46
of that book
in

and phrases, 25 are found

43 of them in Mark and ^6

of the 95 different words

in chapters

of

them

in

i,

ii

Acts, and

1 1

in the

'

We '-Sections

(see pp. 176, 184).

B
Chapters
Gospel,
whole.

i,

ii

contain 48 of the 1,068

verses of this

only about one twenty-second part of the

But they contain considerably more than one-

i. e.

ninth of the occurrences of the

'

characteristic

'

words and

This
partly accounted for
phrases, viz. 107 out of 904.
by the use of yewaco 40 times in the genealogy but even if
is

those 40 items are deducted from both numbers, chapters i,

ii are found to contain
upwards of one-thirteenth of such
occurrences,
'

viz.

characteristic

more

freely in

'

67 out of 864.

It appears, then, that these

words and phrases are used considerably

these two chapters than in the rest of the

book.
^

but the best texts and

According to the ordinary numbering 1,071
R. V. omit xvii. 21 xviii. 11; xxiii. 13 or 14, thus reducing the number
;

to 1,068.

Word and

lo

Phrases characteristic

Pt. i

C
Taking the whole of the

'

'

peculiar

or

unparalleled
Gospel, including chapters i, \\} it fills about
338 out of the 1,068 verses, i. e. less than one-third, which

matter

in this

would be
'

of

verses.

-3,^6

'

characteristic

abundant

in

the

of the Gospel

It

thus appears that the occurrences

words and phrases are very much more

'

'

than

peculiar

for there are

in

the

482 of

common

'

them

'

portions
'

'

in the

peculiar

and only 422 of them in the 'common' division,

while the latter is more than twice as large as the former.
division

should be observed, however, that several of the words

It

which do most
bo)ixt,

in

producing

this

predominance (e. g. imc^iare words which

ydixos, yivvdoi, ^i^dvtov, 6[xvv(o, rdXavTov)

are required

by the

subject-matter, and which therefore are

not important as evidences of style.

SECTION

II

WORDS AND PHRASES CHARACTERISTIC OF

ST.

As

this

Gospel

by more than

is

mark's gospel

shorter than either of the other two

one-third, the standard for determining

words and phrases are

from that which

different

'

characteristic

is

applied to

of

what

should be

it

Matthew and Luke.

therefore take as such the words and phrases which

occur at least three times in Mark, and which either
I will

{a)

hi

Of
^

Matthew or Luke, or {b) occur

than in Matthew and Luke together.

are not found at all in

Mark more
these, 41

For

often
^

are here collected and tabulated

the differences

2 of

them

both in form and substance between the two

genealogies are so great that they cannot be regarded as dependent on

a common source, though they contain many of the same names.
^
This number would be reduced from 41 to 31 if we took (as
and Luke) only those occurring 4 times and upwards.

in

Matthew

II.

Mk

of each of the Synoptic Gospels

are bracketed, 5 are

marked

and

f,

7 are

ii

marked *

(see

on

these marks p. a above).

The

parts of the Gospel here regarded as

'

peculiar

',

because without parallels in Matthew or Luke, amount to

about 50 verses, viz. i. i 33 ii. 27 iii. 9 \'] b\ 20, 31
;

iv.

vi.

26-29; ofib\

32-37

50 ^

viii.

X. 10

xiv. 51,

52

32

56/^

<5

(not

59

c)

ix.

xv. 8

xi.
;

52;

37/5;

15

16

21

21

/5 ;

20^; 31;

14^; 22-26
;

23,

24

xii. 32,

25

2-4; 24^;

vii.

44,

33

45

30; 48, 49

34 b

xiii.

xvi. 8 b.

12
1) J- > w
o 3 5 ^2
"

- iS

O (0
2

t;
rt

I/,

^S
o o

X
"

1)

li

O u

;k

\o .5

.ri

H
O

CO*

"H ii 'o S*

In

lU

OC/5.E

"!

""^
:

1-1

I, -cs

"f

"^ rH

^^.^H

^
r"*^

">.

X 'N
.CO

-^0

J^sa^

!r;

'^

'y

1=

oJ=

<"

2 o

13

IVords and Phrases characteristic

14

Pt. i

There are some other words, &c,, which do not quite fall
rules, yet which deserve consideration as

under the above

viz. d\Aa, Ik (compared with

where Matthew and Luke have b4,

being characteristic of Mark,

amo)^ (nepodrdti),

Xva} kuC

the historic present in other words besides epxo/xat (e.g.

Aeyo),

(Tvvdyio, &c.), -niopovv,

(f)(poL>,

The omission

of

Tiopevopiai,^

and

TTCopo^ais.

except in

ix.

30

WH

(not

Tisch or R) is remarkable, since it occurs in Matthew 28,

Luke 50, Acts 37, John 13 also in Appendix to Mark 3,
;

and

in Pericope de

omission of koI

Adidtera

Ibov,

3.

Observe also the entire

and, in narrative, of Ibov

absence of the form karm and of the word vopos

(Matthew 26, Mark

and the

also the

Luke 43, but cf. also

John 2), and of ovr (Matthew 56, Mark 4. Luke 31, John 194).''
rarity of KaXelv

Some Remarks

on the above

4,

Marcan Words and Phrases.

A
Out of the 41

different

words and phrases,

6 are found

'

50 peculiar verses, while 25 of them are found in

Matthew, 22 in Luke, 22 in Acts, and 7 in the We 'in the

'

Sections of that book (see pp. 176, 184).

B
The 50

verses which have been regarded as

'

'

peculiar

to this Gospel constitute nearly one-thirteenth of the 661

contained

verses

Appendix,
^

in

the whole

Gospel

(excluding the

But they contain nearly one-tenth

historical books are Mt 41, Mk 65, Lk 45, Acts

xvi. 9-20).

The numbers

in the

15, John 145. It must be remembered always, in estimating the significance

of such numbers, that Mk is less than two-thirds of the length of Mt or Lk.

mind, we may notice that rjp(aTo, ^p^avro are found in Mt 9

25, Lk 19, Acts 5, Jn 1.
'
The simple verb is not used but on the other hand we have seen
above that daTroptvofmi and (Kiropfvofiai are more or less characteristic of Mark,
and he uses also itapa-, irpoa-, aw-, and probably dianopfvofxai.
^
On ISov see J. H. Moulton, Gram, of N. T. Greek, i. ii.
*
See Abbott, Joh. Grant., 2191, and Joh. Voc, 1885 d.
*
According to the usual numbering 666; but the best texts and R. V.
omit vii. 16; ix. 44, 46 ; xi. 26 ; xv. 28, thus reducing the number to 661.

Bearing
times,

this in

Mk

Mk

II.

of each of the Synoptic Gospels

15

of the occurrences of the characteristic words and phrases,

viz. 37 out of "i^^"].
So those words and phrases are rather

more frequent

the

in

'

'

than

peculiar

in

the

common

'

parts of the Gospel.

For further discussion of the language of this Gospel,

ff. on the uses of the

see below, Part III, especially pp. 143

historic present

and

kqi.

SECTION

III

WORDS AND PHRASES CHARACTERISTIC OF

LUKE'S GOSPEL

ST.

'

'

Here, as in the case of Matthew, I take as characteristic

the words and phrases which occur at least four times in

and which either {a) are not foimd at all in

Matthew or Mark, or [b) are found m Luke at least twice
as often as in Matthew and Mark together.
Of these 151 will be found here 8 of them are bracketed,
1 1 are marked
f, and 'Xi are marked *, for the reasons given

this Gospel,

on

p. 3.

Chapters

and

containing 132 verses, are placed in

ii,

by themselves. The other portions of the Gospel

a column

which are here regarded as peculiar because without

parallels in Matthew or Mark, amount to about 367 verses,
',

viz.

10-14; 23-38;

iii.

11-17

36-50

17-20;

47-50; 57;
XV. 6-32

32

xviii.

24; 38;

(?)

28-42;

iv.

viii.

16-30

1-3

xi. 5.-8;

(?); v.

ix.

31

vi.

i-ii(?);

51-56

12; 27,28;

34-26; vii.
x. 1 ;
61, 62

37,38;

xii.

13-31;

xiii.

1-17; 31-33; xiv.i-14; 15-24 (?); 38-33;

1-13 14, 15
xvii. 7-19
38, 29
19-31
1-14 ; xix. i-io
11-37 (?) 39-44 \ x^i* ^3 ^^
xvi.

xxii. 15;

37-32; 35-38; 51; 53^;

xxiii.

46 xxiv. 13-53.' (See also pp. 194

some smaller Lucan additions not included here.)

'^1-?i^\

39-43

7-12;
ff.

on

xii. 54, 55 and xx. i8 have to be added

(bringing up the number of verses
to 370), if the parallels to them in Mt xvi. 2, 3 and xxi. 44 are rejected from
the text. Perhaps, indeed, the former passage should be added in
case.

any

i6
;N
^

tn

d-f. 13

3<

HS
^

- a-Oi

Cm
H
O

fc l-J

(0

a. CD

I I s ^:<o
K

>- f*^ *-

ot*q

2~<
lO

X 'N

-^o J-sa-a

"c :
C

"I;;

R)

lOVO fO N

.-<:

=5-1-1

-s

<

00

_EJj
OS

^ -2 ;r

HH

ei

00

.S

'O

CO

NHof

mvj

::

^^

'^'^<^m:m'-'"^m

6UOI)33S
.8A^',

'MX

IllAXX-IUX

'sd^HO

H
O

<

nx-i sdBq3

FJOX

vo

cog :m :ooicN :voi?

bo

uotuuio3

II 't

sd'Bio

PIOX

CO

XSVI\[

AVaHXXVJ\[

,0)

M M M M

'+^'*-'?-'<h7;^-.4-lO^O "^^

"tt

T(-M-'*-'^Vi

17

i8

o
00

^ -H

-io

o
.

,;.!

in

xsa^

XHOf
'invj

Ml.VXX-illX
:

w rofOroroN wvo

"sdBi|3
iix-i

"sdBqo

FoX

^-r21,2^

SJJBJ

UOUIUIO3

''t-

10

ICOO "^

SJJBJ JBII
-nDSj jsqio
II

'1

"sdcq^

FoX

to

On^

^ 1^

-*

10

M
'I-

^^

t-^

HHVJ\[
MaHi,i.vx\[

^wfO- 'co' IlO'-'C^N"

.-l-

ei

jo"?~
I.

to

iH

> >

*i II

<*;

.2

(u

tit

Si:

"T

<3

iHiH

5a

(u

CO

TO
S^_^
<

-S -S
'^

==

2 -2 >

in

by
a

toPk
*^

(U
*

i;

U-*

CQU
a

20

CO*

21

r-r

Tjf

eq

22

<-

-u

t^

^-J

Zoo

H
H
O

rH

"'oh
" o

J.
<5CI

to"

'N

-^0

(u

1)

J-sa^

NHof

invj

M-

mCO

SUO!)33S

niAxx-iux

fO

<

iix-i sd'Eio

Fiox

.0)

c.

Sum

g<

23
00

Words and Phrases

24

in

characteristic

Pt.

And, besides the instances which will be found entered

two subsidiary lists in an Appendix (pp. 27, a8), there

some other words and phrases which, though not quite

under the above rules, are to be observed as more

are

falling

or less characteristic of Luke,

a\r]6Qs with Ae'yo)

vixlv,

iyyiCo (especially in narrative),

and

avO'

afxaprcokos,

are often uncertain),

readings

k^ijs,

KaTc'xo), ixiTCLvoia, ixovoyevrjs

with tov \6yov,

&v, anas (but the

hia to

8et,

with participles, 0eos,^

ya-av

okovo)

viz.

with

infinitive,

al Ipjyjuot, evAoye'co, ^v

KaOeirjs,

Ka9(as,

koi

yap,

(always with datives), obvvdoiiai,

oLKos (as against olna), Trpoo-e'xere tavrols, (nnvbco,

avvyjxLpui,
'vytaLVd), (f)6(3os.

Observe also the extreme rarity of the historic present in

the narrative (only in vii. 40 viii. 49 xi. ^7, 45 xxiv. 1 2 (?),
;

in contrast

^6

(?),

of

aix-qv

Mark 151)^; the

Luke 6), and of

with Matthew 78,

(Matthew

31,

Mark 13,
Luke 3), and

rarity
ttolKlv

Mark 28,
of vTrdyco (Matthew 19,
Mark 16, Luke 5; see Abbott, yo/i. Voc, 1653 f); the
absence of pa^^d (Matthew 4, Mark 3, John 8 only).
(Matthew

17,

Some Remarks on

Lucan Words and Phrases.

the above

A
Of

the 151 different words and phrases, no less than 77,

being more than half of them, occur once or more in

them are found in Matthew and 69 of

and
there are no less than 115 of them
Mark;
Acts, and 45 in the brief We '-Sections of that book

chapters

them
in

i,

ii

91 of

in

'

(see pp. 176, 184).

B
74 of

them are absent from chapters

1,

ii

only 15 of

them are absent from the 'other peculiar' portions (see

below), and only 6 of them from the whole of the peculiar
'

There are some uncertainties as

to readings, but the

numbers

in

the

books are approximately Matthew 52, Mark 47, Luke 122, Acts
162, John 77. (Only the references to the One God are included.)
*
See more on this below, pp. 149 ff.

historical

III.

Lk

of each of the Synoptic Gospels

portions including chapters

'
the ' common portions.

i,

ii

and only

2 of

25

them from

c
The number

Luke ii is 133, being rather

more than one-ninth of the 1,149^ verses into which the
Gospel is divided. But they contain 3 2, e. almost exactly
of verses in

i,

one-seventh, of

the occurrences of

i.

'

the

characteristic

words and phrases. So we find here (as in the case of

Matthew, but not to so large an extent) that such expressions are used more abundantly in the first two chapters
than in the rest of the Gospel.

D
In the other 32 chapters there are 367 verses which have
here been classed as peculiar to Luke, as being apparently
'

'

drawn from sources not used by Matthew or Mark. When

the 133 verses of chapters i, ii are added to these, we have
'

'

altogether 499

peculiar

verses in this Gospel.

constitute very

1,149 verses.

common
against 650
to say, the peculiar portions

That

is

'

'

verses

more than three-sevenths of the whole

little

But they are found to contain 777, or more

'

than half of the 1,483 occurrences of the 140 characteristic

words and phrases, which are thus seen to be scattered
'

considerably more thickly over the

'

common

And

'

'

than the

peculiar

'

portions.

here

we

find, to

much

extent than

larger

found in the case of Matthew, that the

expressions which thus predominate

'

we

characteristic

are on the whole

'

''^

such as are indications of the author's style, not being

merely words required or suggested by the subject-matter
:

see e.g. lyivtTo Kai

nouns
'

^
'

Not
See

koX avro's

rov before infinitives

According

R. V. omit

xvii.

to the ordinary

36 and

xxiii. 17,

d>s:

Kuptos;

o/xoiws

rts

with

when.^

numbering 1,151; but the best texts and

bringing down the number to 1,149.

exclusively, for Zma and \xva are exceptions.

also ctos, (vtppaivoj, icoi\ia, mfJ.iT\r)ixif iiKovaios, <pi\os.

Words and Phrases

26

characteristic

Pt.

SECTION IV
GENERAL REMARKS ON THE WORDS AND PHRASES
CHARACTERISTIC OF THE THREE SYNOPTIC GOSPELS

A
The
is

chief result of an examination of the above lists

a very strong impression that the compilers (or at any

rate Matthew and Luke, for probably Mark is mainly

a source) dealt very freely with the sources which they
used.
To a large extent they clothed the narratives, and

some extent they clothed the

to

derived from those sources, in their

Therefore
wise be to

sayings,^

own

Lucan).

they

less surprising to me than it would otheras after a careful search I have failed, to find

it is

fail,

any expressions which can be certainly

teristic of

which

favourite language.

set

down

as charac-

source (whether Logian, Marcan, or specially

any
See also

p.

113 below.

B
The following is a comparative summary of results as to
the distribution of the characteristic words and phrases
:

In Matthew, they are scattered more than twice as

thickly over the peculiar portions (including chapters i-ii)
1.

as they are over the

common

portions.''^

In Mark, they are rather more thickly scattered over

the small peculiar portions than they are over the large
2.

common

portions.

3. In Luke, they are scattered slightly more than half

as thickly again (but very much less than twice as thickly)

over the peculiar portions as they are over the

common

portions.
^
On the far greater frequency of verbal coincidences in the recitative
than in the narrative portions of the Gospels, see Westcott, Introduction

Study of Gospels, pp. 198-200 (8th ed. 1895).

But this is largely caused by the special subject matter of some of
the parables, and by ytwaoj
therefore 15 of the Matthaean words are
bracketed, as comparatively unimportant, against a of the Marcan and 8 of
the Lucan ones.
to

"^

Appx.LLk

H
<

O
X
IH

<

of each of the Synoptic Gospels

2r]

Words and Phrases

28

-1

"

3
bo
S
-S

t-,

rt

^
^

^ O
-^

iH

aj

bo

'

a^

S o

C/3

^P

.2

- -^

C/3

c3

bo
c3

<

Si

-c

IK
<^

j3

t:

tO "
o

ii
rt

>%

-g

S ^

1^

en

"*

-5

--

CO

Ju

t-

C ^ bo
c3 H
O
,

en

id

characteristic

Pt.

Appx.

I.

Lk

of each of the Synoptic Gospels

N

J^
oo--=

>i2

=
"S

>

<

"O .~

"

o c

CO.-:

!1

k;

>
o ^

-C
>.

^^--^-^
X e Sot
S IJ

!^0
a. SO

29

Words and Phrases

30

APPENDIX

TO PART

II

Pt.

give the references to the occurrences of those of the

HERE

characteristic

words and phrases' on pp. 4-21, which do not

stand consecutively in a Concordance, and which therefore cannot
'characteristic

be quite easily traced there.

WORDS AND PHRASES CHARACTERISTIC

OF ST. MATTHEW'S GOSPEL

I.

^aaiXeia tuc
Mtiii. 2;

23

V. 3,

17;

xiii.

12;
4,

iv.

II,

24, 31,

xix. 12, 14,

Paul

Jn

8,

33,

23

Compare ^aaCKda
6,

20

10, i9<5/j,

o\jpo.v5)v.
;

xx.

Rev

viii.

Mt

4,

Mk

See Allen, Infr.

1.

x. 7

xi. 11,

19; xviii.
14; xxv. i.

xxiii.

11;

xvi.

52;

xxii. 2

Tov Qfov, or eeov,

2,

21;

vii.

44, 45, 47,

14,

to

Lk

3,

i,

32, Acts

Matt,,

Ivi

and

Ixxi.

See additional note,

p. 52,

on

the use of ov/jaroy

and

ovpavoi.

yvr]B-f\T<a.

Mt

vi.

Acts

ix.

29*; xv. 28*; xxvi. 42.

xi.

9 (LXX).
These three times with reference

Mt

13*;

20 (LXX).

i.

Rom

viii.

10;

i.

24;

ii.

21;

13, 14, 20,

viii.

26

to miracles of healing.

19 (also 6 in

ix. 7,

TRWH

mg).

Lk

xi. 8.

xxi. 8 of the risen Christ.

Jn

Rom

vi.

vii.

{-vri);

the

Lucan

viii.

34;

Cor

v.

15

(-t)

all

of the

risen Christ.

Compare

els

Mt

viii.

19;

which,
in

Mk

xviii.

if (Is
V.

is

dvaards.

= Tis (or our indefinite article).

24

(?)

xxi.

19; xxvi. 69.

the right reading,

22 as xxvi. 69 does to

>'a

(Perhaps also

would correspond
tUv in

Mk

xiv. 66.)

to

ix.

18,

tls tS>v

Appx.

Rev

of each of the Synoptic Gospels

Mt

II.

31

xix. 17.
13; ix. 13; xviii. 21
Heb. Lex. also
See inx (under headings 3 and 4) in
i.
H.
Moulton,
Gram.,
96 f.
Blass, Gram., p. 144; J.
Lk
in
Mk
xiv.
xxii. 50,
rts
the
use
of
d%
47 {?),
Compare

viii.

BDB

Jn

Mtv.

and hvo

47,

Lk

tivai in

18,

vii.

21, 27, 31, 33, 38, 43.

Rom
Rev

xi.

ix.

vi.

26 (LXX).

12,

('ppedtjaav in

(Also

Gal

iii.

16.)

ix. 4.

11;

i^|ji^pa Kpio-6(09.

Mt
2

x.

Pet

15
ii.

xi.

22, 24

iii.

xii.

36.

iv.

Jn

17.

See also Kpian.

after genitive absolute.

iSoij

Mt

20;

i.

&c.

Lk

ii.

13, 19

I,

32;

Ibov] 18,

10

ix.

xii.

46;

Ka\ i8ov,

5; xxvi.

Tisch with t^D

47;

latt

xxviii. 11.

xxii. 47.

used with names.

Xeyo/xci'os,

Mt

16;

ii.

17, 22,

33

i.

Mk
Lk

ix.

xi.

6,

x. 2

9;

xxvi. 3,

14,

36;

xxvii. 16,

XV. 7.

iii.

iv. 5,

Jn

18;

iv.

23;
dis.

xxii. I, 47.

Acts

vi.

25

9.

ix. 1 1

54

oaos

Mt

vii.

12

iii.

28

Mk
'Lk

vi.

iS

xviii.

1>2S

xxi.

xix. 13,

or

ai'

22

17;

xxi. 2.

fdp.

xxii. 9

xxiii. 3,

56.

ix. 5.

Acts

Jh

[WH

xvii.

ii.

xi.

Rev

39

22.

iii.

22.

iii.

19;

xiii.

15.
riaTTjp i]^!av, up.wi', aou, auTUf.

Mtv.

16, 45,

48;

18 Ms, 26, 32

Mk

xi.

25 (on

1697,

vi.

vii.

4,

I,

11

this case as

1711

a).

bis,

x. 20,

8,

(^/xojv

here only), 14, 15,

xxiii. 9.

29
43
unique in Mk, see Abbott, /oh. Vocab.,
;

xiii.

IVords and Phrases characteristic

32

Lk

vi.

Rom

20

iv.

xii.

36;

i.

Philem

Jnxx.

30, 32.

Cor

i.

Col

i.

3.

(Always

2 Cor
Thes i.

i.

Gal

iii.

Eph

13;

i.

Thes

Phil

i.

i.

ii.

16;

xvi.

17;

in Paul.)

ij/xwc

17.

V. 16,

45;

vi.

xviii. 10, 14,

Mk

i.

11,

naTT)p 6 iv (toTs)

Mt

Pt.i

xi.

vii.

9;

I,

oupams.
X.

21;

II,

xii.

32, 33;

50;

19.

25.
riaTTjp 6 oupdi'ios.

Mt

V.

vi.

48;

32; XV. 13; xviii. 35 ; xxiii. 9.

N. T. only Lk 1 (?), Acts 1.)

14, 26,

{ovpdvios besides in

Mt

Mk

45,

Lk

5,

God in the Synoptic Gospels

(See Dalman, Words 0/Jesus, E. T.,

used of

is

Altogether UaTr)p

17.

pp. i84fr.)

of Scriptures being

irXtjpjJw,

Mt

22

i.

ii.

xxvi. 54,

Mk
Lk

xiv.

Acts

Jn

Jam

38

ii.

V.

Rom
Jn
I

14

17

17

xiii.

35

xxi. 4

Mt xxvi.

(parallel to

56).

18

iii.

xiii.

18

xiii.

27.

xv. 25

xvii.

12

xix. 24, 36.

23.

37*, 39*
xii.

xvii.

vi.

Eph

vi.

Troi'ir]p<5i',

t<5,

of the

evil

one, or

evil.

13* ; xiii. 19, 38*.

16* ; 2 Thes iii. 3*.

15*.
13, 14

ii.

Jn

fulfilled.

xii.

xxvii. 9.

iroi'rjpiJs,

Mt

23

viii.

xxiv. 44.

16

i.

xii.

56

49

21

iv.

15, 17,

iv.

iii.

12*

the

Lk vi. 45

v.

Cor

v.

* In these cases

18, 19*.

word may be either masculine or neuter.

13 refer to men, so are not included here
:

see however the former passage.

(We have now seen that the parts of the Lord's Prayer which
are peculiar to Mt contain three expressions which are
'

'

characteristic

and

of him,

this one.)

irpos r6

Mt

V.

28

viz. yevrjdrjTto, Tlartjp 6 iv to7s oiipavois

vi.

xiii.

30

with

xxiii.

infinitive.

xxvi. 12.

Appx.

Mk
Lk

22.

xiii.

iii.

Cor

19.

iii.

13

Eph

ii

vi.

Thes

TO with infinitive occurs

(ft?

xxvi. 2
vii.

19

xxvii.

31

Mk

and frequently

22;

i.

xiii.

35

ii.

23;

15, 17,

xxi. 4

xxii.

Lk

Cf. TO flprjuevou

ii.

Mt

xiv.

9
3,

55

iii.

31

Thes

Mk
;

1,

Lk

v.

8.

iii.

Lk
17

1, viz.

Mt

xx. 19

also Acts

and other

in the Pauline

and once

pTi0cV,

Mt

33

xviii. I.

Acts
2

of each of the Synoptic Gospels

Mt

II.

1, viz.

Epistles.)

pr]0eis.
iv.

3 {prjeds);
xxiv. 15

14;

viii.^

17;

xii.

17;

Cor

xxvii. 9.

Acts 2, Paul 1 only.

1,

(TKacSaXi^ofjiai iv.

Mt

Mk

xi.

xiii.

57

xxvi. 31, 33.

vi. 3.

Lk

vii.

23.

Mt

xii.

14;

Mt

V.

(TUfi^ouXioi/ Xajxpdi/b).

29, 30

Cor
xi.

Jn

12

vi.

23
;

7; xxviii. 12.

xix. 10.

Cor

i,

viii.

10.

xviii. 14.

used

is

participle

xii. 7

xviii.

X.

xvi. 7

50;

The

15; xxvii.

xxii.

Cor

xii.

same sense

in the
;

Heb

xii.

Ti troi, or ofAiv, SoKei

Ml

xvii.
xi.

Jn

25*

xviii.

12*

xxi.

These four

Compare

a [in Tisch and

XV. 14
ii.

ix.

Jn

Pet

42*

xxvi. 66.

in sayings of Jesus.

also tIs

Tu4)X6s

Rom

xxii. 17,

Acts xx. 20

56.

Mt

28*

in

10.

SoKtt aoi kt\. in

Lk

x. 36.

used metaphorically.

WPI mg

di's]

xviii. 16,

17, 19, 24, 26.

19.

39, 40, 41.

i.

Mt

XV.

Rev

143

iii.

17.

[di's)

and Lk

vi.

39

3is are

they form part of the material of a

used in the literal sense.
HAWKINS

not included, because

'

parable

',

and thus are

Words and Phrases

34

characteristic

Pt.

(f>aii'0)xai.

Mt

20;

i.

28

Mk

ii.

ix,

xi.

Cor

Jam

The

active

xiii,

iv.

14

<^aiVa) is

Thayer's Lex.,

viii,

xxiii. 27,

26;

xiii.

33;

9.)

s,

Pet

13*

22*

ix.

15.

18.

used Jn 2,

Pet

1,

Jn

1,

Rev

See

4,

v.

xv.

ii.

iv,

cKctj'T),

28*

in narrative.

xvii.

18*

xviii. i

xxvi. 55.

21.

vii.

Acts

xvi.

Phil

7
i

wpa with

Mt
Lk

ix.

18;

5, 16,

xxiv, 11.

Rom vii. 13)2

Heb

vi.

(Also in Appendix,

xiv. 64.

Lk

19;

7, 13,

xxiv. 27, 30.

xvi, 33.

53 ; xix, 27,
Elsewhere only

iv.

Jn

and

in discourses

xi. 13,
32 ;
In these 4 cases used

iv.

Jn

Mt

x,

19

xxiv.

36; Mkxiii.

11,

Rev

in

of instantaneous cures

also

cf.

53-

WORDS AND PHRASES CHARACTERISTIC

II.

OF

MARK'S GOSPEL,

ST,

epxcrai, cpxoi'Tat, historic presents.

Mt

xxvi. 36, 40, 45,

Mk

40;

i,

ii,

X. I,

22;

18

3,

20, 31

iii.

xi,

46;

Ms;

15, 27

v, 15,
xii,

38

22, 35,

vi,

i,

48

viii.

18; xiv, 17, 32, 37, 41, 66;

xvi, 2.

Lk
Jn

viii,

49,

iv. 5,

3j XX.

vi.

(?)

I, 2, 6,

20

xi.

18,

26;

(.?),

38

xii.

12

(?),

LXX

In

and

22

(B-text) only 27 times, of which

18 of these in i Ki.

26

o eoTtf, without a participle.

Mk

iii.

Col

i.

Heb

17

24
vii.

vii.

11,

34

xii,

(?),

Rev

xxi.

bis

xiii.

xviii.

xxi. 13.

(.-').

42

xv. 16, 42,

are in

Kingdoms

Appx.

of each of the Synoptic Gospels

Mk

II.

and oiKos without mention of owner.

oiKi'a

Mt

ix.

Mk

ii.

Mk

iii.

28

xiii. i,

\;

xvii. 25.

36;

vii.

20;

iii.

24

17,

oTttf

Rev

II

iv.

x. 10.

with indicative.

and Tisch also have the

mg
xiii.

indie, future after orav in

28.

oTi

Mk

with indie, in

av

Compare oirov
Rev xiv. 4.

Mk

28, 33

i.

viii.

Lk

ix.

xi. 19, 25.

WH

35

Ti interrogative

56 and perhaps

vi.

(why

in

?).

16 (but the reading and the interrogative sense are not

ii.

11, 28.

ix.

"beyond doubt);

See Thayer's Lex., s. v. o(tti% (4) ; Abbott, Corr. of Mark,

357 a ; Moulton's Winer, p. 208 note.
intransitive.

irapiaTtjfjii,

Mk

xiv. 47, 69,

iv.

29 ;
xix. 24.
19
Acts i. 10 ; iv. 10, 26

Lk

i.

Rom

xv.

(LXX)
Tim

10; xvi. 2 ; 2
22 ; xix. 26.

xiv.

xviii.

Jn

70

35

39.

(?),

ix.

iv.

39

xxiii. 2, 4

xxvii. 23, 24.

17.

TToWtl, adverbial.

Mk

45

i.

Rom
Jam

iii.

xvi. 6,
iii.

2.

In

all

v. 10,

12;

12

Cor

43

23, 38,

vi.

20

ix.

26

xv. 3.

xvi. 12, 19.

other cases ttoXXci

more probably an

is

accusative.

WORDS AND PHRASES CHARACTERISTIC

III.

OF

LUKE'S GOSPEL.

ST.

av with optative (see Additional Note, p. 53).

Lk

62

i.

Acts

v.

vi.

24;

11;
viii.

ix.

31;

xv. 26.

46

X.

17;

18; xxvi. 29.

xvii.

dj'aards, dcaardi'Tes.

Mt

ix.

Mk

i.

9; xxvi. 62.

35;

ii.

14;

vii.

24

x.

xiv. 57, 60.

xvi. 9.)

(Also in Appendix,

Words and Phrases

36

Lk

iv.

39;

i.

xvii.

19;

V.

39;

29, 38,

xxii. 45,

28;

25,

xxiii. i

46;

characteristic

vi.

8;

xi.

7,

Pt.

8; xv. i8, 20;

(Also in the very

xxiv. 33.

doubtful verse, xxiv. 12.)

Acts

Lk

xiii.

28;

7,

V.

Rom
Jam

v. 6,

15;

i.

I,

xiv.

16;

xii.

20;
ii.

14

16;

In Paul and James with, in Luke without,

Lk

V.

48;

xii.

10;

the rich (in

Mt

Z^t.

Codex D.

5 in

vi.

VW,

dTTO TOU

Acts

xi.

20.

ii.

i.

23;

xxiii. 9,

20.

Also in the addition to

Lk

x. 13, 20,

39;

18,

xxii. 10,

xxii. 58, 60.

ix.

ix.

34; viii. 27;

20; XV. 7;

17,

xxii. 18, 69.

52;

xviii. 6.

Cor

v. 16.

(Also in Pericope de Adultera, Jn

viii.

11.)

apxoi'Tes, of the Jews.

Lk

xiv.

Acts

iv. 5,

17;

And

35; xxiv. 20.

xxiii. 13,

26, 48

vii.

Jn

iii.

is

it

8,

xiii.

26;

27.

xii.

42.

(Cf. also

Lk

only

(xviii.

young) man

iii.

18)

i.)

who speaks of

as apxcov.
ycyoros, to.

Mk
Lk

V.
ii.

Acts

14

(= Lk

viii.

34).

15 (with prjun);

viii.

iv.

v.

21;

with

yivo}i.ai

Mt

Mk
Lk

(xxiv. 12 is not reckoned.)

34, 35, 36.

xiii. 1 2.

itti

and

accusative.

xxvii. 45.
xiv. 33.

65*;

i.

Mk)
Acts

iv.

iii.

2;

iv.

25,

^6f

xxiii.

44 (the parallel to

Mt and

xxiv. 22.

V. 5*,

22;

II*

*
(jio^os iyivfTo (cf.

Acts

iv.

here
yivofiai

Rev

and

X.

10; xxi. 35.

also ActS

xix.

10,

ii.

t 6dfi0os

43).

iyivero.

referring to time, are not included

see p. 187.

eVt is followed
xvi.

18 (Acts

by a genitive

xi.

28

is

in

Lk

not in point).

xxii.

40; Jn

vi.

21

Lk

II.

Appx.

of each of the Synoptic Gospels

37

%\ Kai.

Mt

X,

Mk
Lk

30

xiv.

31

4;

ii.

18

Acts

(?)

iii.

xii.

12

54, 57

Cor

18;

iv.

iv.

iv.

xxii.
xiii,

Cor

not reckoned.)

is

49

(xxiv.

36

xxiii.

iv.

vii.

3, 4,

11

xi,

viii.

Tim

24;

13,

xxi. 16

39

61

ix.

xviii.

x.

xix.

19

32

xi.

xx. 11,

32, 35, 38.

xix. 31

vi.

22

xvi. i,

vi.

V.

v. 10,

24;

5
16

Tim

15;

i.

11

v.

41
12

xiv.

viii.

xxv. 24.

16;
16

26; V.
26 ;

ii.

Rom

17

XV. 40.

9,

xxi.

31;

12,

xviii.

xiv.

5; Tit

iii.

xxiv. 9.

15
v.

Eph

6;

ii.

28

xxii.

28

xv. 15 (?);

11

Piiil

iii.

Philem

14;

9, 22.

Jn

ii.

Jam

Mt
Lk

xv. 24

Pet

xviii. 2,

xix. 19,

xviii.

15;
21
21

i.

xiii.

xxi. 25.

(Cf. also v. 16.)

'lapa{]\.

31

xxi. 19.

Cor

vii.

xiii.

16;

13;

47.

xxi. 20.

XV. 6, 9

xxiii.

43;

18

xi.

Mt and Mk);

(Cf. also
vi.

20

xiii.

Cor

(Cf. also xiv. 13

iyivero, followed

Mt
Lk

39

25, 26 (the parallel to

V.

20;

iv.

Rom

ii.

12.

ii.

Acts

i.

8; XV. 31 adding

ii.

xvii,

Jn

23

2, 25;
15
Jude 14.
These references can only be verified in Bruder, for Moulton
and Geden's Concordance omits both S/ and Kai.

ix.

Mk

iii.

ii.

48.)

ix

13

xv. 8

by

Gal.

24.

i.

xvii. i, 4.)

Kai.

ix. 10.

V. I, 12,

viii.

17;

i,

22;

ix.

xiv.

51;

xvii.

i;

xix.

11;

15;

xxiv. 4, 15.

Acts

v. 7 (?).

cyeVcTo, followed

Mt

vii.

28;

xi.

xiii.

53;

xix.

by

finite verb.

xxvi.

i.

(In

all

5 cases with

0T6 eTfXfaev, after discourses of

Jesus.)

Mk
Lk

i.

i.

iv. 4.

8, 23, 41,

xi.

I,

14,

59

ii.

xvii.

27;

i, 6,

14;

15,

46

xviii.

vii.

35;

11
xix.

ix.

29;

18, 28, 33,

xx.

30. 51cy^i'CTo,

Mk
Lk

ii.

23.

iii.

21*,

followed by infinitive.

(Cf. also yiftrai,

vi. i, 6,

12

Mk

xvi. 22.

ii.

15.)

37

xxiv.

Words and Phrases

38
Acts

iv.

I,

ix. 3,

5;

xxii. 6,

xi.

32, 37, 43;

17

xxvii.

44

26;

characteristic
xiv. i

xvi.

pt.

16; xix.

xxi.

xxviii. 8, 17.

The total occurrences of iyevero in the historical books are

Mt 13, Mk 16, Lk 71, Acts 52 (besides iyivero 2), Jn 17.
We find eyevfro 8e Lk 17, Acts 21 only. Cf. Plummer's note
Cn7. Commentary on Luke, p. 45
and Dalman's
Words 0/ Jesus, E. T., p, 32 and J. H. Moulton, Gram, of
N. T., i. 16, 70.
in //,

El oe )xi^Y^-

Mt
Lk
2

vi.

V.

ix.

17.

36, 37

Cor

xi.

8e

X.

iii.

15

20;

X.

29;

i.

Acts

viii.

Mk

occurs

fiT]

With

Jn

2,

xii.

Mk
Lk

45

xviii.

xxii. 23.

36;

22

xvi.

&c., with dative.

xix. 27.

xi. 23, 24.

i.

38
Acts

14;

ii.

x.

39

iv.

32

io(?), II

Rom
Jn

2.

see p. 35.

tiv]

Rev

2,

viii. 9
xv. 26*
ix. 46*
17*; XX. 16; xxi. 33.

elfjii,

Mt

xix. 32.

optative (see Additional Note, p. 53).

iT),

Lk

xiii.

16.

ix. 2,

Jam

iv.

In

vi.

10;
xii.

vii. 5,

xxv. 16.
;

Cor

41

xviii.

30,

ix. 13,

42;

xiv. 10.

viii.

21

x.

xxi. 9;

10;

xxiv.

ix. 16.

xix 40.

44;

viii.

vii.

32, 33, [34];

20, 24

10

xviii.

7,
;

Rev

this

xxi. 7 bis.

case the classification of instances

is

uncertain and

unsatisfactory, because of the difficulty of determining

whether the dative is governed by the verb or by the

accompanying noun. Therefore such passages as Lk i. 45;

ii.
Rom ii. 14 ; i Cor i. 18 ; ii. 14 ;
39 xxii. 15
2 Cor ix. i
Phil i. 28 iii. 7 are omitted here,
xi. 14, 15
though suggested by Bruder, pp. 244-260. But it is
Acts

clear that this use of the verb substantive

of

As

is

Luke and

often the case with

ill

LXX

is

characteristic

Acts.

see, e. g.,

Lucan
?>

and

characteristics,

riaav in

Gen

xi.

it is

3 ^

frequent
xii.

20

of each of the Synoptic Gospels

Lk

II.

Appx.

xvi.

xiii.

5;

16;

xxxviii.

xxiii.

27

xxiv. 29,

20;

xxxix. 4, -5, 6;

and

cimi, after preposition

Lk

ii.

Acts

4,

Rom

20;

i.

Eph

v.

xvili.

12

i.

1 2

Phil

i.

xi. i,

xix.

36; xxv. 24; xxix.

26.

xlvii.

5;

article.
1 1

xxvii. 4.

iv.

26;

iii.

ix.

xix.

xl.

39

16;

11,

29;

viii.

(In Paul always

23.

fi?

xv.

16;

Cor

x.

6;

t6^

xvii. 5.

Jn

Jam

18.

i.

ctTrec irapapoXi]!'.

Mk

12.

xii.

Lk

vi.

39

16

xii.

xv. 3

xviii.

xix. 11

ctirei' 8^, ciTrai'

xx. 19

xxi. 29.

8^.

WH

xii. 47 is excluded, being placed in margin by

bracketed by Tisch.]

[Mt

Lk

i.

38

13, 34,

24

3,

31

xvii. I, 6,

41
Acts

22

v,

be, xi.

vii.

33

i,

viii.

29

xxiii.

25

xi, 2,

39;

xii.

28;

ix.

13,

xvi. 3, 25, 27,

xix. 9,

19;

xx. 13,

39;

15 ; x. 4; xi. 12 ; xii.
10.
xxv.
20;
(Cf. also unov

usage

in

viii.

11.)

Lake, The Resurrection, &c.,

xiv.

26;
iv.

neuter without noun.

10 his\ xix. 17.

3.
8c'.

vii.

V.

20.

36*

ix.

23

x. 2

xii.

54*

xiii.

6;

xiv. 7,

12

xviii. I.

Jn

xxvi. 5.

Mk
Lk

28;

ix. 5,

cXeY^c 8^, eXeYOf

Mt

viii.

50

3, II, 21, 22

23; XV.

this

eXdxio-Toi',
xii.

48,

108.

p.

Cor

(Also in Pericope de Adullera,

xii. 6.

vii.

xxii. 10.)

See some remarks on

X. 18,

67, 70; xxiv. 17, 44.

9; xix. 4; xxi.

xviii.

39

9,

xviii. 6, 9, 19, 26,

xxii. 36, 52, 60,

iii.

8;

xiii. 7,

41;

15, 16, 20, 22,

Lk

vi. 8,

13. 14, 20, 50, 59, 60, 61, 62

9.

Jn

iv.

and

'

VI.

71

X. 20.

8e KM.

xvi. i*

Words and Phrases

40

Lk

V.

22*;

viii.

12, 17*;

characteristic

10; xx.

xiii.

pt.

i*.

iv fiia tS)V finepcop.

iy rats i^|xepais raorais.

Lk

vi.

39;

i.

Acts

{iv Tois

Mt

ix.

more

is

Mk

xiii. 4,

Mk

iv.

Lk

i.

25

21

8,

i.

43

6, 27,

Acts

Rom
Heb

iii.

iv.

iii.

12, 15

and

iv;

for

21

iii.

30;

Lk

v. i,

38;

xi.

12

Mk 4, Lk 5,

ii.

Acts

narrative,
2

iv.

ix.

3,

viz.

36

ix.

3;

Cor

xi.

21

4, 15,
xi.
;

40, 42

xii.

ix.

18,

xiv. i;

30, 51.

15; xix.

Gal

15;
i.

18.

iv.

Hatch and Redpath's Concordance,

statistics
J.

viii. 5,

13.

see

N. T. generally,

1,27,37;

6;

viii.

viii.

LXX

Tw in

iv

3,

are in

with infinitive.

T<3,

xv. 13

(LXX);

8;

ii.

For

26;

iii.

viii.

35; xix. 15; xxiv.

xviii.

14;

i;

ii.

16 only 7

X. 35,

29.33,34,36,51;
xvii. II,

Mt

usual, viz.

48.
ii.

fierd.)

xxvii. 12.

vi.

24

i.

37.)
Iv

Mt

(Cf. also

xxiv. 18.

27.

but of these

iii.

Acts

xi.

fKiivms

fjii.

Rev

xxiii. 7

12;

vi.

15;

i.

of

the

'articular

H. Moulton, Gram.,

i.

infinitive'

s.v.

in the

216.

elepxofxai dird.

Mt

xii.

43;

Mk

xi.

12.

Lk

iv.

35

XV. 2 2(?); xvii. 18; xxiv. i, 27.

41

bis,

v.

viii.

2,

29, 33, 35, 38,

46

ix.

xi.

24

xvii. 29.

Acts
I

xvi. 18,

Cor

Jn

xiv.

xiii.

Rev

40; xxviii. 3.
36; Phil iv. 15.

xvi. 30.

xix. 5.
i^ipxofxai iK

Cf.

Heb

Jam

2,

Mt

1,

6,

Jn

Mk
1,

10,

Rev

Lk

0, Acts 4, Paul 2, Jn 5,

8.

eX", ^vith infinitive.

Mt
Lk

xviii.
vii.

Acts

iv.

25.

40, 42

14;

xii. 4,

50;

xxiii. 17, 18,

xiv. 14.

19; xxv. 26;

xxvii. 19.

Appx.

Eph
Jn

28

iv.

26

viii.

Heb

of each of the Synoptic Gospels

Lk

II.

vi.

Tit

8.

ii.

xvi. 12.

(Also Pericope de Aduliera,

(See also i Pet iv. 5 in Tisch, &c.)

13.

33

ii.

Acts

22

iv.

ix.

43

(?).)

xx. 26.

12.

iii.

Cf. inOnvp-dCoi

Mk

iiri,

xii.

7.
oLtto.

6epaTrucj

Lk

viii.

^iTi.

6aup,dtb>

Lk

41

V.

18

vi.

21

15 ;
(?)
In vi. 18 an6 may perhaps depend on
is not a
The phrase
parallel case.
vii.

viii.

2.

ivoxKovfifvoi,

viii.

43

only found once in

is

LXX.
180U ydp.

Lk

Acts
2

44, 48

i.

ix. 1 1

Cor

10

ii.

vi.

xvii. 21.

23;

II.

vii.

Ka9'

Mt

Mk
Lk

xiv. 49.
ix.

Acts

xi.

23;

Cor

Heb

3; xvi. 19

46, 47;

ii.

Kara nua-av
1

27

xix.

xvi.

ii.

Acts

Cor

11

xix. 9.

(Cf. also xvii. 17

xi. 28.

x. 11.

vii.

xxii. 53.

(Cf. also

iii.

12

13.)

apodosis.

xi. ^^bi's
(?).

8,

(Cf. also xiil, 25.)

10.

i.

Cor

Jam

21

47

xvii.

f]fiepav,\

XV. 31

vii.

iii.

Kat, in

Lk
2

t\]i.ip(xv.

xxvi. 55.

ii.

iv,

2.

15

Rev

xiv.

For other cases

10

in

(?).

Luke, see under i^iv^jo followed by

Kai.

Kai auTos, &c. (nominatives).

Mt

XX. 10; xxi. 27

Mk

iv.

Lk

i.

38

17*,

vi.

47

17*5 37;

46;

xiv. X,

xix.

35, 52.

vi.

XXV. 44

viii.

22*, 36;

M*>
34;

29

xxvii. 57.

xiv.

15

xv. 43.

28*, 37, 50;

ii.

20*;

vii.

12;

viii.

iii.

12; XV. 14*; xvi. 24*, 28;

2bu*,g;

xxii.

23,41;

23*;

i*, 22,

iv.

42;

xvii. 11,

ix.

15*;

v,

i*,

36, 51*; xi.

13*, 16;

xviii.

xxiv. 14*, [15], 25, 28, 31,

IVords and Phrases characteristic

42
Acts

viii.

XV.

13;

32

xxi.

xxii.

24;

pt.

xxiv. 15, 16; xxv.

20;

22;

xxvii. 36.

Rom

viii.

Phil

ii.

iv.

12,

Jn

45;

6;

II

v. 2

10;

15;

i.

xii.

11;

vi.

14;

Pet

iv.

ii.

xiv. 10,

Thes

viii.

Jn

ii.

14

ii.

21

xvii. 8, 19,

10;

vii.

ii.

14 his; Gal

xv.

31;

17, 18

i.

Hebi. 5;
ii.

xi.

23 bis\
24 Col

Tim

10;

xi.

ii(?);

6;

iv.

13, 15

2,

iv.

11;

10.

ii.

xviii. 28.

xvii.

17;

Eph

17;

ii.

Jam

iii.

20;

Rev

xix.

6;

xviii.

11;

xiii.

\^his\

xxi. 3, 7.

that

km

use of

It is the

oJtos where

no

be seen

I think,

sometimes

Instances of this may,

to decide

marked

above but
which cases should be

in the passages

difficult

intended

is

emphasis

special

specially characteristic of Lk.

is

is

it

dis-

In the other
tinguished as emphatic and unemphatic.
historical books the only case that can be decidedly called

unemphatic is Mk viii. 29.

are no such cases in Acts.

The preponderance

in

And

Lk of the

remarkable that there

it is

nominatives

alros^ &c.,

perhaps too slight to be significant

the historical books are Mt 17,
11,
Kai is

Mk

the

Lk

without

numbers

in

23, Acts 19,

Jnie.
Kal ouTos, &c. (nominatives).

Mkiv.

Lk

xvii.

Rom xi.

12

ii.

36;

i.

Acts

16.
xvi.
i3(?), 41 (?);

viii.

xx. 28

xxii. 56,

59.

7.

31

Tim

iii.

10.

xvii. 25.

Jn

Heb

xi.

39

Jn

iv.

3.

Rom

Cf. also Ka\ TovTo in

Phil

i.

28

Jn

5,

36*;

i.

xxi.

Acts

i.

37

vi.

xxii.

12, 23

vii.

15;

iii.

Koi

Cor

vi. 6,

Heb

ravra in

Eph

ii.

xi. 12.

with names or appellations.

KaXou'iACfos,

Lk

11

xiii.

and

11

viii.

ix.

10;

x.

39;

xix. 2,

29

xxiii. 33.

11

vii.

58

viii.

10*

ix. 11

x.

xiii.

i ;

XV. 22, 37; xxvii. 8, 14, 16.

Rev

i.

xii.

9;

xvi.

16;

[xix. 11*].

cases marked *.
Always with proper names, except in the three
is
the
8
different, viz.
In Heb v. 4 and xi.
meaning
'

summoned

'.

of each of the Synoptic Gospels

Lk

II.

Appx.

= womb
'

KoiXia

Mt
Lk

'.

xix. 12,
i.

Gal

44

15, 41, 42,

Acts

Jn

43

iii.
i.

21

ii.

xi.

27

xxiii. 29.

xiv. 8.

15.

iii.

4.

In this sense frequent in

LXX,

but 'very rare in classical

'

Greek (Plummer on Lk

i.

5).

Kupios, 6, in narrative.

Lk

vii.

13, 19

xix.

iv.

Jn

x. i, 39,

61

xxii.

8;

vi.

Also

23

in

xi. 2

41

42

xii.

xiii.

15

xvii, 5,

xviii.

bis.

xx. 20

xxi. 12.

Mk

to

Appendix

xvi.

20: in the

19,

former verse

perhaps with 'Ivo-ovs, as in the doubtful passage Lk xxiv. 3.

'
It is the constant title in the
Gospel of Peter ', being used
in
times
the
known
to us.
13
fragment
very often used of the risen and ascended Christ in the
other books of the N. T. perhaps Acts 20, Epistles 46,
Rev 2, but it is sometimes difficult to say whether Christ

It is

or the Father

referred

is

X^yw

Lk

V.

Mt

XV. 6

36

xii.

All these are cases in which

to.

stands alone, not with

6 Kuptos

41

xiii.

xviii. i

Xdyos Tou Oeou,

Mk

vii.

Lk

V. I

Acts

Rom

25;
2

viii.

31

32
I

iv.

vi.

xvii.

11,21

vi. 2,

Thes
12
9

xiii.

ii.

xi.
viii.

36

bis

13

Cor

23

i.

V.

Acts

Jn

27

vii.

iii.

22

7
;

X.

v. i,

fiera ToSro,

ii.

14
12 ;

xiii.
;

xiii. 5, 7,

ii.

iv.

17
;

2 Pet

iv.

Tim

iii.

44

xii.

Phil

ii.

(?),

46, 48

(?)

24.)

i.

Tit

Jn

ii.

14

14

Col

i.

Rev

i.

ii.

5.
;

xx. 4.

xii.

(LXX);

(Perhaps also

Tim

Pet

xix. 13

xi.

14;

xviii. 11.

xiv.

28.

13;

Cor

fieTci,

Lk

6.

13.

ix.

Heb

xx. 9.

(?).

iv.

xvi.

'lijo-ovy Xpto-ros'.

n-apaPoXi^i'.

xiv. 7

or

'I^o-ouy

vi.

xvii.

Taura.
xviii. 4.

20; xv. 16
i

xi. 7, 1 1

vii.
;

xviii. i.

xiii.

xix. 28.)

xix.

38

xxi. i.

(Cf.

Words and Phrases

44

Heb
5

iv.

Also

Pet

xviii. i

in

ii

i.

xix.

X.
i.

Cor

31

ix.

12

xv.

xvi. 12.
'

'

or

family

'.

'la-pafiX).

X. 5 (?)

vii.

xvi. 27

(.?)

oIkos

42 (LXX), (both

xix. 9.
x.

'la-pafjX);

2;

xi.

14;

16;

iv.

19;

xviii. 8.

Tim

16;

i.

ii.

vii.

36;

ii.

xvi. 15,
I

69

i, 2

iv.

household

XV. 24 (both oXkov

27, 33,

Acts

19

i.

pt.

(Cf. /itra tovto, vii. 1.)

Mk

to

Appendix
oTkos

Mt
Lk

Rev

xx. 3.

characteristic

iii.

4,

12

5,

v.

Tim

4;

i.

Titi. II.

Heb viii.

(LXX), 10 (LXX,

di's

nom., in

oi/ojia,

Mt

xxvii.

Mk xiv.
Lk

whose name was

&c.

',

perhaps an accusative).

27 6is;

25

ii.

viii.

iii.

8;

vi.

41

xxiv. 13.

xviii. 10.

11

viii.

11.

ix.

6v6}i.aTi

Mt

xi. 7.

xiii. 6.

i.

Rev

(rovi/o/Lia,

and Judah)

three of Israel

all

32.

5, 26,

i.

Acts

Jn

57

'

by name.

xxvii. 32.

Mk

V.

Lk

i.

22.

X. 38
V. 27
5
50; xxix. 18.
Acts V. I, 34; viii. 9; ix.

13

xvi. I,

xxvii.

10;

14

xvii.

10,

34;

2 (with KoKovnevos)

20; xix.

xvi.

11,

x.

36;

12, 33,

xviii. 2, 7,

24

28;

xi.

xix. 24

xxiii.

xx. 9

xii.

xxi.

xxviii. 7.

8s, in attraction.

Mt

xviii.

Mkvii.

Lk

xix.

Acts

36

15

Rom
4

20*

ii.

I*,
X.

22;

39*

iv.

17

xii.
;

Tit

19* ; v. 9 (?)
41; xxiv. 25*.

iii.

xxiii.

xxiv. 21

13;
i.

37*;

i.

xxiv. 50.

13.

i.

19

ii.

22;

xiii.
;

xv.

18

17, 21;
iii.

6.

39*

21*, 25;

iii.

xxv. 18
i

xvii.
;

i.

31

vii.

36, 43*

16,

xx. 38

17,

xii.

46

45;

xxi. 19,

viii.

24

xv. 16

24;

ix.

xxii.

10*,

x. 8,

xxvi. 2, 16, 22.

Cor

Eph

ix.

vi.

19

6,

8;

i,

39

10;

iii.

vii.

ii.

Cor

20;

iv.

i.

4,

i;

Thes

II.

Appx.

V.

vi.

8;

Pet

31, 39(?); xv.

vii.

Jniv. 14;

Heb

of each of the Synoptic Gospels

Lk

12

ii.

The only

'

10;

ix.

iil.

Jn

24
'

xvii.

20;

Jude 15

ii

(?), 9,

(LXX); Jam
;

ii.

Rev

his;

here considered

attraction

is

xxi. 10.

Pet

11;

that of the relative

On

various kinds of attraction see Winer, xxiv. 1-3.

In these cases with iravraiv, Traa-a>v, or naatv.

iv,

xviii. 6,

noun (expressed or understood).

to

pronoun

20

45

cf.

the

also

Jude 15.
ouxi, dXXd.

Lk

i. 60;
xii. 51
xiii. 3, 5
Romiii. 27; iCorx. 29.

xvi. 30.

ix. 9.

Jn

irapct

Lk

13;

iii.

xiii.

2,

iv.

18

beyond.

14 (but with some doubt as to the

xviii.

4;

text).

Rom
Heb

25;

i.

Gal
i.

i.

xii.

xiv. 5

Cor

iii.

11

Cor

viii.

3;

m loc).

9 (see Lightfoot,

8,

ix. 23
xi. 4, 1 1 ; xii. 24.
iii.
7, 9
3
13 Rom i. 26; xi. 24; xvi. 17 are omitted, because
the sense seems rather to be
and this may
contrary to
possibly be the case also as to one or two of the cases given

4, 9

Acts

ii.

xviii.

'

'

above from the

Epistles.

irapa tous TroSas.

Mt

XV. 30.

Lk

vii.

Acts

38

iv.

viii.

35, 37

35, 41
V. 2

xvii. 16.

vii.

58

iras,

Mt
Lk

xxii. 3.

Mk 2, Lk

Cf. iTpQs Tovs nodas

Acts

1,

1,

Rev

1.

or arras, o Xaos.

xxvii. 25.

10;

ii.

iii.

21*;

vii.

48*;
iii.

9, II

Heb

ix.

19.

iv.

lot

34;

x.

41

Also in Pericope de Adultera^ Jn

*

airay.

tto? 6

^aos

i.

41*

X.

26

xii.

7*

13, 18, 19, 34, 55,

13;

xiii.

24t.

viii.

xviii.

43; xix.

2.

^\(rpar\k.

used of speaking

irpos,

Mk iv.

ix.

47;

xxiv. 19.

V,

viii.

29;

XX. 6*; xxi. 38;

Acts

Lk

Jn

1,

to.

xv. 31*; xvi. 3*.

61;

ii.

15*,

18,

(xii.

12

20, 34, 48,

is

excluded.)

49;

iii.

12,

Words and Phrases

46

iv. 4,

13;

50;

24, 40,

43. 50. 57, 59> [62]

22

xvi.

V. 4,

21, 22, 25*; ix. 3,

X. 2, 26,

bis (?); xiii. 7,

16, 22, 41

XX.

43;
viii.

21, 23, 36*,

vii.

11;

9,

i; xvii.

xviii.

ii.

xii.

20;

excluded.)
X. 21 ;

Jn

viii.

Heb

iv.

3ij 33, 57

v.

xi.

Thes

iii.

39;

vii.

(?)

xvi.

39;

v.

23;
xi.

5,

14,

14; xix.

6,

xxv. 16, 22t;

(xxiii.

30

is

2.

21

xii.

Jn 12

49
19*

(?)

vi. 5,

xvi.

17*

Jn 14

28, 34

WH

vii.

3,

35*, 50

13

xix. 24*.

(Heb

(?).

i.

7, 8,

elnev npoi avrof.

+ In these 6 cases in Acts

TTpoi dXXfjXovs, eavrovs, eavray.

the verb

xviii.

37;

17, 21, 25.

18 are excluded.)
In Mt iii. 15
mg and Tisch have
*

15,

(?),

5, 8, 9, 13, 33,

xxiii. 3

25;

xxviii. 4*,

31*;

lit, 15; x. 28;

10,

36;

7,

15, 33*, 48,

21

XV.

ix.

xxii. 8, 10, 21,

ii.

xi-

xii. i,

12, 22, 25; iv. i, 8, 19,

iii.

26;

20,

(.?)

14, 26, 28t,

I,

Rom

ii.

21

15,

8,

viii.

3;

xxi. 37,

2t;

2,

xxvi.

vii.

39

70 ; xxiii. 4, 14, 22 ; xxiv.

28 and xx. 19 are excluded.)

(i.

38+;

12, 29, 37,

35;

8, 9t,

xix.

3,

13, 14, 23, 33,

7 bis, 23, 25; xv. 3,

3, 5,

31

9,

vi.

31, 33, 34, 36;

xi. i, 5,

xiv.

pt. i

xxii, 15, 52,

10, 14*, 17, 18, 25, 32, 44.

Actsi. 7;

10, 22,

29

23;

22;

i,

23, 25, 41

2, 3, 9,

characteristic

understood, not expressed.

is

CTTpa<()eis.

Mt
Lk

vii.

{<TTpa(f)evT(s)

Jn

vii. 9,

44

ix.

38; XX. 16

i.

55

ix.

x.

22

23

xvi. 23.

xiv.

25

Always used of

Jesus, except in

Mk, who never

Mt

uses arpaffids, has

33); Jn also has it in xxi. 22.
Tis

Mk
Lk

viii.
i.

Acts

62
v.

X.

Winer,

360.

vi.

27

xi.

vii.

xii.

ix.

18;

xxiii.

vii.

28.

6 and Jn xx. 16.

fntaTpa(f)fis

46; xv. 26

twice (v. 30

viii.

loc,

xviii.

36

xxii. 23.

xxi. 33.

more probably a

is

p.

xvii.

viii. 37
Gould, in

Mt

also

viii.

17;

Mk

Lk

61

with optative (see Additional Note, p. 53).

37(?).
vi. 11
;

24;

xxii.

(o-Tpa^eicra).

WH Notes,

So Swete and

subjunctive.

p. 168,

and Moulton's note on

9 (with avQpomo^y

25;

xi. 1 1 r'iva

*!

xiv.

28; xv. 4 (with avBpai-noi)

and xiv. 5 rtVo? vp.av ;)
;

v^Siv

xvii.

7.

(Cf.

Appx.ii.Lk

of each of the Synoptic Gospels

Mt

(Contrast his

with nouns.

Tis,
xviii. 12.

47

more frequent use of

fts

with nouns,

P- 30-)

Mk

xiv.

51

Lki. 5;
xvi.

iii.

59 (aXXo?
v. I, 2

X.

43;

36,

aXXovs),

xviii.

2,

14,

14, 16, 19

Rom

II, 13

i.

aWov)
xi. I,

16

aXXos)

Jn

46

i.

Heb

ii.

Jam
*

7,
i.

12

vii.

viii.

Gal

vi.

iv.

8 bis

iv.

46

39

12

With

12

11

16

xxiv.

Eph

Col

ii.

14

18

xi.

iv.

vi.

23

xiii.

xi.

9 (both LXX) ;
18 ; v. 12 ; Jude

Some

xiii.

16;

xv.

12;

xxi.

24

Phil

ii.

27

xv.

21, 34

39

xvi.

xxviii. 3.

Cor

quater

i.

16 {nva

Cor

2
iii.

x. 8

4 (ns

;
.

v. 4, 16, 24.

20

xii.

x.

lo, 19*, 33,

xiv.

xvii. 5, 6, 20,

xv. 26

xiv.

Tim

2;

(XXo rt); xx. 9; xxi.

bis, 18, 24* ; xxv. 13*,

ix.

15;

6,

24, 32

14,

i,

xxii.

ix.

v. 5,

5;

11

2,

xix.

xxiv. 22, 41.

xxvii. I, 8, 16, 26, 27,

ix.

26

25, 30, 31, 33,

xiv.

35;

18,

2,

xi.

48*;

31

34 (irepov nvos), 36

bis,

xix.

Tt)

26;

3/^-,

24;

23,

xviii.

x.

19;

8,

xiii.

xvi. I, 9, 12*, 14,

34 [aXXo

16,

(?),

36*

ix.

16

xxiii. 8, 19,

II,

5, 6,

I,

(rtj/a?

Tty)

(?)

xii. 4,

12;

viii.

27

2,

36;
xvii.

20;

19,

I,

xxii. 56,

10

viii.

41;

2,

bis\ xi. 1, 27,

38

Acts

xv. 21.

vii.

xi.

xxi. 5.

40

xii.

15 (LXX), 16;

4.

in these 6 places only.

r]iiipai

adjectives as

well

as

substantives are here included

under 'nouns'.
Tts

Mk

perhaps in
Acts

Lk

used with ds in

also

is

xiv.

47, 51;

xxii. 50
Jn
and with hvo in
;

i.

Acts

62

ix.

and

vii.

19;

46

xix.

48

xxii. 23, 24.

xxii. 30.

Rom

26.

viii.

And

there

Acts

iv.

is

a similar use of t6 before

21.

Cf. also

TO,

Mtxxiv.

Mk

49

Lk

xxiii. 23.

TO before the interrogative n's or xi

Lk

xi.

ii.

i.

Thes

iv.

ttSs in

Lk

xxii.

2,4;

i.

before prepositions.

17.

2.

Lkii. 39;

Acts

T(,

3*;

viii.

(iv.

i5(?);

24;

x. 7

xiv.

15

xix.

42;

xvii.

24

xxii.

37*

LXX);

15*; xxiv. 10*, 14, 22*, 22; xxv. 14;

xxiv. 19*, 27*, 35.

xviii.

25*;

xxiii. 11*,

xxviii. 7*, 10, 15*.

Words and Phrases

48

Rom

ix.

15;

i.

X. 7;

Eph

20*, 23*

Heb

TCL

v. i

TTfpi

<5/j

18

iv.

17;

ii.

vi,

Pet

Lk

20 bis;

i.

3;

37

to

i.

xxii.

Cor

22*; Phil

21,

Col

(in

18; xv. 17;

xii.

5
10

i.

characteristic

iii.

Jn

ii.

12,

27*, 29;

v.

ii.

19*,

8*.

iv. 7,

x.

16; (Rev

15,

Cor

10;

xiii.

i.

pt.

6/^rLXX).

Trepi).

ToO, before infinitives.

Mt
Lk

ii.

i
xxiv. 45.
xiii. 3 ; xxi. 32
21
iv.
10
74, 77, 79;
a(?), 24, 27 ;
(LXX)
51 ; X. 19 (?); xii. 42 ; xvii. i ; xxi. 22 ; xxii. 6

13;

iii.

13

xi.

ii.

i.

ix.

v. 7

(?),

viii.

31

xxiv.

16, 25, 29, 45.

Acts

iii.

xiv.

12;

2,

XV.

9;

vii.

;]

xviii.

20;

20; xxvi. 18

Rom

31

[v.

X. 7

x.

15;

47

xiii.

30

(?),

(LXX)

47

xxi.

xxiii.

12;

i.

6;
24;
3 ;
13; Gal iii. 10; Phil iii.

Heb

ix.

xx. 2o(?), 27

10;

xxvii.

di's;

vi.

i.

19;

vii.

viii.

12

xi.

10

dt's,

(LXX);

Cor

x.

10.
xi. 5 ; Jam v. 1 7 ; i Pet iii. 10 (LXX).
are excluded 14 cases (viz. Mt vi. 8;

(LXX), 9 (LXX) ;

From
Lk

the above

list

15; Acts viii. 40; xxiii. 15; 2 Cor vii.

Gal ii. 12; iii. 23; Jn i. 48 ; xiii. 19; xvii.
5 ; Heb ii. 15; Jam iv. 1 5) in which the tov is governed by
a preposition (usually irpo) or by ew? used as a preposition

xxii.

21(5;

ii.

II ^;

viii.

12;

also 16 cases (viz.

XX. 3; xxvii. 20;

Cor

2
in

i.

which

viii.

Lk

i.

Rom

9,

noun or

iii.

iv.

42

Heb v.

Acts

Cor

23;

ix.

1 2

xiv.

10; xvi. 4 ;
Pet iv. 1 7)

mainly or entirely dependent upon

which may perhaps be more or

But even so the

above.

(?)

use of tov with the infinitive remains a decidedly

telic

18

verb,

of the cases marked

less true

ii.

xv. 22,

11 a; Phil

this genitive is

the previous

57

Lucan

characteristic.

The Grammars
Moulton

of Winer (

TouToi' =:

Mt
Lk

26

ix.
ii.

Cor
V.

Heb

ii.

xii.

viii.

xix.

14

v. 31,

16;

iii.

23;

xvi. 3
I

Blass (p. 235),

4),

J.

H.

'

him

'.

xxvii. 32.

Acts

Jn

xliv.

216-18) may be consulted.

(i.

xx. 12, 13

37;

(vii.

xxiii. 2, 18.

x.

35^);

40

xiii..27; xv.

XXV. 24.

vi.

3.

iii.

27

17
;

vii.

Phil

27

ii.

23

ix.

29

Thes

xviii.

iii.

40

14.
xix. 12

xxi. 21.

38

of each of the Synoptic Gospels

II. Lie

Appx.

So

Lk

also TavTTjv,

Acts

xiii.

and

of

use

the

cf.

toutov,

23, 38.

used of fearing God.

<t>oPcojj.ai,

Mt
Lk

16

xiii.

49

X. 28.

50

i.

Acts

xii.

Col

di's

x. 2, 22,

xviii. 2,

xxiii. 40.

16, 26.

xiii.

35;

22 (where, however, top Kvpiov, not t6v Qiuv,

iii.

the better

is

reading).

Rev

xiv. 7

(Cf. also xv. 4.)

xix. 5.

({xufT],

Mk

1 1

i.

(?).

Lki. 44; iii. 22

Acts ii. 6; vii. 31

ix.

xii.

Jn

Rev

with yicojiai.

35, 36.

x.

13

(Cf. also

xix, 34.

ii.

^x^-)

30.

viii.

xi.

15, (19)

(xvi. 18).

Plural in Rev.

Xaipw, of rejoicing, not of greeting.

Mt

10

ii.

Mk

14

i.

xviii.

13.

v.

Rom

41

xii.

Cor

vi.

23

x.

20

bis

xi.

23

xiii.

17

xv. 5, 32

xix. 6,

37

xxii.

xxiii. 8.

Acts

xiv. II.

Lk

ii.

17,

Thes

iii.

Jn

12

v.

Pet

viii.

39

xvi.

12, 15 bis;
ii.

29;

iv.

iv.

28;

18,
iii.

vi.

iii.

36

viii.

(?)

16;

4 bis

iv.

xiii.

xiii.
',

10; Col

{?),

xi.

56;

15

28

xiv.

Rev

i.

i.

17;

18 bis;

24;

ii.

xvi. 20,

22

i,

and suggests

And see Harnack, Ac/s

fv(f)paiva) on
p. 1 9 above.
App., Excursus III (E. T., pp. 277 ff.).
u)S

Mk
Lk

ix.
i.

32
Acts

'

of

when '.

21.

23, 41, 44

XV.

xx. 20.

Cf.
I

xix. 7.

xi.

10;
13
Jn 4; 3 Jn 3
Bp. Lightfoot renders 'farewell' in Phil iii.
a combination of the two senses in iv. 4.
;

xvi.

6;

9; Phil

16.

v.

vii. -^o bis

13,

9,

7,

xv. 31.

Cor

19;

vii.

10;

48

xiii.

25;

ii.

xix. 5,

15,

29,

39

iv.

25

41;

XX. 37

23;

viii.

v.

(.?);

vii.

xxii.

12

66;

xi.

xxiii.

xii.

58
26; xxiv.
;

bis.
i.

10;

HAWKINS

V.

24;

vii.

36;

ix.

23

x. 7,

17,25;

xiii.

25,

IVords and Phrases characteristic

xiv.

29;

xvi.

5;

XX. 14, 18; xxi.

5; xix.

xviii.

13;

21;

9,

25; xxv. 14; xxvii. 1,27;

xxii. ir,

27;

I, 12,

xvii.

15;

10,

4,

pt.

xxviii. 4.

Rom

XV.

ii.

Jn

24

23;

9,

xviii.
viii.

Cor

iv.

I,

xix.

33

34; Phil

xi.

vi.

40;
xx.

1 1

23

ii,

i6;

12,

three cases.

all

xi. 6, 20,

10;

29, 32,

33;

(Also in Pericope de Adultera,

xxi. 9.

w in

with

vii.

7.)

m can

In some of these cases

of them there

all

some

is

'

be best rendered by

as

but in

',

reference to time.

Harnack {Saymgs 0/ Jesus, E.

T., p. 160) observes that such

temporal clauses with a>s are entirely absent from the
'.
passages which he assigns to
'

'

'

&c., with

6,

Mt

vii.

3.

Mk

iv.

19

Lk

70

i.

Acts

V.

vi.

ii.

xvi.

19;
Phil

iv.

Tit

xvi. 10,

xiii.

45;

15

42;

xix. 30,

xv.

xvi.

23;

xvii.

2;

13,

xxvii. 2.

Cor

bis;

iv.

i.

ii.

i.

i.

21

iv.

v.
iii.

iv.

17;

2,

14;
1 2

xvi. 5, 14,

27;
11; iv. 16;

Col

viii.
i

15;
10 bis;

26; Eph
2

i.

16;
Philem

3,
1

vii.

25,

5,

22;

vii.

12;

iv.

21,

14;

iii.

Tim

26;

iii.

5, 8,

11; Gal

30

ii.

15 bis;

37

bis;

27

19;

xii.

2;

14;

X.

xi.

25 (LXX);
ix.

12,

xxvi. 3, 11;

12;

i.

36.

ix.

and noun.

article

25, 38; XX. 21, 26; xxi. 21, 27; xxii. i; xxiii. 21;

xxv. 27;

Rom

vi.

viii.

xix.

28;

42

16;

words inserted between the

26

V.

vi.

ii.

3,

18;

Cor

iv.

viii.

5,

14;

19;

11,

11;

vi.

14;

2, 7,

15;

i.

ix.

iii.

Tim

iii.

16;

22;

iv.

i.

5;

3,

2.

ix. 13.

Jn

Heb
13
V.

ii.

iii.

ix.

2, 3,
iii.

x.

15;

15, 16, 19;

6, 7,

10

32

xi. 7

iv.

Jude

tions

and

among

the

ii.

V.

12

iii.

2,

17; i Pet i. 11 ter, 14 ;

9; 2 Pet i. 4, 9; ii. 7,

(.?) ;

iii.

42

xii.

vi.

words inserted

',

with YiKOfiai.

xxii. 66.

13
18; XV. 35;
;

'

particles.

T]fx^pa
iv.

Acts

Rev

(?),

(.?),

i4(?);

13; xvii. i4(?).

This list, mainly derived from Bruder, p. 598, might perhaps
be enlarged. Adjectives agreeing with the substantive are
not included

Lk

Jam

8, 12

2,

xxiii.

12

xxvii. 29, 33, 39.

nor are conjunc-

Appx.

II.

Lk

of each of the Synoptic Gospels

TToXii'

Lk

1,4;

viii.

So

or iroXcis after Kard distributive.

22 (the only plural).

xiii.

Acts XV. 21, 36

XX. 23.

and perhaps

Kar KK\T]aiav, Acts xiv. 23;

46

51

Acts

oIkov

kcit

ii.

V. 42.

araSeis, araOefTes.

Lk

xviii. 11,

Acts

14

ii.

40
v.

xix. 8.

20;

xi.

13

xvii.

22

xxv. 18

xxvii. 21.

Xpoi'oi (plural).

Lk

Acts

i.

Rom
I

29; XX. 9;

viii.

Pet

i.

21

iii.

xvi,

25

xxiii. 8.

xvii. 30.

Thes

v.

Tim

i.

Tit

i.

2.

20.

Xpovoi KOI Kaipoi are coupled together in

v.

Acts

i,

and

Thes

only.

Additional Notes to Part L

Additional Note on the use 0/ the Imperfect Tense

(p. 9),

(a) The comparatively unfrequent use of this tense by Matthew

deserves notice, the numbers (excluding for the present the verb

substantive) being in the historical books Mt 94, Rlk 228, Lk 259,

These figures include t^r], though it is imperfect
Acts 329, Jii 163.
in form only and not in force ; the occurrences of it are in Mt 15,

Mk

Lk 7, Acts 15, Jn 12.

doubt the rarer use of the imperfect in Mt and Jn than in the
other historical books is in a considerable degree due to the larger
amount of discourse in proportion to narrative which they contain.
6,

No

{b)

The

imperfect of the verb substantive with participles

rare in Mt, the

numbers being

With any participles

With present participles only

is

Mt

Mk

Lk

Act3

Jn

22

36

17

r6

45
28

24

also

For some of the many instances of this in LXX see Gen iv. 2,
xxxix. 23;
17; vi. 12*; xiii. 10; xiv, 12; xviii. 22*; xxvi. 35
*
xl. 6*; in all these cases
the
three
marked
the
except
present
;

participle

is

used.

cj

IVords and Phrases characteristic

52

On

the

note

of this

subjects

may be

Pt.

consulted Allen's St.

Matthew, pp. xx-xxiii (showing Mt's changes from Mk) Dalman,

W. /., pp. 35 f.
besides the usual Grammars (J. H. Moulton's
;

from the above, Cr.,

figures slightly differ

Additional Note on

The

extremely few

as follows
xvi. 7

15

ii.

iii.

eXeyei'

Ki
4

22

iii.

;]

Job

xix.

Theod
The

24

occurrences of these imperfects in

are
is found in Judg xix. 30
2 Ki XV. 2 ;

16

Chro

Chro

i.

5,

IXcyoc (p. 12).

IXcyei',

LXX

;]

Numbxxxii.

227).

Of eXeye

4 Mace iv. 2,
12
6,
(23 cases).

22

i.

xx, 2

[Tobit

ix.

12;

Esdr

x. 6 ;] 2

28;

xi.

viii.

70 (74)

Mace iii.

13

xiv.

[Esther

26

xv.

20; xiii. 11, 12; xviii.

And the plural ?Afyoc is found in Gen xix. 5;
Deut i. 25 ; [Judg xviii. 8 ;] i Ki xii. 10; xviii.

6,

v.

Mace

13

Prov

iv.

12,

Is vi. 3

xvii.

Jer xlv. 22

Dan

13;
13, 18;
(17 cases).
cases enclosed in square brackets are not found in the
Pss Ixxii. (Ixxiii.) 15 and xciii. (xciv.) 16 and 2 Mace iv.

vii.

5; 4

vi.

xiii.

five

B-text.

47 were purposely omitted as conditional sentences; and 4 Mace

15 as being a mere mistake for eXeytf.

xvi.

The above

of (23

list

+ 17 =)

40 cases

compared with the

in the later books, as

is

of interest as

earlierv the

showing

gradual loss on

Numb

xxxii. 5, 16; Deut i. 25 may be exceptions)

sense of continuity or repetition in eXeytv and
It is to be remembered as to 4 Mace, in which
eXfyoc in narrative.

the whole (for

of the

'

'

imperfect

14 out of the 40 instances are found, that according to the latest

best authority it must be placed at the close of the first century

and

'

of our era' (Thackeray, Gram, of O. T. in Greek, p. 6).

Compare the use off(pr}, mentioned in the preceding note.

Additional Note on oupai'os and oupai'oi

The

singular

and

writers in the

New

Hebrews, and

plural are

Testament.

(p. 30).

used as follows by the various

It will be seen that Matthew,

Peter are the only books in which the plural is

the singular ; but in the Pauline Epistles they

more frequent than

are almost equal.
'

Extremely few in comparison with f'jrei', &c., as may be seen by glancing

50 columns occupied by (iirtiv in Hatch and Redpath's Concordance.

at the

of each of the Synoptic Gospels

Add. Notes

Mt

Mk

ovpavos

27

12

ovpavoi

55

cence

31

case in

of

fv(f)pnip(iv,

xlix.
xvi.

The

31

and

Jn

24

II

18

is xii.

Deut

Pet 2 Pet

3
"

Jn

Rev

51

quotation from or reminisovpavoi occurs 4 times with

12, a

which

in

07015

10

Rev

Jam

xxxii.

43; Ps xcv. 11;

Is xliv.

also found with the singular in

23;

Chro

Is xlv. 8).

is

plural

times against
least

Paul

LXX,
viz.

Heb

Acts

{fv(f)p. is

13

2,

1,

Lk

542

The one

53

not frequent in

LXX

it

only occurs about 50

more than 600 occurrences of

uncommon

in the

Psalms, where

it

is

the singular.

It

is

used about 30 times,

the singular about 50 times.

Addi/ional Note on the use of the Optative Mood.

Besides the 17
entered once or

(.''

18) instances of the optative which have been

more under

the headings of

'

(p.

35^

?; (p.

38),

and

(p. 46), the only cases of that mood in the historical books are
xi, 14
(0yoi, see p. 133), Lk i. 38 (yeWro) and XX. 16 ijir] yevoiTo),
and Acts xvii. 11, 2^1 bis, xxiv. 19, xxv. i6bis, 20, xxvii. 12, 39

Ws

Mk

(the last
all

Mk

When we add together

').
of optative forms, they amount to Mt 0,
a remarkable result.
In the
11, Acts 17, Jn

two cases being in a We-Section

'

these occurrences
1 (.?2),

Epistles

Lk

exclamation

pi]

are

there

about

34

instances,

ytvoiro supplies 14.

was obsolescent

in the ordinary

It is

well

of which

known

Greek of N. T.

the

Pauline

that the optative

times.

PART

II

Indications of Sources

SECTION

IDENTITIES IN LANGUAGE

These

are so numerous and so close, and in

many

cases

they contain constructions or words which are so very

unusual or even peculiar, that the use of written Greek
is prima facie suggested by them.
Certainly
throw very serious difficulties in the way of an

documents
they

exclusively 'oral theory'/

And, so

far as

they extend,
they render the hypothesis of independent translations^
*
They would make such a theory impossible if we did not know that the
memories of teachers and learners were trained and cultivated in Judaea to
an extent far beyond anything within our own experience. See Schurer,
and Schiller-Szinessy on the
Hist, of Jewish People, II. i. 324 (E. T.)
Mishnah in Enc. Brit., xvi. 504. Some interesting parallels and illustrations
;

from the East

may be

Essays, Series
26, 251.

seen

in Driver's Genesis, p. xliv

Max

Miiller's

Last

pp. 122-37 j Geden's Studies in Eastern Religions, pp. 13,

there is a western parallel in Caesar's account {B. G., vi.

I,

And

14) of the exclusively oral teaching of 'a great number of verses' by the
Druids, referred to by York Powell {^Life, ii. 24a), who thought that in
'

these days of print

memory' {ib, i.
to memory in
our

we

are apt to undervalue the possibilities of human

But it may be doubted whether the matter committed

206).
these cases

was

often parallel in kind to the

contents of

Gospels ; see Burkitt, The Gospel History, Sec, p. 145.

^
The past tense used by Papias (Jjpnijvfvat S' avra. ws ^v Swards (Koarof,
see p. xiii above) tells us that such independent translations of the Matthaean
Logia had been made at first, but does not say that they continued in use
during his own time (and we must remember that Eusebius may be giving
us but a very small and incomplete fragment of what Papias wrote).
historical

us at the beginning of his Jewish War that he himself transit in the language of his country (t^ Trarp/y).
Mace 'was written originally in Hebrew (or Aramaic)', though 'it

Josephus
lated

it

And

tells

into Greek, after writing

down to us only in the form of a Greek translation, which was

probably in existence as early as the time of Josephus' (Schurer, op. cit.,
\\. iii. 8
So there may have been similarly an early and generally
f.).

has come

accepted translation of the Logia.

Identities in

Language

55

from the Logia, or from any other Aramaic source, extremely improbable.

These

identities are of three kinds (A, B, C)

A. In the construction of sentences.

Luke (Mark

In Mark, Matthew, and

(i)

being admittedly the oldest document)

Mk

ii.

kt\.

lO

Mt

tea be (l8fJT(

tm

Xeyet

8e

TOTf

irapaXeyco,

napaXvTtKot'

2oi

XvTiicdi'

6 ifa

ix.

ktX.

Lk

ddrJTf

Xeyfi

is

placed

rm

V.

KrA,

24

eyftpe ktX.

as

iva Sf fl8^Te

(iTTfv

XeXvfievco'

eyttpt

first,

TO)

Ttapa-

2oi Xeyw,

tyeipe ktX.

2.

Mk

19

iii.

Mt

'lovSav

Koi

l(TKapia>0, oy

(cat

nap-

laKapiwrrjs, OKaiirapa-

ebuKev avTOv.

in

again

in

Mk

Mk

xiv.

xiv.

xii.

14;

Lk

XX. 21

(ii)

Mk

i.

In

16

0foO

eV

nX;-

8i8d(TKeis.

Mark and Matthew

Mt

iv.

18 rjaavyap

Km

'loiiBav

OS

eyevfTO

npoboTTji.

Mt xxvi. 14; Lk xxii. 3, and

Mt xxvi. 47; Lk xxii. 47 the

Judas was

of the .'number of the twelve

6(las rfjv 6861/ Tov

16

10;

43;

repetition of the fact that

Mk

vi.

l(TKapia)B,

6ovr avTou.

Observe also

'

Lk

4 Koi 'lov^as 6

X.

one of the twelve

'

or

'.

Mt

'

xxii.

16

rfjv

68ov tuv Qeoii iu

oKrjBda 8i8daKfis.

:-

aXfe'is.

2\

Mk V.

28 i\(yev yap on 'Eaf

pal ktX.

o\//co-

Mt

ix.

21 eXeyev yap iv

povov

a\j/a)uai ktX.

Parenthetical additions of explanations.

favT?],

'Eau

Indications of Sources

56

Mk

viii. 2
',

On

Mt

XV.

85

Mt

14;

J.

rpiaiv

fifxepais

xiii.

fjfifpat

rpus npofrnevovcrlv

fiot

the construction see Winer's Gravimar,

Blass, p.

Mk

32 7S7

pt. II

H. Moulton,

with

i.

70.

In

kt\.

Ixii.

Mk

and note

WH

mg

has

Only.

xxiv. 15 6 dvayivaaKcov vofiTw.

5^

Mk

eXeyov yap, Mj) iv

xiv. 2

XXVi.

I\It

rf/

fopT^, pfinoTf earai Bopv^os tov

5 ikfyov

eoprfj, tva pfj

be,

M^

ev

rfj

Bopv^os yevrirai (V

t5> \aoi.

6\

Mk

10

XV.

yap on

(ylvaxTKfv

8ia

(bdovov TTapa8(8a)K(i<rav avrov ol

Mt

XXvii,

18

fjbei

yap

on

Hia

(pdovov napfbwKav avrov.

ap)(ifpf'ii.

Mk

i.

Mark and Luke

In

(iii)

f*^

"^'^

iKavos Kvyj^as

^'M*

Xvaai Tov IpdvTa

raiv iiTrobrjuaTcov

Lk

iii.

16 ov ovK dpi

Ikovos \v(rai

TOV Ipavru tS)V vnobrjpaTtov avrov.

avTov.

[But

and other Western authorities omit

Cf. also

tion

Jn

(ol)

[i Pet
xiii.

8,

i.

27.
.

WH

ii.

i.

94, 237.

8 eXe-yfv yap avTa''E$f\6f

iTVtvfjLa TO aKaOapTov tK rov

V.

TO

dvBpbiTTOV

airoi).]

only other instances of this construc-

Acts xv, 17;

aiirov) seem to be Mk vii. 25
R
iii. 8 ; vii. 2,
Rev
Tisch
or
but
not
24
9 ;
;]
12 ; xx. 8.
See Blass's Gram., p. 175, and J. H.
.

Moulton's,

Mk

The

Lk

29 naprjyyfXktv yap rw
TTvevpan tw aKaOaprco i^ikBt'iv
viii.

dno TOV avBpiinov,

The

appeal of the demons having been first recorded, the

cause of it is thus added afterwards, in both Gospels.

Mk
Lk

Also notice jjc yap ktX. in

Parenthetical additions of explanations.
X. 22, Mt xix. 22, and (though not with identical words following)
xviii. 23.

Identities in

In

(iv)

Mt

vii.

Matthew and Luke

Tr]v

be iv rat

croi

Language

57

Lk

6(j)6ah.fiCi

vi.

42

Tr]v

iv

TM

ocpdaiXfxa

aov

8ok6u.

8ok6v,

Such an insertion of words between the

article

and

its

noun

found here only in Matthew, but 3 times in Mark, and

See pp. 27
frequently in Luke, Acts, and other books.
is

and 50.

words and short phrases.^

B. In single

Luke :

In Mark, Matthew, and

(i)

I.

airapdii

Mk

ii,

20

Mt

ix.

15

Lk

v,

35.

dnalpco or dnoipofiai here Only in N. T.

is

frequent in

but the active dnaipm

LXX.
2.

inl^Xrjfia

Mk

ii.

Here only

21

Mt

ix.

N. T.

in

16

Lk

LXX

v.

36

di's.

Used

1.

in

Classical

Greek

of

a cloak or of hangings, not of a patch.

3-

o-nopipav

Mk

ii.

23

Mt

xii. i

Lk

anopipoi here only in N. T.

vi.

i.

LXX

4.

4-

TiWovTfs

Mk

ii.

23

Tt'XXeu'

Mt

TiXXw here only in N. T.

is

used of

hair,

xii. i

LXX

'inWov
3.

Lk

vi. i.

In Greek generally, r/XXw

S^eVw of flowers and

fruit.

1
As a rule, the identities in language which seem to the compiler most
remarkable have been placed first in the following lists. But this rule has
not been uniformly observed, for it has been thought best to group together
instances taken from the same passage, e.g. the two from Mk ii. 20, ai, and
the four from Mk viii. 3-7.
The appended notes draw attention to the

rarity of the word, and to the consequent degree of unlikelihood that anything but a common written origin can account for its use in more than one

In these notes, as elsewhere, the figures printed in thick type

Gospel.
denote that the word or phrase occurs so many times in the New Test, or its

various books, or in the Septuagint.

Indications of Sources

58

pt. 11

5.
/
'^

Mk

Mt ix. 5; Lk v. 23.
25; Mt XIX. 24; Lk xvin.

ii.

IVIk X.

only once besides

(ijKonos

LXX

2.

common

Apparently not

25.

Lk

N, T. [flKonmrfpov

in

in Classical

xvi,

7)

Greek.

6.

tva-KoXas

Mk

X.

23

The adverb

Mt

xix.

LXX

Mark:

verse of

23

Lk

here only in N. T.

xviii. 24.

only in the following

bva-KoXos

But both adjective and adverb

1.

are in classical use.

7.

KaraaKevdafi

rffv

Mk

686u aov

i.

In quotation from Mai

Mt

Lk 1, Heb

KaTaa-Ktva^o) also

lO

xi.

Lk

vii.

27.

LXX has fm^Xe^trai.

Pet 1, LXX 30, but nowhere

where

iii.

6,

with odos or any similar word.

CnfJ^iadrjvai

Mk

f;/Lcid<i)

viii.

36

Mt

^rjuKadij

elsewhere only Paul 3

xvi.

26

LXX

Cw-^^^^^^

Lk

ix. 25.

Lk

2,

7.

9-

(vrpaTrfjaovrai

Mk

iVTpinofiat

and

xii.

I\It

elsewhere in

LXX

xxi.

37

Lk

XX. 13.

sense with ace. only

this

Heb

1,

about 6 times.
10.

/caTeyeXcoi/

avrov

Mk

40

v.

Mt

KarayeKdo) here Only in N. T.

OX) fxfj

ytixravTai Gavarov

The

is

phrase
LXX, but

Mk

ix.

also used in

cf. 2

Ki

iii.

24

ix.
;

Mt

Jn
ol

35

Lk

LXX
Xvi.

viii.

53.

about 22.

28

Lk

ix.

27.

viii.

52 and Heb

ftf]

ydxrufiM aprov.

ii.

never in

12.
d<p('i\fp

and

Mk

xiv.

47

Mt

xxvi. 51

Lk

xxii.

50, with urdpiov, iniov,

ovs respectively.

d(paip(u) also

Lk 3,

sense as here.

word, as

in

Jn

Paul

1,

Heb 1, Rev

dnoKdnTO)
xviii.

2,

but never in a physical

would have seemed a more

10,

26,

and

in

Judg

i.

6,

likely

7.

In

Identities in

LXX,
Gen

however, d^paipea

xl.

Ki

19

Ki

iv.

7 (?)

32; Judith xiii. 8; xiv. 15;

xi. 17
2 Mace i. 16
right hand also)
16; I Ki xxiv. 5, 6, 12.
4

vi.

59

used of cutting off the head in

is

Kixvii. 46, 51

Language

xvi. 9

Mace

xx. 22

vii,

47 (of
Cf. also Levi

(?).

13ftera

fiaxaipmvKoi^vXfovMkx'iv. 4^, 48 ; Mt xxvi. 47, 55 ; Lk xxii. 52.

and very rare in LXX,
^v\ov in this sense here only in N. T.
:

pd^8os and ^aKrripla being the usual words

see, however,
2 Ki xxiii. 21; Is X. 15; also 2 Ki xxi.
19; xxiii. 7;
I Chro XX.
of
the
staff
a
of
5
spear.
:

14.

Mk

dvf^oum vpmv

Here only

LXX
viol

in

Gospels

xvH. 17
:

but

Mk

ii.

here and

Tobit

19;

Mt

Mt

xxii.

ix.

10

Mt

Mk

ix.

1,

41.

Paul 10,

Heb

15

(?)

Lk

v.

34.

only in N. T.

in

LXX

only

2.

16
e^e'SfTo

Lk

Acts

12.

Tov vvp^S>vos
vvp(j>a>v

Mt

ix.

xii.

Mt

xxi.

1.

33

Lk

xx.

also

eKbaxTfrai.

xxi. 41.

(Kbl^ofiai

here only in N. T.

'letting out',

LXX 18, but not in

which, however,

is

classical

this

sense of

Mk

(Swete on

xii. i).

The

unusual

pp. 167

f.)

58

also paralleled in the papyri (J.

i-

it is

H. Moulton, Gram.,

55).

Karaa-Krjvolu

Mk

Kara(TKT)v6a)

LXX
^

grammatical form i^ebtro (see WH, Notes,

occurs in the A-text of Ex ii. 21 and i Mace x.

32 ; Mt xiii. 32 ; KaT((TKr)v(M>(Tfv Lk xiii. 19.

besides in N. T. only Acts ii. 26 from

iv.

it is

LXX

in

very frequent.

These three words or phrases being such as would be required, or at

would be naturally suggested, by the subject-matter, not much

least such as

stress

is laid

upon them.

Indications of Sources

6o

Mark and Matthew

In

(ii)

^
:

Pt. ii

I.

Mk X. 42 Mt XX. 25.
not quoted as occurring anywhere

Kart^ovina^ovaiv avrav

KOTf^ovaiaCo

is

else.

2.

aKvpovvTes INIk

vii.

13

oKvpoo) besides in

Mt

XV. 6.

N. T. only Gal

cases being in 2

Mace)

and

iii.

In

17.

LXX

7 (6 of the

several times in the fragments

of the other Greek versions.

3-

Mk

Mt

26; Kwapia IMk vii. 28 ;

27
N.
here
in
and never in LXX.
T.,
Kvvapiov
only

Kvvapiois

vii.

xv.

Mt

xv. 27.

4.

Mk

OTTO Twi' ^ixioav

vii.

28

xv. 27.

N. T.

here only in

yf/iXiov

Mt

LXX

never in

or

in

Classical

Greek.
5vrjo-Tfis

Mk

vrjarii

viii.

Mt

xv. 32.

here only in N. T.

or

pfjarr]!

LXX

vrja-Tis

1.

6.
fKKv6ri(T(>vrai iv

rfj

Mk

o^ta

besides also

viii.

Paul

fK\v6Si<nv fv

Heb

rr/

obm

Mt

XV. 32.

frequent in
about 8 times in exactly the same sense as here.

(kXvco

1,

LXX, and

7-

(n fpr}pias

Mk

iprjiiia

viii.

eV eprju'ia

Mt

XV. 33.

here only in Gospels, and Paul

N. T.

epT)ixos TOTTos

and

f}

(prjfxot

1,

Heb

8.

Ix6v8ia

Mk

viii.

Ixdii^iov

Mt

xv. 34.

here only in N. T., and never in

LXX.

9-

6 ip.^airr6p(V05

Mk

xiv.

20

6 ffi^ay^ras

Mt XX vi.

ip^cmrw here only in N. T., and never in

'

It

would be very

eas}' to

LXX

are the usual forms.

23.

LXX.

lengthen this

list.

7.

In

Identities in

6i

Language

lO.

(h TO Tov^Xiop
Tpvfi\iov

Mk

20

xiv.

Mt

iv r&5 rpv^Xtw

here only in N. T.

LXX

xxvi. 23.

19.

II.

Mk

fw\os opikSs

ix.

42

Mt

xviii. 6.

N. T. and never

here only in

oviKos

in

LXX

or elsewhere.

Swete on Mk) and others show

J. Lightfoot (quoted by
that there was a Jewish phrase of which this would be

But

And

an obvious rendering. (See JS'fic. Bibl., iii. 3094.)

the word itself occurs in the papyri cited as

BU

913

(ist century a. d.).

12.

Mk

fKoKofiaa^tv

Mt

Ms

20

xiii.

KoXo^adrjaourat

tKoXo^Jjdrjaav,

22.

xxiv.

N. T.

KoXo^oo) here only in

LXX

1,

but more frequent in the

fragments of the other Greek versions.

13-

Mk

xiii.

Mt

xxiv. 25.

23
here only in Gospels

TTpoHprjKa vfiiv

npofpS)

Judel:

LXX

Heb

Paul 4,

(?),

Pet

1,

12.
14.

Mk

dfTdWayiMa

Here only
is

37

viii,

in

Mt

N. T.

xvi. 26.

LXX

The

10.

parallel in Sir xxvi. 14

remarkable.
15.

ivtpyovaiv ai dvvdpeii iv avrS

Mtxiv.

Mk vi.

14

u'l

Svpapeis ivfpyovaiv iv nlrcf

2.

fvfpyfa here only in Gospels, but in Epistles

18

LXX 7.

16.
^poj/eir

Mk

viii.

33;

Mt

xvi. 23.

(ppovea here only in Gospels

Tro\epovs Ka\ uKoas woXefiwv

In

Mk

xiii.

this sense, the plural aKoai

but Acts

Mt

1,

Paul 23

LXX

15.

Xxiv. 6.

here only in N. T., and

LXX

2.

Indications of Sources

62

Pt. ii

18.

Mk

fivTjfioa-vvov

xiv. 9

Mt

xxvi. 13.

N. T. only Acts x.
perhaps the obvious word here

Besides

this, in

LXX

But

4.
cf.

e.g.

Ex

70

xvii.

so

it

is

LXX.

14

19.
o-yXXa^etc

Mk

fit

xiv.

48

Mt

Mark and Matthew

(TvWafjL^dva here only in

Lk

sense

Jn

2,

xxvi. 55.
;

but also in this

LXX.

Acts 4, and frequently in

1,

20.
TTpoa\a^6fievos avTov

Mk

viii.

32

Mt

xvi. 22.

TvpoaXa^^avw here only in Gospels ; also Acts 5, Paul 5,

8, but never with exactly this meaning.

and

LXX

21.
rjht)

&pas

TToXXjJf ytvofjLfvrji

napriXdev

Mt

with this meaning of

a>pa,

N. T.

&pa

^8t]

Mk

770XX17

vi.

35

',

f)

o>pa ^87

xiv. 1 5.

however,

(cf.,

Mk

'

daytime
xi.

',

apparently here only in

).

22.
Oil

Mk xii. 14; Mt xxii. 1 6.

N. T., and not in LXX, for i

^Xtneis us irpoaconop

Here only

in

an exact
wTTov

Lk

parallel.

(Gal

ii.

xiv.

13

Sam

xvi. 7 is

not

has the more usual ov Xap^dvds npoa-

and LXX).
23-

dbrjfiovfiv

Mk

dSij/ioreo)

in

Mt

xxvi. 37.

N. T. only here and Phil

ii.

26.

Not

in

LXX,

but

Aq. and Symm.

(iii)

Mark and Luke

In

I.

fiaTKTixfPov

Mk

t/taTifo)

v.

15

Lk

viii.

here only in N. T.

35.
:

not in

LXX,

nor elsewhere.

2.
(ra(f)povovvTa

Mk

v.

o-w^poi'/w here

in

LXX.

15

Lk

viii.

35.

only in Gospels

also Paul 3,

Pet

1.

Not

Identities in

Language

63

3/caTeVXatrfj/

Mk vi.

41

Lk

16 (Mt

ix.

xiv.

19 has the more usual

KKo.aa%\,

N. T.

KaTaK\da> here only in

LXX

1.

4-

didyaiov Mk

xiv.

Here only

Lk

N. T.

in

upper room

'

xxii. 12.

LXX.

not in

Acts 4

',

also

{vnepaov

LXX

is

used

for

an

24.)

5Ti Tt

Mk

35 firfKin o-KuXXf Lk
aKvXKw besides in N, T. only Lk vii. 6
(TKvWeis

not in

V.

viii.

LXX.

(/i^

49.

aKvWov) and

Mt

ix.

36

In Classical Greek usually in a physical sense.

6.

Mk

^Hx.(o6riTL

Lk

25;

i.

also

0i/xo(u

Mt

2,

iv.

35.

Mk

Paul 2,

1,

Pet 1

LXX 3.

7.
(*i Tis

Mk

Lk xxii. 50.
47
remarkable case, lyns is genuine in both places, for it is
only found elsewhere inN. T. with a numeral in Lk vii, 19
but
Jn xi. 49; Acts xxiii. 23 and perhaps Mk xiv. 51
xiv.

WH

bracket

it

(iv)

In

Mk

in

and a few other

xiv.

it

47,

being omitted by t>^AL

authorities.

Matthew and Luke

I.

('movaiov

Mt

vi.

1 1

Lk

xi. 3.

N. T., nor

fniovaios not elsewhere in

else.

But perhaps

this identity

in

may

LXX,

nor anywhere

be accounted for by

liturgical use.
2.

(/xoXfouf

Mt

(fioKfos

viii.

20

Lk

ix.

58.

here only in N. T.

not in

LXX.

3-

KaraaKTivaxTUS Mt

viii.

20

Lk

ix.

58.

LXX

here only in N. T.
or
of the Divine Presence.
temple

KaraaKrivoiaii

5, but

always of the

Indications of Sources

64

pt. 11

4-

Mt

iv yfPvrjToit yvvaiKwv

II

xi.

Lk

yfvvtjTos

28.

vii.

never elsewhere in N. T.

in

LXX only yewrp-oi ywaiKo^

5.

Job

5,61.

Lk vi. 41, 42.

Kap(f)os, boKos, each 3 times in Mt vii. 3-5
Both here only in N. T. in
mpcpoi 1, toKos 10.
;

LXX

7^
Stai3X>//'tr

Mt

vii.

Mt

Lk

vi.

42.

Mk

besides in N. T. only

8ia^\(iT(o

dirXovs

22

vi.

Lk

Here only

xi.

25

not in

LXX.

34.

N. T.

in

viii.

LXX

more frequent

but

1,

in

Aq.,

Symm., Theod.
9(f)u>Tiv6v

Mt

22

vi.

Lk

34 also 36
N. T. only Mt

xi.

besides in

(fxoTivos

dis.

xvii.

LXX 2.

10.
oTKOTivou

Mt

vi.

23

Lk

xi.

34

here only in N. T.

a-KOTivos

also 36.

LXX.

16.

II.
(Ttaapafifpuv
o-apoo)

Mt

xii.

44

Lk

xi.

25.

Lk

besides in N. T. only

xv. 8

not in

LXX.

12.

Uavos iva

fla-tKdi]!

Mt

viii.

Lk vii.

kapoe with Iva here only in N. T.

6.

not in

LXX.

13(j>o^t]6rJTf

fiT)

drro tS)p

Mt

X.

28

Lk

xii. 4.

LXX

49 times (25 of
(}io^fOfj.ai dno here only in N. T. : but in
them with npoawnov) out of about 440 occurrences of the
verb.
*

It is

remarkable that

in this list these are the

Sermons on the Mount and on the Level

Place.

only cases found

in

the

Identities in

Language

65

14.
6fioKoyf)a(i eu ifioi

Mt

iv avrw,
\oyr]rrfi)
SfioKoyico

Rom

32

Lk

(Lk

6 vlos rov avBpwTTov ofio-

xii. 8.

here only in N. T. (for the sense is different in

X. 9) ; and not in LXX.
See J. H. Moulton, Gram.,
iv

104, and Allen on

i.

Knyco

ofioXoyfjcrco

X.

Mt

x. 32.

15iva fiov

vno

Lk

fJaeX^s

crTtyrjv dcreXdrjs

rfju

besides in N. T. only

a-Teyt]

Mt

viii.

Mk

ii.

Iva

vno

rfjv

orey/i/ fiov

vii. 6.

LXX

5.

16.
fine Xo'yw

Mt

viii.

Lk vii.

There seems

7.

be no close

to

Alford refers only to Gal

N. T.

parallel to this dative in

vi.

1 1

ypdfifiamv 'iypa^a,

17fptjpovrai

Mt

xii.

25

Lk

xi. 17.

besides in N. T. oply

eprfpoco

Rev 3

LXX.

frequent in

18.
f(p6aa(v

e(f)'

(pddvco

vpas

Paul

C.

Mt

28

xii.

Lk

xi.

20.

besides in N. T. only Paul 5

LXX

1,

Longer passages
Here especially

earliest Christian

LXX

29

with inl only

6.

in

which many words are IdenticaL

should be borne in mind that

in

the

days there was undoubtedly a habit

and

it

a povv^er of accurate oral transmission, to which there

now.

We

is

no

not say of any closely

similar passages that they cannot be thus accounted for.
If however such
passages as the following are examined
parallel

together, as they

Evangelica,

seems

or,

difficult

therefore

may

better
to

be,

As

Tischendorf s Synopsis
Rushbrooke's Synopticon, it

e. g. in

still, in

believe

written Greek source.

may

owe nothing

to

to the narratives especially,

it

that they

66

Indications of Sources

pt. ii

appears very unlikely that they could have been handed

on so exactly without the use of documents, even if this

was the case with the

discourses.

XT

/.\

Mk

SynopUcon.

.....
.....

i.
16-20; Mt iv. 18-22: Calling of
Andrew, James, and John
Mk i. 21-8; Lk iv. 31-7: The Demoniac

Synagogue at Capernaum
40-4 Mt viii. 2-4 Lk

Mk

T\sc\\

Syn. Ev.

1-

Narratives (including sayings).

(i)

i.

Peter,

31

in the

.......
........
12-14

v.

Cleansing

of the Leper

Mt viii.

Mk

10

9,

vi.

41

5,000

Mk
Mk
Mk

Lk vii. 8, 9 The Centurion's Faith 1

Mt xiv. 19; Lk ix. 16: Feeding the
:

Mt xv. 32-9 Feeding the 4,000

Mt xxvi. 36-8 Gethsemane
xiv. 48, 49
Are ye come
Mt xxvi. 55, 56
out,' &c. (cf. Lk xxii. 52, 53)
Mk XV. 29-32 Mt xxvii. 39-44 Jesus mocked on
viii.

1-9;

xiv.

32-4

'

.......
.......
:

the Cross

(ii)

Mk

ii.

10

9,

is easier,'

Mt

&c.

Mk

ix. 5,

Discourses.

Lk

23, 24

ii.
19, 20; Mt ix. 15; Lk v. 34, 35:
children of the bridechamber,' &c.

Mk

tion,

Mt

xii.

such

Lk

xi.

the

19,

'

Shall be tribula-

20: 'By

whom

do your

&c

xii.

41,

Nineveh

Mt

as,'

27, 28

sons,'

Mt

&c.

'Can

.....

1923; Mtxxiv. 21-5:

xiii.

Whether

'

v.

xxiv.

'

42; Lk xi. 31, 32: 'The men of

and the queen of the south *

43-51

'

'

Lk

xii.

39-46

the house had known,' &c.

'

If the

master of

95

168

The above are instances which have impressed the compiler

of these
'

lists,

but there are other similarities as prolonged.^

is the only non-Marcan narrative.

But with change of order.
Some of them are named by Bacon, Introd.

This

to

N.

T., p.

179 note.

Identities in

Language

67

From these 'identities of language', which seem all but

unaccountable unless we admit some use of written Greek
documents, we have now to turn to other phenomena,
which point, at least as distinctly, to the influences of oral
transmission.^

SECTION

II

WORDS DIFFERENTLY APPLIED

We

not infrequently find the same, or closely similar,

different applications or in different con-

words used with

nexions, where the passages containing them are evidently

How could these variations have arisen ? Copyparallel.
^
ing from documents does not seem to account for them
but it is not at all difficult to see how they might have
;

arisen

the

in

course of

oral

transmission.

Particular

words might linger in the memory, while their position in

a sentence was forgotten and in some cases they might
;

become confused
On

with

other

the combined use of these

words of similar

two kinds of sources see

sound."^

p. 217.

do not forget the valuable caution against making a priori assertions

as to what a serious writer will do, or will not do, in the way of deahng
with the documents which he embodies in his work', which is supplied
by the Rev. C. Plummer's article in the Expositor, July, 1889 (3rd Series,
A Mediaeval Illustration of the Documentary
vol. X. pp. 23 ff.), entitled
'

'

Theory

But after carefully

Synoptic Gospels'.
freedom which mediaeval chroniclers
adapting, altering, and combining the MSS. which
hold that the numerous instances of words differently

the Origin of

of

examining his

illustrations

allowed themselves
lay before them,

in

I still

the

of the

'

have collected in this Section (though Mr. Plummer does at

the bottom of p. 28 give one interesting parallel to them), and the transpositions'' which I have collected in the next Section, are, on the whole and
when taken together, inexplicable on any exclusively documentary theory.
applied^

which

'

Moffatt's Historical N. T.\ p. 616, notes; also E. D. Burton, Principles

of Literary Criticism, tfc, pp. 20-2, referring to the literary methods
(i) of N. T. writers as to quotations from O. T., (2) of the author of the
Appendix to Mark, (3) of Tatian in his Diatessaron and Hobson, The Diat.
of Tatian and the Synoptic Problem (Chicago, 1904), especially pp. 10 and

See

75

ff-

'

Some

of the cases are such as might be

in the first
dictation.

'

'

clerical errors

',

arising either

MSS. or more probably afterwards, if the scribes wrote from

The ear would not always be a certain guide to the sense. One

F 2

68

Indications of Sources

pt. II

Special attention will here be called to words of these

kinds by the use of thick type.

We may trace such

variations

In the reports of the sayings of Jesus (though on the

whole these are more accordant than any other

A.

parts of the Synoptic Gospels).

In the attribution of the same, or very similar, words

B.

to different speakers.
C. In the use of the same, or very similar,

words as part of

a speech and as part of the Evangelist's narrative.

D.
.

In the rest of the Synoptic narratives.

The

cases which seem

to

no

stress

is

the present compiler most

in the four lists
but

be placed first
to be laid on this order.

forcible will, as a rule,

A. In the reports of the sayings of Jesus.

I.

Mk

iv.

19

(Mt

etffTTopeuo-

(TTiOvfiiai

avvTTviyoutnv rbv

^rCfai

xiii.

22

\6yov.

(Tvinrvlyfi,

Lk

viii.

14 ovToi

iropcuopecoi

coi'in'iYovTai.

rov

Xoyov.)

Mk

20 ovK

xii.

d(j)T]Kev a-nepfia.

Mt

xxii.

KCf

Mk

xiii.

9,

10 ...

CIS

koI

fjiaprupiof avTois.
tls

ndvTa ra Wvrj

8fi

KT}pv)(6rjvai Kt\.

Mt

rffv

Xxiv. 14 Koi KTfpV-

xdrjO-fTai

... CIS p-ap-

Tupiof naiTiv Tois idvta-iv.

2^

fifj

X<ov (Ttrfpixa &^i\-

yvvaiKa aiirov.

Lk

xxi.

13

(TfTai vfiiv

aiTO^r)-

CIS fiapTU-

piOK.

(Cf. also X. 18,

which more nearly

resembles Mk xiii.

Thus

9.)

the words ds fiaprvpiov have different applications in

all

three Gospels.
for another of similar sound but different
The Synoptic Gospels, p. 334.

word would sometimes be mistaken

meaning.'

G. L. Cary,

Words

Mk

xiii.

oTw

14

TO ^beXvy/xn

l8lf)T

8f

Mt

Lk

xxiv. 15 orac ovv

iStjtc to ^Se'Kvyfj.a

Trjs

69

differently applied

iStjtc

irjs

20

xxi.

Tjyymtv

de

OTttJ'

yvMTe

oti

^pi^fxuatr

fj

avTrjs.
e'prjfiaiaii

used here only

is

in

N. T.

5-

Mt

27 o

X.

Xe'yo) vfiiv

ciiraTC V TO)

iv T|j aKOTia,

(fxoTi'

kiu o

ous dKOucTC, KTjpu^arf

Lk

ds to

cm

xii.

eV

TUf

Tw

otrn iv Tj] CTKOTia eiTrare,

(^tort

KT]pu;(^ijwfrai

Tttfifiois,

Sufidruk'.

/cai

dKOua9ir]CTeTai,

TO ous eXaXijcrare eV to7s

TTpos

^iri

Tuf

Sojp.diTui'.

These two sayings are assigned to different occasions by Mt

and Lk, Mt giving them in a charge to the twelve ', and Lk
'

an address

in

to 'disciples',

against hypocrisy
in

Mt

33

^ iroii^aaTC to SevSpoi/

TOP Kapnov avrov KaXov^

fj

to

iroiiQaaTe

Tw

Koi

from a warning

starts

both Gospels.

jcaXoi' Kal

xii.

which

but the immediate contexts are the same

8ev8pop cranpov

Kapnov avrov (ranpov.

Lk

43 ov yup

vi.

KuXhv

TTOiooi'

i(TTiv

Kapnov aawpov,

oiihe

TToKiv hfvbpov (Tairpov iroiouc Kop-

And

Txov KoKov.

and

TToieiv

once

so

twlcc

TToifl

Mt

in

vii.

17,

18.

See also

Mt
Mt

45 onus

V.
V.

46

Doublets.

in

Lk

yevr)a6e viol /crX.

Tiva |i,ia6oc ex^^Tf

\Kal

yevrjToi

T^s

Kal

Tvapoi^ibos],

v.

vi.

32 noia vpiv X"P'*

Lk

xi.

40, 41 a^povfg,

ov)( 6 TTOiTj-

TO

to

(Tas

iTTolrjaf

xxvii. 59).

Kal

c^cjOci'
;

ttXiji/

(\ei]fj.o(Tvi'r]v,

f<rrii> ;

Tct

icruQev

ivovra

Kal l8ov

ndvra

86t
kol-

vpiv (ariu,

only used twice besides by

is

vp&v

viol ktX.

Lk

dapd

KaOapos

Mt

Iva

TO CKTOS avrov Ka-

6apd>'.

eaeade

p. 78.

Mtxxiii. 26 ^apiaaie Tv(ji\f, KaQdpi(TOV TTpa>Tov TO ecTOS Tov iroTrjpiov

Kt eorai 6 p.lcOos

35

noKvi, Ka\

See also Transposition,

vi.

the

Synoptists

(viz,

Indications of Sources

70

Mt

X.

lua

25

apKfTOV TW

w; 6

yfvrjTai

Lk

fJLadt)Tlj

SiSdaKaXo;

auToO.

Mk

8 o ta^ev

xiv.

tov (v-

(Is

Mt

npo-

i-noir\af.v'
.

ws

SiSdaKaXos

xi.

to pvpou

rrpos TO ivTaf^uiaiu p.f ^iroiTj-

(TV.

Koi

XXvi. 12 /3aXoiVa

Ta(f)iacrp6v.

cu6us

CTTcXXei ndXiv

In

KaTqpTia-fievos 8e

eorat

auToG.

eXajSec jxvpiaai

Mk

40

vi.

nati

Pt. II

Mt

diTO-

auToi'

xxi.

u0us

dTToa-reXei

Se

auTOos.

code.

Mk

these words are apparently meant to be said by the

disciples to the owner of the colt as a promise that it
should be returned
in Mt they are a prediction of the
:

See

promptness with which the request would be granted.

also p. 120.

I2(?).

Mt

xi.

27

ov8e TOP TTUTepa Tts

iii.

28

fxiai

Mt

ncivra d(f)f-

Koi

a'l

xii.

TTOIS

ns

Koi

TOG

OS

Kara

\6yov

UlOU

'

sons of

men

only here and in

xi.

fi\aa(f)i]pia

fciu

TOU

dl'OpUITOU,

Ps

'

is

Eph

iv.

Lk

10

Kai rras os

\oyop

els TOi' oioi'

xii.

fp(i

ToG di'Opuirou,

d(f>(dfj-

(TfTai nvrco.

d<pf6fjafTai avTO).

plural

fffTiv 6 nuTrip

iraaa

31, 32

('iTTT}

Gen

a^e6r]<T(Tai Tolf dv9pa>-

aixapTj'j-

I3\aa(f>r]-

kt\.

The

(?).

apapTia koi

TOis uiois rStv

dfOpuTrcjc Tu
fxaTa

v'los

13

6rj(TfTai,

X. 2 2 uv8f\s yivdoaKft TiS <ttiv

iniyivuxTKfi.

Mk

Lk

noticeable as being used in N. T.

iii,

5;

LXX,

e.g.

occurs in the

first

but often

2.
Ivii.
(Iviii.)

Oxyrhynchus Saywgs 0/Jesus, No.

(It

III.)

in

See Dr. Abbott in

Enc. Brit., x. 792 Schmiedel in Enc. BibL, ii. 1848 {d),

where a deliberate alteration by Mk is suggested; Drummond
;

in/, r.

6"., ii.

551-

Words

11

The

B.

differently applied

71

very similar, words

attribution of the same, or

to different speakers.
I.

In

Mk

vinegar:
J.

XV.
in

36

Mt

a<j)6T iScojiei/

xxvii.

49

a<|)es

H. Moulton, Gram, of N.

by the man who brings the

said

is

iSwp.ei'

T.,

i.

said

is

by

ol

Xonroi.

(See

175.)

2.

In

Mk

3 Jesus asks the Pharisees ti (= 'what') it^lv iver^lXaro Mwua'ps in Mt xix. 7 they ask Him ti (= why') ovv Mcjuaijs
X,

'

IcereiXaTO kt\.
3-

In

Mt

xxi,

41

a reply from the

it is the answer

dTToXeorei {tovs
is
yicopyovs) ktX.

Mk

hearers of the parable: in

own

given by Jesus to His

xii.

Lk

xx. 16

question.
4-

In

Mt

xix.

20 the young ruler asks

Jesus says to him eu

o-e

en uo-repu

ti

uo-Tcpet (and so

Lk

xviii.

in

Mk

x.

21

22 en ev aoi

XftTTft).

5.

In

Mk

have said

vi.

Mt

16;

xiv. 2

fita

{pir)n6pei

Herod himself

says, in

to 'Kiyea-dm iino tuwi'), that

Lk

(But see Field, No/es on Trans/, of N.

have eXeyov.)
14, where

from the dead.

Mk

vi.

others

ix. 7

John was

risen

T.,

on

WH

6.

In

Lk

Mt

vii.

show

8 the centurion himself says {aTT0Kpi6e\i e<pT}), in

viii.
6 his friends say as a message from him, the words which

his great faith.

7-

In

Mt

whether

21

xviii.

Peter asks

how

he

often

until seven times {eas eirrdKis

;)

in

Lk

shall
xvii.

forgive,

4 Jesus

and
tells

the disciples to forgive seven times (eTrrdKis).

Mt

14 the mention of oXiyoi ol forms part of a warning

given by Jesus in Lk xiii. 23 it forms part of a question put to

In

vii.

Him.

Indications of Sources

72

Pt. ii

The use of the same, or very similar, Avords as part

of a speech and as part of the EvangeHst's narrative.

C.

Lk

In
Qfov

iv.

43 Jesus says ^ua^f^iKlaaaQal ^e

Mt

in

iv.

He

23

del

Tfii/

^aaiXeiai/ Tov

spoken of as Ktjpvaaav t6 euayycXioJ'

is

TTJ9

^aaiXeias.
2.

In
e/xoC

Lk

viii.

in

Mk

46 Jesus says

f'yw -^ap eyvoiv

30 the Evangelist says of

V.

Sui'afjiii'

Him

clcXifjXuOuiaj' air'

iinyvoiis iv eavrw

tt)p

i^ avTov %6va\L\.v cleXOouffaf.

3-

In

Mt

XXvi.

I,

Mk

ylvfTai: in

as approaching

Jesus says olbart

xlv.

(Mk

Lk

8uo

fACTo,

ori

jxerol

8uo

to

i^jji^pas

miaxa

Evangelists speak of the feast

xxii. i the
i^fjicpas).

4-

In
in

Mt

Mk

the disciples

xviii. i

ix.

34

Lk

or were, disputing

ix.

come and ask Jesus

46 the Evangelists

among

n's pa fieij^ui'

themselves as to ris

had been,

state that they

ficil^uv.

5-

In

Mt

xix.

24 Jesus says

Evangelist writes

iraXiv 8e Xcyoj ujiik:

6 Be 'Irjo-ovs irdXii'
(moKptde'is

in

Mk

x.

24 the

Xcyei aoToTg.

6.

In

Mk

Ypa(|>ai

xiv.

in

Mt

49

it

seems that Jesus says

aXX' Xva jrXifjpwOwini' at

xxvi. 56 the Evangelist adds tovto 8< u\ov yiyovev Iva

irXTjpuOaiaii' at ypa<|>ai

Tav

7rpo(j)T)T(ov.

Mk
Mk

Other such cases may be seen by comparing

Lk
Lk
Mt

iv.

42;

xi.

18;

xvii.

Mt

Mk
with

X.

xiv.

Lk

7 with

23
ix.

Lk

with

36

ix.

l\It
(i.

e.

2;
xxvi.

the

i.

iii.

27;

37 with
30 with

Mk

command

ix.

to

9,

the

Apostles to be silent with the fact of their silence about

the Transfiguration).

Words

II

Variations in the rest of the Synoptic narratives.

D.

Mt

73

differently applied

iii.

5 i^cnoptviTO

Trdaa

Lk

tou 'lopSdi'ou.

'irepi)((upos

i^

avrov

TTpbs

3 Koi r)\6fv eh -nacrav irepi-

iii.

\(tipQv

TOU 'lopSdfou.

2.

Mk vi.

20 'HpwSiuf

19,

aoTOK diTOKTeiJ'ai,
6

vciTo'

TOP

Mk

yap

ovk r}8v-

Ka\

xiv.

5 ['HpoiS???]

auToi'

dTTOKTEiKai

0^0)1/

c4io|3i]6t]

tou

e<|>oj3iTO

'Hpcodrjs

^Icddvijv,

xvi. 7

Mt

up,ds fls

Mk

Mt

T^OcXcK

xxviii. 7

xxiv, 6

en

ufAic

Mt

xvi. 7 Ka6a>s eltrev ujiir.

WH

Lk

Trpouyti

TaXiXaiaf.

TT]>'

suggest that elnop

is

fivfjadr]Tf

V tt]

a)j/

COS

e^a\r]a-(v

faXiXaia.

xxviii. 7 iSov eliTOv

ufiii'.

perhaps a primitive error for

eineu.

5-

Mk

vi.

avTovs ^avavi^o-

I8a}v

48

Tw

fv
^livo^lS

iXavvfiv,

rjv

yap

avepos fvavTios avTois,

Mk

X. 17,

18;

Lk

TToiTjaas)

Ti

Mt

xviii.

24 to

8e

TtXo'ioi/

^aaa-

tS>v KvpuTiop,

vtto

rji>

yap evavrios 6 nptpus.

Mt

18, 19

xix. 16, 17 8i8ajrKa\f, Ti dya-

Qbv

(Lk

pe Xeyfis &yaQ6v

xiv.

d^ojxct'oi'
\

8i8d<TKnXt iyaQi, ri noifjao)

.

noir](Tu>

tov dyaOou

Ti

p( (paras nepl

7-

Mk

xiv. 7

acdpUTTOI'

Mt

OVK ot8a TOP

TOVTOP

OP

Xxvi.

74 OVK

oi8a

Lk

xxii.

60

avBpdiTie,

OVK ni8a o X^Y^'5.

TOP ayBoiOTTOv.

\iyT.

The

vocative uvOpaive occurs in

Lk

4, Paul 3,

Jam

1,

and not

elsewhere in N. T. (pp. 16, 36).

8.

Mk
T]

10 iiaappa

xi.

ep^opePTi

fjpcop

fvXoyrjptpr]

^aaiXtia tov nctTpos

AauciS.

Lk

has no mention of Aavel8.

Mt

xxi. 9 waavpa tw via AaueiS.

Indications of Sources

74

Mk XV.

Mt

TTcpiTiGeaCTii' auTcp ttXc

17

^avTfi cLKCLvBivov aTe(f>avov,

pt. II

28

XXvii.

x^"M''^

airo), Ka\

Trepic'OifjKai'

KOKKivrjV

nXt^avrts

aTe(f)avov kt\.

Cf. also ivbihucTKovaiv in

Mk

with (nhuaavrfs in Mt.

10.

Mk

XV.

21;
.

2lficova

Mk

iii.

Lk

epx<5fJiei'0>'

d.KOuoi'Tes

26

xxiii.

oaa

arr'

Mt

dypov.

V.

rrju

Lk

ttokI r\t\dav

f|epxofAci'oi Se

32

<v/)oj'

"Silfioiva.

vi.

17

dKouaai avrov

riXOai'

Kai tadijvai kt\.

irpos avTuv,

Mk

xxvii.

KaTOiK'io-iv

Lk

fix*" ^^

viii.

27

e'l'

dXX' eV Tots

Tois fivrjiiaaiv.

oiKi'a

otiK

(jjifveu

yLVrjitaaiv.

13-

Mk

V.

Mt

ouSeij icrxucK avroi' Sa/xd-

aai.

28

viii.

wo-re

fi^

lo-xucii'

rii/a

TrapfX^eTc.

14.

Mk
Mk

23
26

i.

i.

Lk

Koi dveKpa^eu.
(f}a>v7J(Tav

(fxijcr]

ixeya^n

iv.

Ka\

33

uviKpci^ev

^<jivr\

ficydXt].

[Lk mentions no cry

f^rjXdfv f^ avTOv.

command

after the

</)i/ia)^)jTt.]

15-

Mk

vi.

16

ov

diTfKf(f)aXicra

OUTOS

Mt

eyo)

Xiv.

OIJTOS icTTlV

Lk

ix.

*Io>di'ji'

ti?

d7reK(0dXt(ra'

la>dpr)i>,

avTOi

rjyepdr].

Tfyepdr]

ktX.

f'ya)

86

oiStos ktX.

f'oTJi'

16.

Lk

ix. 7

'Hpabrjs

StT)ir(5pci

81a

TO \ey(a6ai vtto Tivatv kt\.

Mk

vi.

20

'Hp(i8r)s

avTov iroWa

[Lk does not

dKovaas

fjirtSpci.

give the part ot

the

narrative

uses

^TTopft.]

in

which

Mk

17-

Mk

XV. 37

d4>cls

(^errvfvafv.

(fxiivfjv

ptydXrjv

Mt

xxvii.

d4>T|Kei'

50 Kpd^as
TO

TTPfVfia.

(f)av^

P^yd^J)

Words

11

Mk

V.

avpfdXi^ov

Kill

Mt

auTW o;^Xos

Ka\ 'QKoXouOei

24

TToKvs,

75

differently applied

ix.

19

Koi eyfp6f\s 6

'irjaovs

ol

ixadrjToi

fls

Ka<f)ap-

/cot

T|Ko\ou0ei auTW,

ai'iTov.

avTov,

19.

Mt

iv.

^XSwv KaraiKrjaev

13

Lk

fls

iv.

31

Ka-n]\0ej'

vaovfx.

Mt

12

xi.

^aa-ikeia tS)v ovpnvSiv

f}

Lk

Pidi^CTai, Koi ^laa-Toi upnd^ovaiv

avTTju.

Lk's

0a(n\eia rov Qeov

17

koi iras els avrfjP

Pid^cTtti.

is

xvi.

(vayjf'KiCfTai,

the general classical use of the verb (see instances in

Thayer, and Lid. and Sc).

Mk

i.

45

and

ix.

15

also have

been similarity

hirji)\(To

Tvepl

Be

fxaXXov 6

avTOv,

sound between

in

fjp^aTo

-fipxero.

6 ov yap

rjBei Ti

dnoKpi6fj- cic<|>oPoi

Mt

the 'fear'

Lk

oKov-

[rT)v c})cov>]i']

...

is

placed

by the three

at

ix.

^ ^^

34 e<f>oPTi0T)ffai'
^^ dafXdelv av-

roiis elt rrjv v(c{)fXr]v.

l^o^'t\%t\(Tav acpodpa.

narrative

Km

Xvii,

(^ai/Tef

yap

eyevovTO.

Thus

V.

Xoyos

Xoyoc.

There must

Mk

Lk

6 e^fX^cbi/ rjp^aro

hi.a(j)r]pL((iv TOJ'

three

different

points in the

writers.

23-

Mk

V.

T()v

31 ^Xentis

QXi^ovrd

oxKov

Lk

(tuv-

viii.

45

ot

o^Xoi <TUVe)(ovarlv ae

Koi dn-o0Xi(3oucrn'.

ere.

only a different arrangement of parts of

is

This, however,

words.
24.

Mk

Vi,

3 OVX OVTOS e<TTlV 6 T^KTUJ',

6 uios T^y Ma/Jias

Mt

Xiii.

55

Xeyerai
iv,

But there

is

on Mark,

OVTOS eOTLV 6 TOU

OVX^

T^KTOf OS uio?

Mapiap

oi'x V M'''^P
.

a^^oO

Cf.

Lk

22.

another explanation of this variation see below

Also see JSnc. Bibl., ii. 2598.
p. 119.
;

Indications of Sources

76

Pt.

25.

Mk

i.

38

TouTO

(Is

Lk

yap

iv.

43

TOOTO

eVl

OTt

dnf<TTd\r]u,

placed here on the assumption that i^rjKdov in

Mk i. 38 must be used as in verse 35 and merely with
reference to that departure {f^rjXeev) from Capernaum, and

This instance

is

So both Gould and A. B. Bruce,

not as in ]n xvi. 27, 28.
loc. ; Plummer considers this interpretation
inadequate ',

'

but not impossible [Connn. on

Mk

i.

Lk

iv.

43)

and see Swete on

38.

Among many

other instances which have been collected

and examined, but dismissed as not

sufficiently certain or

under any of the above four headfollowing may be worth mention as perhaps

definite for inclusion

the

ings,

Mt xif.
deserving further consideration:
{a) Mk iii. 12
16, where the charge of Jesus that they should not make
;

'

'

him known is in Mark addressed to the unclean spirits

who had confessed Him as Son of God (so also Mk 25,
34; Lk iv. 41), but in Matthew to the many persons who
i.

had been healed by Him; {b) Mk iv. 17; Lk viii. 12,

where eira (a word used only once besides by the Synopix.
'

applied to different matters

is

tists)

12,

desert place

Mk

in

'

xiv. "^^

is
;

xiv.

39

in

Mt

Tiap{K6aT(a to the

Mk

Mk

{c)

vi.

35

Lk

where the on introducing the mention of the

Mt

'

Mark

recitative, in

Luke

causal

{d)

xxvi. 39, the application of irapiXdrj and

hour and the cup respectively ; [e) in
'

'

'

xxvi. 44, the

employment of the phrase

Tov avTov \6yov imdiv with reference to the

second and to

Gethsemane
the prayers
Mt xxvii. 12
(/) aireKpivaTo ovbiv used in Mk xiv. 61
Lk xxiii. 9, of the silences before the High Priest, Pilate

the

third

of

respectively

in

and Herod respectively

besides only in
of the far
^

In

Lk

iii.

16

more common

LXX

it

is

(this first aorist

;

Jn

v. 17,

19

passive forms

proportionately

still

rarer,

middle being used

Acts iii. 12 instead
(g)

the

being used only four or

five

aiTCKptdr},

&c.^}

Words

"

differently applied

Mk

introduction of 'the sword' in

Lk

compared with that in

xxii.

xiv. 47

49

[h)

77

Mt

Mk

xxvi. 51

xv. 9

Mt

compared with Lk xxiii. 20

where Luke alone gives Pilate's own wish,

xxvii. 17, 21 Oekere airokvaM

deXciiv oLTTokva-ai,

but omits his question as to the wish of the people (?) the
verb avao-eCo) used with different applications in Mk xv. 11
;

and

Lk

but nowhere else

xxiii. 5,

N.

in

nor

T.,

in

LXX

Aq. and Symm.); (k) iravras applied in Mk i. 33 to

those who were brought to Jesus, and in Mt viii. 16 to those
(but in

who were healed by Him

below)

and Lk
in

Mt

(/)

Mt

iv.

40,

and see

Mt

117,

p.

xxvii.

33

'^6

Mk

viOTrjTos in

in

Lk

{m) the applications of the word TTovrjpov

II and Lk vi. 22 respectively
(n) perhaps also e/c

xxiii.

V.

(cf.

the different locations of kKtl in

x.

20

Lk

xviii.

compared with

2i

Such variant

xix. 20, 22.

veavia-Kos

utilizations of the

same

may seem trifling

when regarded separately, and some of them may be
accidental
but on the whole, and when taken together
or similar expressions in parallel passages

with the more important instances on the preceding pages,

they convey an impression of having arisen in the course
of oral transmission, during which (as often happens) the
round of the words adhered to the speaker's mind more
distinctly than the recollection of their original position and
significance.

SECTION

III

TRANSPOSITIONS OF THE ORDER OF WORDS AND

SENTENCES

The

influence of oral transmission

is
suggested by transby the variations collected
in Section II, though the number of the former is much
smaller.
There is nothing to make copyists and compilers

positions even

likely to

more

invert,

forcibly than

either intentionally or

times (Ex xix. 19 ; 3 Ki

vavTO in Judg v. 29),

ii.

Chro

x.

13

Ezek

accidentally, the
ix. 11

also avranticpi-

Indications of Sources

78

Pt. ii

order of the materials before them, whatever omissions or

abbreviations or adaptations they may make in dealing
with those materials but such inversions would take place
;

naturally and easily in the course of memoriter narration

and

instruction.^

The most important

five classes

A. Transpositions of order in

Mk

1.

and

6-13; Mt

vii.

be arranged in

may

transpositions

Mark and Matthew.

3-9: the quotation from

XV.

Is xxix.

13

the reference to Corban.

2.

Mk

ix.

12, 13

and of Elijah

Mt

12

xvii.

Son of Man

the rejection of the

'

3.

Mk

X.

divorce by

'.2

Mt

3-9;

4-8: the references to the permission of

xix.

Moses and

to

Gen

i.

27.

Matthew and Luke.

B. Transpositions of order in
1.

2.
3.

Mt
Mt
Mt

5-10; Lk

iv.

Lk

V.

40

V.

42, 44

5-12: the second and third temptations.

29 x'^'wi' and 'iiianov.
Lk vi. 30, 27, 28 'Give to him that asketh,'
iv,

vi.

&c., and Love your enemies and pray for ', &c.
sonship to God who
4. Mt v. 45-7 ; Lk vi. 35, 32, 33
to good and evil, and What thank (or reward) have ye
Lk xii. 33: 'moth' and 'thief (Lk omits
5. Mt vi. 20;
6. Mtvii. 16; Lkvi. 44:
grapes and figs
'

kind

is

'

'

.?

'

'

'rust').

'

'.

7.

Mt

21

viii.

f. ;

Lk

ix.

59

f.

the

command Follow me
'

',

and

the aspirant's plea for delay.

8.

Mt

violence

John
9.

xi.

Lk

12, 13;

(/Stdfernt),

xvi.

16: the kingdom of heaven suffering

and the law and the prophets being

'until

'?

Mt

xii.

heart,' &c.,

34,

and

'

35

Lk

'

vi.

45

The good man

SomeN.

Out of the abundance of

out of the

Cf.

The passage thus becomes much

Wright,

good

T. Problems, pp. 91, 136

f.,

treasure

and

his St.

clearer and easier in

',

the

&c.

Luke,

Mt than

p. xxii.

in

Mk

(see p. 124).
3

in

Lk's order seems to be the better, and to be more suitable to the context
is.
(Cf. Haniack, Sayings of Jesus, E. T., p. 16.)

Mt than Mt's own order

 III

Transpositions
Mt xii. 41, 42; Lk
queen of the south '.

10.
'

the

Mt

11.

and

xviii, 6, 7

Lk

xi.

31, 32: 'the

xvii. i,

79

men

of Nineveh'

and

the millstone round the neck,

the necessity for offences.

in Mt xi. 21-4 with that in Lk x. 12-15

Sodom and Tyre, and note the different positions of Mt xii.
43-5 and Lk xi. 24-6.
The transpositions of order in Mk and Lk are merely small

Also compare the order

as to

matters of arrangement not worth recording.

Mark and Matthew

C.

Mk vi. 44 Mt xiv, 21 the number 5,000 is given after, in

14 before, the account of the feeding.
In Mk xiv. 12
Mt xxvi. 17 the disciples ask 'Where wilt

In

1.

Lk

agree, against Luke, as to order.

ix.

2.

thou that we make ready

'

before, in

Lk

xxii, 9 after,

go and prepare the Passover.

to

According

3.

17-19, the cup

not after it as in

In

4.

Mk

to the shorter text preferred

WH

in

Lk

xxii.

given before the bread at the Last Supper, and

and Mt.^

is

Mk

xiv.

given before, in

by

they are told

18;

Lk

Mt

xxii.

Supper.
5. In

xxvi. 21

prediction of betrayal

the

21 after, the

institution

is

of the Lord's

Mk xiv. 29-31 Mt xxvi. 33-5 Peter's denial is foretold

Lk xxii. 33, 34 before, the departure from the supper room.
6. In Mt xxvii. 51
Mk xv. 38 the rending of the veil of the
is
recorded after, in Lk xxiii. 45 before, the death of Jesus.
temple
;

after, in

Mark and Luke agree,

D.

In

1.

Mt

before, in

viii.

Mk

iv.

against Matthew, as to order.

26 the disciples are rebuked for want of faith

40; Lk. viii. 24, 25 after, the stilling of the

36,

storm.

In Mtxiii. 12

2.

Mk

'

Whosoever

25 ; Lk viii. 18
Parable of the Sower.

in

'

iv.

it is

hath, to him ', &c., is placed before,

placed after, the explanation of the

with Tischendorf and the English Revisers we adhere to the longer

for the saying
text, we have also a transposition to note
will not drink from henceforth ', &c., occurs in Mk xiv. 25 and Mt xxvi. 29
If

and better known

'

after,

but in

Lk

xxii. 18 before, the institution of the

shortened text of Lk,

it

occurs between the

two

Lord's Supper. (In the

parts of that institution.)

Indications of Sources

8o
E.

Matthew and Luke

In

I.

Mt

iii.

Lk

12;

ii,

agree, against Mark, as to order.

iii.

16 'I indeed baptize you with

Mk

i.
', &c., conies be/ore, in
7, 8
of Jesus as He that is mightier than

water

Pt.

it

comes a/kr,
',

the description

&c.

The above

are only the principal cases of transposition.

Other and briefer instances may be conveniently examined
in Veit's

Die synoptischen Parallelen, or

in

Wright's Synopsis
of the Gospels in Greek. They are particularly characteristic of St. Luke's Passion-narrative, and as such are fully

volume of Studies
below (p. 108, note).

dealt with in the forthcoming

Synoptic Problem referred to

in the

SECTION IV
DOUBLETS

The

'

doublets

',

or repetitions of the same or closely

same Gospel, are of great value

similar sentences in the

supplying hints as to the sources and composition of the

Gospels, especially virhen a comparison can be made with

in

parallels in

the case in
all

the

II

one or two other Gospels, which is fortunately

most instances (viz. Nos. 1-20 in Matthew and
in

Luke).

These doublets

will

therefore

be

brought together here, with a few comments pointing out

Most of them
their bearing upon the Synoptic Problem.^
contain sayings of Jesus only, but in Matthew there are four
pairs of narrative passages which may also rank as doublets
(Nos. 15-18).

The

two passages taken from the same

and B, and are placed in the same
Gospel, are marked
column. And the passages from different Gospels which
doublets,

or

^
Only one addition to the list (No. 8 in Luke) has been made in the
second edition. For I have thought it best to restrict the name 'doublet'
to such important cases as are collected here, and not to include under it

smaller similarities (see pp. 99, 106), as some other writers would do. See,
for instance, Badham, Formation of the Gospels, pp. 12 ff. It is interesting to

compare the doublets

in Tatian, as collected

by Hobson.

op. at., pp. 69-74.

Doublets

iv

81

occur in parallel places (or very nearly so) in the narratives,

are placed opposite to one another.
Thus the arrangement
of the passages themselves is quite independent of any

hypothesis or theory, though the 'two-document hypothesis is referred to in some of the comments.
'

No attempt has been made to illustrate by various types

and colours the amounts of resemblance and difference
between the parallel passages in the different Gospels.
in Rushbrooke's Synopticon^ to which

This has been done

students must be referred for the verification of most of

the following remarks, unless they will go through the

very instructive process of marking for themselves the
resemblances, &c., in a Greek Harmony, such as Tischen-

But Synopticon does not

Sytiopsis Evangelica.
denote the words that are peculiar to similar passages in
dorf's

the

same

type.

Gospel, so such

And

this last

words are here printed in thick

is of course an important one,

matter

bearing on that use of their own favourite

expressions by the three writers, which occupied us in
Part I of this book.

because of

On

its

the whole

think the evidence from the doublets will

be found to point in these three directions

1. Doublets in Matthew Nos. 2, 7, 10 (cf also
:

and doublets

in

Luke Nos.

and

i,

11, la)

suggest the general

use of two sources (probably

2.

3.

Marcan and Logian).^

But doublets in Matthew Nos. 3, 5, 6, and perhaps 17,
show the occasional use of the same source twice over.
Doublets

in

doublet

in

of editors
just

Matthew Nos. i, 2, 4, 8, 9, 10, 11 and

Luke No. 10 seem to show that freedom
in using their own phraseology which has

been referred

to.

For I venture still to retain the useful adjective Logian as a means of

referring to the source (mainly consisting of sayings) which is known to us
much more
through Mt and Lk only, and which is now (1909) called

often than Logia (see p. 107).

HAWKINS

82

Indications of Sources

pt.ii

in Matthew Nos. 8, 11, 13 and doublet in

Luke No. 10 contain divergences between Matthew
and Luke which may perhaps imply the use of

Doublets

4.

'

'

special source

by the latter.
But the absence of triplets (except as shown in the
brief saying on p. 106) seems to indicate that there

5.

were only two main sources.

Doublets in Matthew.
No.

I.

Mt A.
Mt

V. 2 9,

8c o o^^aX/iOf uov

el

30

(TKavbaXi^d

bf^ios

aov Koi

fi(\S)v

rav

fj

<Tf,

^dXt dno aov,

troi

ydp

ft

(TKav8aki^(i

;^fip

fieKSiP

aatfid

yffvvav' koi

^KKoyj/ov avTfjv koi

avfi(f){pfi

o\ov to

fxfi

fls

P\r)6jj

8f^id (Tov

(V

avfi-

ctoo,

yap aoi tva dnoKrjTai (v tSjp

(f>fpti

aov

e^eXe

(re,

avTov Kai Pd\i Atto

tva

aov koi

dnokrjrai

oXov to

fifi

aStpA <T0V fli yetvvav drriKBrj.

MtB.
Mt

xviii. 8,

6 Trow

<To\)

8c

17

*^^ V

x*V

aKavbaki^ei

2k-

<Tf,

Mk

ix.

43, 45, 47 koI tdv aKavba-

at

Xiaj]

x^^P O'oVy

fi

Ko^ov airbv Kai ^dXc diro aou'

aiiTTjv'

KoXov aoi (ariv darXBelu

(lat\6flv fls

^oiffp
fj

KvWov

Tf

\(>)\6i>,

T]

els ttjv

8vo )^f7pas

Svo Tvobas (xovTa ^Xijdqvai

rb Ttvp

TO

6<f>daXfji6s

ataiviov.

aov

koi el 6

aKavbaXi^ti

e^cXe avTop Kai ^dXc diro

Ka\6v aoi iariv

f^ovTa

T)

o-oC"

dvo 6(f>6a\-

^\r)6fjvai fls ttjv

vav Tov irvpos.

0"f,

pov6(f)6a\fj.ov fls

Ttjv ^oifjp (latXdflv,

fjiovs

tls

yitv-

KoXdv

ioTiv

C^ffv

TTjV

Xflpas f^uvTa

drrdKoyj/'ov

kvXKov

at

ras dvo

TJ

dntXdflv

tls

t^p

yifpvav, (Is to irvp to aa^taTOP,

Koi eai/ 6 novs

aov aKavSaXi^jj at,

dnoKoyl/op avT6p'

koXSp iartp at

flafX6f\p (Is Tfjp

Cafjv

Toiis
fls

T^p yuvpap,

fxos

j^caXoy

tj

Svo irodas fxovra ^XrjB^pai

Koi tap 6 6<l>6aik-

aov aKapBaXi^j}

at,

tK^dXe

avTOP' KaXop at taTip fiop6<f)6aX'

fiov

flafXdflv

TOV Ofov

f)

(Is

TTfP

^aCKfiav

8vo 6<pdaXfxovs fxopra

^Xt]6^vai (Is

'ycfi'i'ai'.

Doublets

IV

Mt B, which
it than is Mt

to

is parallel in

position to

Mk,^

much more

is

probably be Logian).

may

(which

83

In

similar

there

are hardly twenty words or parts of words, in

there are more
than fifty, which agree with the language of Mk, an excess which is

only partially caused by the greater length of the passage

also specially the addition of

sion of the order of the eye

fit^to'?,

A only,

Se|ta in

and hand, besides

and

observe

its

inver-

omission of the

its

foot.

be seen that a few words are printed in thick type as

and B, but, though worth notice, they are not very

It will

peculiar to

important, or distinctive, especially as in the case of the eye <^*Ae

.
Koi jBdXf has to be compared with Mk's /f/3aXf.
.
.

See Bacon's Sermon on the Mount, pp.

No.

40-3.

2.

Mt A.

Mt

v.

32

iyu)

%k

nas 6 dnokvav
irapiKTos
avTrjv

\4y(i}

ttjv

Xoyou

v\uv

on

yvvaiKa avrov
"nout

iropi'eias

iioixfv6rivai\,

kcu

os

eap

dnoX(XvfxePT]v yafirjai] |iot;^aratj.

Lk

xvi.

18

nds

yvvaiKa
fioi)(evei,

Mt

em

iropi'eia

"P'^''

koi

Mk

oTi OS &p

yvpaiKa avTOv

ttjp

yap,r)(Trf

X. II,

HOi^drai

a.XXr)p

12 OS &P dnoXvar]

In the form of the sentence

Mk,

second clause.

as appears in

top

aXXop

aphpa

Tr)P

aXXrjP

(ap avrr]
aiiT^s

fiotj^drai.

corresponds with Lk and

dnoXvav and in the whole of the

Mt

irds 6

yap,fj(Tr}

avTTjP, Kai

iir

dnoXvaaaa
yafirjaj}

with

dno

p,oi)^(Vfi.^

yvpaiKa aiiTOv Koi

p,f}

poi)(aTai.

Mt B

ttju

B.

xix. 9 X^Y'^ ^^

diroXvat]

aTrdXixop

Koi 6 dno\e\vfitpr}v

dpSpos yap,S)P

Mt

avrov koi yafiatv irepav

Probably therefore the

latter

have

their source in

1
In these comments the abbreviations Mt, Mk, Lk are often used for the
above passage from Mt', &c.
^
It is to be observed that the preceding verse is parallel to the apparently
Logian Mt v. 18 which stands at the commencement of the contrast between
old and new, of which the subject of adultery forms one.
'

2,

Indications of Sources

84
the

Marcan, and the former

in the

pt. II

Logian document, though they

are differently placed in Mt and Lk, as we shall see to be the case

more often than not with presumably Logian sayings (pp. io8 ff.).

Yet Lk resembles

(Lk

irepav as SO often,

matter

WH

the mention of marrying another

ab

And

aXXrjv).

differences

WH

k, codd.

form a strongly attested Western omission

Gr.

et

On Mk

Lat. ap. Aug.).

Menzies, The Earliest Gospel,

and

in loc,

among many

writers

who

regard

and
N. T.,

see Swete,

Jiilicher, Intr. to

E.T., p. 323.
Observe the very important exception as to
in Synopsis^,
purely Matthaean points. Wright
loc, are

the whole difficult

of reading: see
complicated by
in
which
words
and
observe
that
the
of
B,
mg

are bracketed by

(om. D,

Mk in
Mk

and

further

is

especially

and

it

nopveia
p. 99,

among

the

and Allen

z'n

as an editorial or later

interpolation in both places.

No.

3.

Mt A.

Mt

16-18 ano

vii.

Ta>v

Kapnav

avrovs'

avrav iniyvaxrtade
firjrt
aKavdStv ara(TvWfyovariv ano
<^vXaf
ouTO)

Trfif

KoXovs

OTTO

fj

rpi^oktav

avKa

hevbpov ayaBov Kapnovs

TTOtei,

TO Se (ranpov btvbpov

Kapnovs novTjpovs

iroid-

ov diva-

rai bfvbpov ayaObv Kapnovs novr]-

ovbe b(v8pov aanpov

povs fPtyKflv,
KaUvs noitw.

Lk

vi.

43-5

oi,

yap fauv

06

koKov nuiovu Kapnbv aanpov, ovbe

T^akiv bivbpov
J^ov KaXov.

Kapnovs

aanpov noiovv Kap-

(Kaarov yap bivbpov

(K Tov Ibiov Kapnov yivo>aK(Tai'

ov yap f^ aKavQmv avK\(yovaiv

axiKa,

ov8e

rpvyaxTiv.

(k /Sarou

aTa<f>v\^v

6 dyados av6pa>nos eV

TOV ayaOov 6r)(ravpov t^s Kaptias

Mt

Mt

xii.

33-5

Ka\ 6 novrjphs
npo(f>pft TO dyaBov,

B.

^ noiTjvaTf TO 8(v-

ov K(iK6v Ka\ TOV

Kapnov avTov

(ranKoXdv, ^ noiTjO-aTt to Sivtpov

avTov o'anpSv
pov Koi TOV Kapnov
fK yap TOV Kapnov to 8ev!ipov
yivu(TK(Tai.

ytvvrjfuiTa

(xi^f^f,

tov novrjpov

iTpo(j)ep(i

Tonovr)-

pov' eKyapnfpia-atvpxiTos Kapbias

XaXet to

oro'/ia avTov.

Doublets

IV

bvvaade dyada 'KaKuv

TTcoj

ovTfS

TTOvrjpoi

yap tov nepicrcrevpaTos

fK

Kapdias to aropa XaXei.

TTJs

tov dyaBov

in

dyndos avOpairos
Orjcravpov

85

eK/3XXft

Kol

ayadd,

6 TTOVrjpOS apffpCOTTOi < TOV

pnv drjaavpov tK^dXXd

TTOVT]-

TTOUTjpd,

Here Lk has been printed opposite Mt A and B, as it partly

is chiefly as to
agrees with each of them its agreement with

and

the simiHtude of the grapes

mouth speaking out

of the

figs,

and with

abundance of the

chiefly as to the

heart.^

not possible that Lk may here give the passage of the

from
which Mt drew on both occasions, choosing and adaptLogia
so as to bring out the criterion of true and false
its words in
ing
teachers, and in B so as to bring out the importance of words as
Is

it

proofs of the state of

suggest

The

men's hearts?

all

contexts seem to

this.

There are no peculiarly Matthaean points

No.

here.

4.

Mt A.

Mt

X.

15

dprjv Xeyo)

ecTTai

Ttpov

Topoppoiv iv

iip-'iv,

dvfKTo-

yfi

SoSd/xwi'

'J/w.epa

KpiaECj;

koI

Lk

12 Xeyo) vptv

X.

ev

fcrrai
77

tj/

^pfpa

rjj
t]

ttj

(Kfivrj

ndka

(in

2o6d/iioiy

dffKTOTfpou

{Kfifr/.

TToAft fKiivT].

Ml

Mt

xi.

24

SoSo/ucoi/

fjpepa

Mt

ttX^i/

B.
Xe'yo)

vplv oTi yT)

dvfKTOTepov

Kpiacus

A and

e>rTai

iv

^ (toL

Lk

are placed opposite, as those passages

Twelve and the Seventy which

Their origin is probably Logian, and
connected.
dv{KT4Tepov suggests that B may come from the same
the charges to the

come from

are so closely
the rare

word

source.

worth notice that the passage in Mt vii is not nearly so closely

Lk in wording as that in Mt xii for there are but 15 words or
parts of words identical in the former case, while there are 35 in the latter.
1

It is

parallel to

Similarly, in No. 17 we shall find that Mt, apparently using twice the
material which Lk uses only once, is verbally closer to him in the case in

which he
agree

differs

from him

in attributing

it

in locating the material

to the

same occasion.

than in that in which they

86

Indications of Sources
one of the two

Kpi(ns,

of Mt, both with

^fif'pa

peculiarities of

and alone

Mt

22

X.

VTTo

<7

characteristic

is

5.

A.

Kai f(TTd( fuaovfifvoi

iravTav 8ia to ovofid

Mt
Mt

and B,

(pp. 5, 31).

No.

Mt

pt. II

fiov.

B.

XXiv, 9 d Koi eafo-Of

Mkxiii. 13 a

eatade

koi

Lk

xxii. 17 KaX f<Tf(T0e

vno

HUTOVflfVOt V1T0 TrdvTwv

fiKTOVixevoi VTTO navTcov

fiiaovufpoi

Twv

tia TO ovofid fxov.

Sia TO ovofm fiov.

bia to ovofia

(6vci>v

ttuptcov

fiov.

All four are identical, except for the addition of rmv (ffpmv in

MtB.
No.

6.

Mt A.

Mt

X.

22 d

6 be vTrofifivas tls reXor

ovTOS (ra>6fjafTat,

MtB.
Mt

XXiv.

Mk

3 6 Se vnofifivns fls TfXos

All identical

13^

xiii.

6 bi

imofulvai tls

TfXos OVTOS (rwdrjafTai.

oStos (raOrjatTat,

so here, as in No.

No.

no inferences can be drawn.

5,

7.

Mt A.
Mt

X.

Koi

38

OS ov '^afifidvd tov

(rravpov avToii Koi aKoXovdfi oni(T(o

fiov,

ovK ecrrtv fiov a^ios.

LkB.
Lk

xiv.

27

^aard^ti tov

otTTis oil

CTTavpov (avTov Kai (p\(Tai on'uroi

fiov,

ov biifOTai fivai fiov

Mt

xvi.

24

tLTis 6i\(i

Mk

viii.

34

fi Tis

pov

(K6(lv,

orr/cft)

aTrapinjadcrdci}

iavrbv

anapvrjad(r6o

6ni(ra>

fiaBrfTrfS.

Lk A.

MtB.
6f\(i

pov

(XOtiv,

iavrov

dpdTm TOV aravpov

Koi dpaTCi TOV CTTavpov

Koi

avTOV Kai (iKoXov^f/ro)

aiiTOv

/KOI.

fioi.

Ka\ aKo\ovd(iT<o

Lk

ix.

6ni(Ta>

23

61

Tif Bfkfi

pov

ep)(r6ai,

dpvTf(rd(r6a>

tavrov koi

dpoTO)

TOV

aravpop

aiiTov Kaff rfpipaVy Kai

dKo\ov6fiT<a

fioi.

Doublets

IV

87

Mt
and Lk B, though differently placed, agree against the
other three in giving a negative form to the precept, and in omitAnd they both follow immediately
ting the mention of self-denial.
the
non-Marcan
about
natural affection in comparison
upon
sayings
So they may be Logian, and

with loyalty to Christ.

Marcan

the other three

in origin.

nor Lk
and B have any distinctive
own, unless the substitution of epxta-dai for
Lk B, as being more similar to tpxtrai in Lk A, may be

Mt

Neither

and

characteristics of their
in

c'X^eii/

taken as having any significance.

Observe
19,

(pp.

Lk

in

the

Lucan

characteristically

Kad'

^nepav

41).

No.

8.

Mt A.
Mt

X.

39

XfVa?

aiiTrfv,

'^vxTjv

TTjv

^v^tjv

rfju

eupo)]/

avTOV OTToXeVct

Kal 6 drro-

avTov

tvfKtv

(fiov upi]0'6(, avrrfv.

Lk A.

MtB,
Mt

xvi.

deXf)

25

8'.

dnoKf(Tei

&v

^i^vx^iv

(pov

yap iav

TT]v yj^vxfjv

(xSiiTai

6r

Of

Mk

avTov

35

GeXr] TTiv

air^f

OS 8'

fveKfv

iavTOV ^vxrjv

av dnoXfO-fi

^VXT}V

up'f\(Ti avrfjv.

yap tav

6j

OTToXeVei avrrjv'

(Twcraf.

a/roXeV/7 rfjv

avTov

viii.

aVTOV

Trjv

(V(K(V

Lk

ix.

24

or

yap &v

6eXr] TTjv ^vxTjv

avTOv

a-cixrai aTToXecret

avrrjv'

OS 6'

&v

aTToXeo"/;

avTov

^vxfjv

ttjv

eptKtp

\fpov Kui] ToC (vayyt-

ipov, oZtos crixTd av-

Xiov

TTfV.

(Towrti auTr]V.

LkB.
Lk

Xvii.

OS

33

V'^XV" ouToO
"Ktati

avTTjv,

iav

CrjTTia-ri

irtpnroirjO'aa'uat,

6f

S'

rfjv

ano-

av dnoXfO'fi

^aoyovTjafi avrrjv.

In this case, unUke

similarides between

Mt

the preceding

one, there

and Lk B: indeed

are

no

the latter

special
differs

the other versions of the saying, by containing

remarkably from all

the unusual verbs irtpinoUopai. and

N. T. elsewhere only once

and

But

^woyoviai occurs in

irtpiTTOifoj

^vxds).

in Acts

LXXll

C<^oyovea>,

and once

both which occur in

in

Tim.i

times (in 3 Ki xxi. (xx.) 31 with ipvxas)

33 times (in Ezek xiii. 18, 19, with

(usually in middle voice)

88

Indications of Sources

But between Mt B, Mk, and

are used only in these three versions.

The use of evpiaKw twice in Mt

and once

is

probable, for

and Lk

(cf.

p.

which a

in

in

is

the Gospel

in

Mk

it

insertion

editorial

later

be

more general
'

'

Observe the characteristic addition of

Mt B may

in

a sign of Matthaean editorship, though the verb

use by Lk than by Mt.

one of the few instances

Lk A, there is sufficient similarity

Marcan origin ; for ^eXw and trifta

to support the suggestion of a

is

Pt.

Mt

could hardly have been omitted both by

Syr8"i has 'for my Gospel's sake'.
152).
it

most important saying found in all four Gospels ^

see Jn xii. 25, where however an-dXXu/xi is the only verb used in
common with any of the Synoptists.
This

the

is

No
Mt A.

Mt

xii.

39

yei'fa

XCiXis

arjfielov

atjfifiov

oil

TO

Koi

CTTif^Tei,

8odr](rTai

lava tov

aijijxtov

Lk

Tvovrjpa Ktti (AOl-

29

(Trjfiuov

TO

TTpo(j)T]Tov,

yfvea avrrj ytvea no-

fj

iaTLV'

VTjpd

ei fxi]

avrrj

xi.

(rrfuftov

KCU

C^Tfi,

(TTjflflOV

ov bo6r]<T(Tai avrfi

tl

fifj

lava.

MtB.
Mt

xvi.

yei'fa

iTovr]pa

KUi

ixfiov

ov boBrjaerai avTji

el

Mk

fjioi-

XCiXlS a-rjpdov ciri^rjTft, Koi

viii.

12

(TTjixe'iov ;

(Ttj-

p^ to

rfi

Tt

yfvea avrr)

f]

afirju

Xeym,

fi/r**

ft 8o0T}(rfTai

yevfo. ravrr] aijfxuov.

(TTjpflov lava.

For the introductory narratives, see No. 1 8 on p. 96 below. And

and Lk, Mt
and Mk, are respectively followed
observe that Mt
by similar contexts ; for the mention of Jonah is not enlarged upon

and Lk.
Mt B as it is after Mt
Perhaps in B it may have
been an importation into a Marcan record from the Logian
and Lk ; and this may also have been the case with Trovrjpd. Such
after

transferences are exactly such as would be made naturally and unconsciously in the course of oral teaching, or even by copyists
familiar with the substance of both documents.

The two
noticeable,

peculiarities marked by thick type as Matthaean are

though not very important. It is remarkable that the

only other occurrence of poixoKis

^

The only other

is

not in

case of any importance

is

Mt

but in

that in

Mt

x.

Mk

viii.

Mk

38.
ix.

40 b,
37,
also x. 16), Jn xiii. 20 (where, however, \afji0dv(i and not
'
He that receivcth me receiveth him that sent me.'
5'xTat is the verb),

Lk

ix.

48

(cf.

Doublets

IV

Mk

and Lk only have

trifling in itself,

though

may

89

this agreement,
avrr) with yevea ;
be worth notice in connexion with

the other small similarities between

No.

them which occur

12

xiii.

Kal

Mk

yap
avrm

oaris 8e ovk exft,

kciI

utt'

apOrjcreTai

iv.

25

op

yap

bodrjaerai avrS'

Lk

fXfi,

Koi

OS OVK e\(i, <ai o c;^et

Trepi(rCTu0i](j-Tai'

e;(ft

18.

Lk A.

oiTTis

Sodfjaerai

e^et,

No.

10.

Mt A.
Mt

in

apdrjcrerai

an avTOV.

18

viii.

^KH>

av yap

OS

8oBr)a'eTai

Ka\ OS av

fifj

avrco,

e\rj,

Kal

o 8oK(l ex^fLV apdijaerai

an avTov.

avTov.

LkB.

Mt. B.

Mt

XXV.

29 TW yap exovTi navTl

Lk

xix.

26

Xeyo) ipiv

f)(ovTi

Tov 8e

exovTos Ka\ o

f^ovTos Ka\ o e^f i apdfj-

pfj

on

Trairi t(o

8o6r]a(Tai, dno 8e tov

dodrja-frai ical TrcpiffaeufliqaeTai*

'4x(i

p.fj

apdrjafrai.

avrov.

(Tfrai drr

The three passages have been printed as parallel, though Mt

occurs before, and Mk and Lk
after, the explanation of the
Parable of the Sower.

And

same course has been adopted with Mt

the

and Lk B,

two parables which have very much

whether
are
versions of one parable or not.
common,
they
The use of the verb (xei or exil) twice in Mt A, in Mk, and
Lk A, where the participle [ex^vTi or exovros) is twice used in Mt
since they are attached to

and

in

Lk

B, seems

to point to a different origin, the

in

in

former group

being presumably Marcan, and the latter Logian. And iravri is

a further peculiarity of the latter pair of sayings.
In the Matthaean pair rrepia-a-evdrjaerai, is the only editorial
characteristic ; and in the Lucan pair there is none.

No.

Mt A.
Mt

xvii.

20

(av exV"^
TVfbis,

dfiT)!/

(pelre

(v6V (Kel,

yap Xcyw

TTi<TTLV a>s

tw
Kal

upii',

kokkov criva-

opfi tovtco Merd/Sa

pera^TjCTfTai,

ovBfu 6.8vvaTT]a-ei vpiv.

Kal

II.

Indications of Sources

90

Lk

XVli.

(l

pt. II

e^f re nifTTiv

eXfyere hv

crivaTTfrns,

tji

a>s

kokkov

crvKaplv<a

[ravTrj^ 'Y.Kpi^uiBrjTi Ka\ (f)VTfvdr]Ti

iv

SaXdaar]' koI vnfjKovcrfv av

rfj

vfiiv.

MtB.
Mt

21

xxi.

djiT)!/

Xeyb)

ujAii',

fav

ov

e\jr tt'kttiv kcii fi^ biaKpidrjTe,

TO

jJLOVOV

Trjs (TVKrjS TTOlTjafTf,

Kav

TO) opei TOVT<a

Koi

^\r]6r]Ti

(Is

Mk

Xtya

fXfTf nitTTiv 6fov'

vfiiv

on

Ap$r]Ti

Koi

duXaaaav,

TTj

Kapbia avTov

firj

dWa

dprfv

tw

opti

^\tj6i]ti

fls

os av (inrj

TTjv 6d\a<T<raVj Ka\

SiaKpidjj iv

niarfvri

on

b XaXet yivfTai, etrrai avra.

yevTjaeTai.

Other things are uncertain here, it is at once evident

have strong points of agreement, and cannot

Though
that

23

TovT<a

dXKo.

finrjTe "Apdrjri
rrjp

xi.

Mt B and Mk

but be derived from the same (probably Marcan) source.

Lk has been placed near Mt
(though a sycamine tree

is

Lk

instead of a mountain as in the other three cases),

because those two passages agree in the unique expression mimv

instanced in

ms KOKKOV

With

(nvdrrfcos.

the concluding

Mk

words of

Mt A, compare

in the parallel

23 the similar saying ndvra bward rw marfvovn.

This suggests that Mt
as well as Mt B may be Marcan in origin,
and that ins kokkov aivdnews may have been casually introduced into
narrative of

ix.

it

from the (probably Logian) passage

\ey(o

dpifiv

found

Mt

double

vfiiv

Mk

31,

in

Lk.

decidedly characteristic of Mt, being

12 or 13, Lk 6 times (in Jn 25 times with the

(or aoi)

is

dfifiv).

No.

12.

Mt A.
Mt

xix.

30

TToXXoi 8e eaovrai

npa-

TOL eaxaToi Koi ((T}(aToi Trpmrot.

Mk

X.

31 TToXXol

ttTxaToi

Km

b( ftrovrai

irpmroi

[oi] ((Txaroi npSnoi,

MtB.
Mt

XX. 16 ovTtos raovTaioi

7rp5>roi Kai oi

e<T)(aroi

nparoi ecr^aToi.

Lk

xiii.

30

Kai Iboi) ti(j\v ftrxoTOi ot

fcrovrai rrpooToi, Kai la\v irpaToi

01 fcrovrai (ax^Toi.

Here again Mt A and Mk, which are parallel in position, agree

and probably come from the Marcan document.

exactly,

Doublets

IV

91

Mt
might either be repeated by the editor after the Parable
of the Labourers in the Vineyard, which illustrates this saying, or
might be brought in with the parable from the Logian source.
The

latter is

rendered the more probable alternative by the fact

are here transposed from the order in Mt

that the clauses

and Mk, and agree with that in Lk.

A and B have nothing distinctive of Mt.
No.

13.

MkB.

Mt A.

Mt

XX. 26, 27

OVX^

av

d\\' OS

vfjuV
fieyas

ytpeadai

Kovos,

Kai

fivai

BtKr]

ta-rai

av

OS

Mk

OVTO)S ((TTIV iv
eV vfiiv
tid-

vfjLWV

OeXr]

iv

44 ov^

ouTcor Se laTiv

iv v/MV'

aXK

hv deXt] fieyas

yeveaBai

ep

X. 43,

OS

fcrrai

vfiiv,

Vfiiop

diaKovos, Koi OS av 6f\r) iv vfuv eivai

i/fiiv

TTpSjTos (TTai vfiav BovKos.

npaiTos, ftrrat

it(1>'T()'

dovXos.

MtB.
Mt

II

xxiii.

(arm

de

fMfi^oyv

vfiS>v

vfiwv diaKovos.

Mk

Mk ix.

35

f(TTai

fi

A.

TT

TrdcTWC

OiXfi Trparos flvai

e(r;^aror Kai

TrdvTuv

BiaKovos.

Lk

26

xxii,
Kcil

vtatrepos,

vfifls 8e

ovx

ovT(OS,

aW

6 fifi^cov fv Vfiiv yiviada

u>s

6 Tjyov/jLfvos ms 6 SiaKovwv.

Here again the identity of language in Mt

and Mk B is
almost complete, and points decidedly to a common source, which
would be generally held to be a Marcan one.
In

this

one case a doublet

in

Mk

is

entered,

irpSrros

and

diuKovos

being used in both passages though not in the same order. The
combination navTcov Bmkovos occurs only in Mk
it is one of the

very few

expressions

peculiar

Mk

to

which are found

apostolic writings, being applied to Christ in jEp. Poly carp,

The passage from Lk has a link to Mt
in
and

text

and opening, but

6 p.fi(cov

so

its

origin

is

to

Mt B

(a

is

its

sub2.

con-

probably Logian passage) in

very doubtful.

used only in Mk
and
nothing peculiar to them.
With Lk's vearepos, cf. Acts V. 6.
TtdvTav

Mk B

in
v.

the Matthaean sayings have

Indications of Sources

92

No.

pt. II

14.

Mt A.
Mt

on

Xxiv. 42 yprjyopfiTe ovv,

oiSare

i^p,epa 6

Troi'a

Mk

ou/c

xiii.

ol'Sare

Kvpios VfiSyv

35
yap

oiKias fp\iTai

epxfrai.

ovv,

ovk

Kvpios

ttjs

yprj-yopflre

Trore
.

Mt B.
Mt

XXV. 13 yprjyopflTf

ovv,

on

ol'Sare ttjv
rnx,ipav ov8e ttjv

Mt

ovk

wpav.

Mk

and
are very similar, and are found in the concluding
of
the
same
part
discourse, though not exactly in the same connexion. If that discourse comes from the Marcan source, Mt

may

have been modified by

iroia Tjnepa

as a reminiscence of the

rr/v

Logian version of the saying in Mt B, which

have
been
may
brought from the Logia with the Parable of the
Ten Virgins. But this is only a doubtful matter of detail.
in the other or

r]p.pav

It will

have been seen that the use of

rjpipa is

a mark, though

not an important one, of Mt

and B only.
Observe that Mt here encloses the Parable of the

Ten

Virgins

between these two almost identical sayings, exactly as he encloses

the Parable of the Labourers in the Vineyard between the two
which form doublet No.

The 14

12.

Matthew

doublets from St.

that have been given

are records of sayings of Jesus; the next 4 are historical

passages.
No.

15.

Mt A.

Mt

iv.

KCLl

23

iv oXj]

TTJ

TTfpirjyfv

8i-

ToKiKaia,

bdarKcov iv

Tois

ycoyais avrciv

<rvpa-

Koi

Kt]-

pvaacov to eiayyiKiov
Tijs

Mk

i.

Koi

39

pvaaav

tls

^Xdev

ya>yas avraiv
T^j

els

TaXiXaiav

baifjLOfia

KT]-

tos irvvaoXijv

koi to

Lk

iv.

44

pv(T(T(ov

ycoyas

fls

Koi

with

(K^uXXaiv.

and Revisers

Kal

Xaias!)

Trdaak jxaXaKiai'

ix.

TaXi-

Xato,

Mt
Mt

nBCL

QR, I, &c. [and so

Syr""J; but Tisch

paaiXcias Kal Oe-

Tw

Kr]-

rrfv ^lovbaias.

(So WH

paiTCUCJI' TTClCTai' v6<T0V

eV

^v

Tag arvva-

35

fii

B.

TTfpifjytv

^Irjcrovs

Tus nohfis ndaas Kal ras Kwpas,

8i8dcrK<ii)P

iv Tois avvayoiyais av-

Mk

vi.

6 b

Koi TTtpi^yev ras Ka>fias

KVKXoi 8l8d(TKOiV.

Doublets

IV

rSiv Ka\

to uayyKiov

Kr)pva-(T(jiv

Kal

PaaiXcias

TTJs

93

Oepaireuoji'

naKTav voaof Kal irdaac

(laXa-

These very

Mt

Gepa-

naaav voa. Kanraaav

occur again in
in

words

the

(And

Ki'ai'.

TTfveiv

fioX.

x. i.)

summaries of the ministrations of Jesus occur

similar

immediately before the

His sayings,

Mt

those in

viz.

first

v-vii

two of the great collections of

and

x.

The agreement of Trfpi^yei^both in Mt A and Mt B, and

Mk

B, with

also in

gestion that

some

6 gives

vi.

gives the passage in

in the course of oral teaching

its

of ras Kw/xa?

slight probability to the sugits

original situation,

phraseology

may

use of to describe the other similar circumstances to which

Dr. Salmon has

made

a different suggestion, viz. that

one document

off the use of

to turn to

repeated when he turns back

{In/rod. io N. T.\ p. 580).
is

to the

another

and

that

have been made

Mt

and

in

A refers.
A broke
*

that the verse

former document

',

i.e.

in

No. 16.

Mt
Mt

ix.

6ev

Koi irapdyoi/rt eKei-

2731
Ta

A.i

TU0Xol

Koi

Kpd^OVTS

^EKtTjaov

vi^

i^fiids,

66vTi be fls

8uo

r]KoKov6rj(Tav

'irjaov

XtyOVTiS

Aavei'S.

e'X-

Ti]V oiKiav TTpoirjKdav

avrSt oi TV(p\oi, Koi Xeyft avrols

on

6 'irjaovs IIicrTfveTf

TOVTo
Nat,

6cf)6a\fiS)V

avTOiV

iricrTiv

Trjv

Kcii

vfiiv.

d(f)6a\fJLoi.
To'is

TOTf

Kvpie.

nvra
rStv

'^i|aTO

Kara

Xeywv

vfimv

ytvrjdrjTa)

r]Vfa\6r)aav avrcov oi

Kal

6 'lijo-oCs

fvf^pijjirjdr]

Xeymv 'Opare

8eis yii/ao-KeVm'
8ie(l)r]p.i.(Tav

bvvap.ai

Xeyovaiv

TTOifj(Tai ;

oi

be

avTou iu

avpuq-

e^eXdovres
6\r]

rfj

yrj

eKflvrj.
1

The

difficulties

connected with the records of

this

and the following

I have attempted to
serious.
miracle, as given in Mt ix. 27-34, are very
deal with them in Exp. Times, xiii. 24 f., and more briefly on p. 167 below.

Indications of Sources

94

Mt

Mt

XX.

B.
KOt

fAC-

TTOpfvoixeuoitv aiiTcov

dno

29-34

r]Ko\ov6r](T(v

'lepfi^o)

avTM
I80V

8uo TU0Xoi
rrapa

aKOvaravTes
Ttapdyei,

yovTfs
li^ftas,

8e

Koi

o^^Kos TToXvs.

fitvoi

Kadrj-

686v,

rfju

on

'irjaovi

sKpa^av

Xe-

Kuptf, eXerforov
vlos AavfiB.

o)(Kos

enfTifirjaev

aiiToii lua aicnTTTjacoaiv'

oi

b(

/iftfoi/

XeyovTes

CTas

i^iivrfcrtv
cin-ei'

iXir]-

Aavfib.

[6j 'irjcrovs

avrovs

Ti OeXere

(ra> vfxiv ;

ra

eKpa^av

Kvpif,

<Tov Tjpas, vlos

Koi

Kvpif,

koi

noi^-

Xfyovaiv aviva

dvoiya-

aiv ol 6(f)6aXfio\ Tjpav.

<T'trXay)(yi(T6f\s

'itjaovs

8e

Tj^l/aro tw

fiarav avrmu,
decos

pt. II

Koi

dvf^Xf^av

fjKoXovOrjaav avra.

Mk

X.

Km

Koi

46-52
(Is

Xovrai

ep-

'lfpfi.)(a>.

tK7T0pV0p.V0V ttV-

TOV ajTO

T&v

Koi

'l(pfl)(Ui

padrjTciv avTov Koi

iKavuv

o)(Xov

vlos

Lk

xviii.

35-43 ^V"

pero Se fp

tm

avTop

lepeix^u tv-

tls

(f>X6s Tis

fKaBqTO irapa

Tr]p6hbviiraiTu>p, ukov-

o^Xov 8iano-

Be

cras

Tcfiaiov 'Qaprip.at.os tv-

pevopevov

(f>XQsi7po(TaiTr]S (KadrjTo

tI

napa

686v.

t^v

on

aKovaas

Xtynv Yle

Kpd^fiv Koi

iXeijaov

Ir](Tov,

KOI enfTipwv avTco

pf.

TToXXol

Irjaovs 6

fanv ^p^aro

Na^aprjvos

AavflS

koI

Iva

ai(0TT7l(Trj'

TToXXw

be

Yj6

fKpa^ev

Aavfid,

6 1t](tovs

aras

KOI

eXfTjcTOV pe.

(rare

pdXXov

finfv

^cdVT]'

koi (pa>-

avrov.

vovai Tov TvcpiXov Xe-

avra

yovTfs

6p-

tydpe,

(v-

dTTo^aXav

koi

avrov

(f)a>vfL

to

Ipdnov

TOV

dfXf IS

^Xeyj^d),

tua

avrSt

nifTTis

aov

fv6vs

Koi t^dij'irjaov vie

eXerjaop

aoi
6

8e

avTa
dpa-

Ynaye,

pe.

Koi ol TvpodyovTfs ene-

Tipap avT<a iva

avTos 8e

aiyritrr)'

noXXa puXXov
Yle

eKpa^ev

Aavei8,

aTadfls

eXeTjaop pe.
8e

'li](ro.vs

avTov
avTov.

avTov
TOP

irpos

eyyiaaPTOs 8e
eirripa>TT}<rev

Tt
6

iva

av~

BeXeis

<Toi

TToiTjaco ;

Kvpif,

(KeXevcrep

d)(6rjvai

8e

enrev

dva^Xe^a.

Itjaovs enrev av-

'

KOI 6 'lijaovs

fLTTtv

aep Xeyav
Aaveid,

on

Na^copaios

napep)(eTai.

Ka\ 6

(ITTtP

'Pa^^ovvfl,

lr]crovs

dnrjy-

avra

8e

TG) Apd^Xeylrop'

TToujCTO) ;

TV(f)X6s

(irj

yeiXap

avrS
Tt

fintv

eirvpddveTo

TOVTO'

Irjaovv.

aiT0Kpi6f\s

Irjcrovs

Koi

6 8(

di^a7rt]8T](ras tjX-

6ev TTpos
Koi

Odpati,
ae,

tyytfeJi'

fj

ns

crov

f)

aeadKep

rricr-

at.

Koi napa^pijpa dve^Xeif^ep,

TW

Kai fjKoXovdei

av-

fio^afwi' TOP 6e6v,

Kai nas 6

Xaos

Idctv

eScoKtv aipov tco 6ea.

(TfcrtoKfp ae.

dve^Xf^ev,

Koi fjKoXovdti avToJ tp

TJj

The

68w.

Mt A and Mt B are such as to suggest

same miracle may be twice recorded by Mt.

resemblances between

strongly that the

Doublets

IV

95

Besides those which are printed in thick type as pecuUar to him/

and the
there are some remarkable ones which are common to

and

vU

i\tr]crov, both
(or vihs) AavelS,
synoptic narrative generally, viz.
and
in
twice
use
of
the
used twice in B, Mk, and Lk, and
KpaC^iv

Mk, and once

in

Lk

'

also the reference to

On the
command

other

him

Marcan account

hand an

make

'

faith

earlier date for

is

in

Mk

and Lk.

suggested by the

not to
known, as well as by the proof Jairus ; and it may be that
house
fKeidtv
to
the
bable reference of
of phraseology familiar to
made
use
miracle
Mt in describing that
in the

the miracle

of the later one.

No.

17.

Mt A.
Mt

ix.

32-4 avTmv

180V

ht i^fpxonivbiv

'npocff\veyKav

daifxovi^ofifPoW

auTw kox^qv

Koi

(K^XtfOevTos
6

Tov

Sat/xoj/ioi'

Koi

idavyiaaav ol o;^Xot Xiyuvrei

Ovbenore

Ef

e(pdvr) ovt(os

Tot

pafjK.

(Xa.\rj(Tv

T(3 ap)^ovri tS>p

^aXXei TO

eV

be <Papiaaioi

K(o(f>6s.

rw

la-

eXe-yov
f/c-

baipoviav
^

8aip.6via.j

Lk

xi.

14,

15

Koi

baifioviov Kai(f)6p'

^v

eK^dWcov

eytvero

fie

tov

daipopiov i^f\66vTOS ekakr^aiP

Kai fdavpaa-ap

K(o(f)6s.

01 o)(Kol'

TiPfS 8 e^ ai/rap (urap 'Ep Bfe^e/3ovX

Tw ap^ovTi

tS>p

Sai/jLOpiaip

eV/SaXXet ra baipovia.

MtB.
Mt

xii.

22-4

rore

TtpO(j-(\vei(-

KUf auTw baipopi^opfpop

Koi
Tov,

Ka)(f}6p'

TV(f}X6p

Kai iBtpwrrtvcrev

av-

iSore TO I' Koxpop XaXflu koi

^XfTTfiv.

Kai i^laravTo ivaPTfs

oi

^
but they have not been
-QKoXovOrjaav and -aev should also be noticed
printed in thick type because at the beginning of the narrative the verb is
of the multitude : at the end all the
used by
of the blind men and by
;

Synoptists use it of the blind man or men.

"
The bracketed words are a Western omission' (,WH, Introd., p. 176).
Syr'' also omits them.
'

Indications of Sources

96
o)(koi Koi

vlos

ouro'r earip

eXeyov Mrjri
8e

Aavet'S; ot

uKovcravTfs

(iirov

et

ev

fifi

Bef^f^oiiX apxovTi tS>v

Lk

^apia-aloi

Ovtos ovk eV-

^aXXft TO daifiovia

ra

Baifiovicoi'.

has not been printed

exactly opposite

while on the one

hand

it

corresponds to

hand

it

more

Mt

occasion for the 'defensive discourse' in

the other

pt. II

Mt

closely resembles

or

Mt B

for

in being given as the

and Lk

xii

on

xi,

For

in wording.^

the verb eV/SaXXw, the use of the

genitive absolute, and the sentence
Koi fdavfiaa-av ot
oxXoi are found only in Lk and A.

Here, as in the preceding case (No. i6),

language which was familiar to him in
miracle.

On

dumbness

in

Mt may

have used in

the record of another

the other hand, the mention of blindness as well

as
xii. 22 has
suggested to some writers that Mt

Mt

be there combining reminiscences of the two miracles in

No.

may

ix.

27-34.

18.

Mt A.
Mt

xii.

avTco

38,
rivfs

^apia-aiciv

39

Tore dnKpi6T)crau

tSiv

ypafipaTeav Koi

Xtyovres

AiSacr/caXf,

pfKopev diro aov arfpelov Idelv. 6

06 diroKpidcls ilirev auTois ktX.

Lk

XI,

6 erepoi

avTov

fie

iTfipd^ovTes

ovpavov f^rjTovv Trap

(Tr)fif7ov e'^
.

2g rav

V.

(TTadpoi^oiJifvav

he o)(ka>v

rjp^aro

\eytiv

MtB.
Mt

Xvi. I, 2 Koi TTpoaiKBovTfs

\oi^
^apicraioi koi 2a88ovKaioi

Treipd-

CovTfs (wr]po)TT}(Tnv
tK Tov

he

avTov

(rr^peiov

Mk

viii.

II,

12

Koi

f^rjKQov

oi-

^apiaaloi koi rjp^avro (rvv^rjTUv

avrS,

^TjToiipTes

nap

avrov

crt]-

ovpavov eVtSet^ai

aiiroif,

p.uov aitb TOV ovpavov, ireipd^ov-

eiTrec

aoTois

Tfi avTov.

diroKpidcls

Koi

TTVcvpari avTOv

kt\.

For the words of Jesus which follow

No. 9, on p. 88.

in

dvaa-Tfvd^as tc5

Xe'-yft

kt\.

each case, see above.

Judging from the position and contexts of the two pairs of

it would be natural to class Mt
and Lk as Logian, Mt B

records,

and

Mk

as

Marcan

Probably we are right in doing so,

that as to two expressions, ireipdCovris

in origin.

notwithstanding the fact

f^ ovpavov, Lk agrees with

and

'

Compare

Mt B and Mk

the note on doublet No.

in

having them, while

3, p. 85,

Doublets

IV

Mt

Also iCfirow nap' avrov in

without them.

is

to Cn'^ovvTfi nap avrov in

are so

common, and

97

Mk

Only.

much

so

But

Lk

only

is

similar

these three expressions

all

in place here that, as in the case

of

to the insertion of them.

9, no importance can be attached
marked in thick type as
the
words
as
in
No.
And,
9 again,

No.

A and B

Mt

peculiar to

The two

are also unimportant.

following doublets differ from the preceding

they bring out identities between Matthew's

records of the Baptist's ministry and that of Jesus.

ones, in that

No. 19

Mt A.

Mt

iii.

'lovdaias Xeyav

f'prifia TTjs

fjyyiKev

vofiTf,

iv

KTjpvaacov

Mk

rfj

Mera-

i.

Lk

4,

iii.

^anritrfxa peTuvolas

KTjpvcra-cov
.

^ fiaaikda

yctp

TWt' oupavStv.

MtB.
Mt

iv.

17

fjyyiKtv

Ka\

Kr]pv(T(Tfiu

yctp

TJp^aTo

^aaiXfia

i,

ft?

MeraroetTe,

Xf'yfii'
T)

Mk

*lr](Tovs

14, 15

^\6fv 6

tiayytXiov tov deov

jSiV

on

oupai^uc.

'irja-ois

Ta^iXaiap Krjpvaa-cov

rfjv

IleTrXjjpwTai

rjyyiKev

fj

pLeravoflre

jSatrtXeia

Kal

[/cat

Xe'ycoi/l

Ka\

Kaipbs

tov

niarfvcre

to

6(o\i'

eV

t<

(vayyiKioi,

A to

be expanding, in B to be summarizing, the

corresponding passages of Mk, but in both he attributes identically
the same proclamation to the Baptist and to Jesus respectively.

Mt seems

Thus

it

in

names

in

it

See also

only Mt who attributes to the Baptist

'kingdom of heaven (or of God '). Mk first

appears that

the mention of the

i.

it is

'

15, as above, but

Mt

x. 7

Lk

Lk

'

not until

iv.

43.

x. 9, 11.

No. 20.

Mt A.
Mt

iii.

10 nav ovv bevSpov

noiovv Kapnhv
Koi (Is

koKov

Lk

pfj

Ka\ tls

nvp ^dWerai.

HAWKIKS

iii.

nav

ovv

devbpov

pfj

noiovv Kapnov [koAoi'] (KKonrtTai

iKKOirTerai

nvp ^ciKKfTai,

Indications of Sources

98

Pt. 11

MtB.
Mt

vii.

"nav beuBpou

19

ttoiovv

/jli)

KoKov eKKOTTTerai

KapiTou

Kcii

tls

^dXKerai}

TTVp

ovp in Mt B, which is
connected
with
a
discussed
as
No. 3 above (p. 84),
closely
passage

Except the omission of the conjunction

there

no difference

is

in these three sayings.

also Mt's use of yewfjixara

Compare
as well as in

iii.

Lk

iii.

The two remaining

;^i8j/a)i/

in xii.

34 and xxiii. 33,

7.

doublets in Matthew are not so

interesting to students of the Synoptic

Problem as the

preceding twenty, because there are no parallels in

or Luke with which they can be compared.

Mark

No. 21.

Mt A.
Mt

ix.

13

TTopevOevres

fie

"EXeos 0eXw Kal ou QuariaV ov

fiddtTe Ti eorii'

TjkQov KaXeaai ktX.

yap

MtB.
Mt

xii.

*^

^^

iyviiKeire ti

Ivtiv "EXcos Oe'Xw Kal ou Quaiav, ovk av

KaTibiKdaare rovs dvairiovs.

Both these are Matthaean additions

consecutively in

to narratives which are placed

and Lk, and which are apparently Marcan in

Mk

origin.

On

the quotations from O. T. in Mt, see pp. 154

ff.

No. 22.

Mt A.

Mt

xvi.

19

Koi 6 iiiv Si^aif]? CTTi

ttjs yrj?

Kai 6

vols,

cole

Xuarjs

ctti ttjs
yfjs

Mt
Mt xviii.

dfifjv Xe'yo) vfi'iv,

oupacu Kal oaa

iv

eciv

oaa

ccii'

rois ovpavois.

B.
8i^<tt)T6 iiTi TTjs yTJs
eirl

Xuaijre

corai SeSefxeVoi^ iv tois oupa-

corai XeXufAtKov iv

ttjs

y^S

earai SeSefxcVa

eorai

XeXujxeVa

iv

oupaviZ.

This promise given

Jesus
'

is

'

The saying seems

with

its

to Peter in

addressing, apparently
to

A,

is

repeated in
'

the disciples

break the connexion here, whereas

context in the Baptist's teaching.

to all

who came
it

whom
Him

to

agrees well

Doublets

IV

in xviii. i.

99

occurs each time in close connexion with one or

It

other of the only passages in the Gospels in which

fKKXrjaia is found.

The resemblances between Mt

and xxiv. ga; x. 40 and
xxiv. 23 and 26; xxviii.

xviii.

and

word

34 and xxiii. 22 x. 17
27 a and xxviii. 18

v.
;

the

xi.

though worth

10,^

notice,

have not been regarded as sufficient to constitute doublets.

For shorter repetitions in Matthew, see pp. 168, 170.
Doublet in Mark.

Mk
on

ix.

^^ with x. 43, 44

^
:

Matthew No.

for this see

13,

91 above.

p.

There

is

no other instance

been decided to treat

from the doublets

Mk

between

be entered here, as it has

that hath ears, &c.', separately
to

And

see p. 106 below.

23 and

ix.

He

xi. 23,

the resemblances

and between

xiii. 5,

6 and

21-3 do not come up to the standard of closeness adopted

in these lists.^

Doublets in Luke.
No.

I.

Lk A.
Lk

16 ouSels

viii.

Se

^v^vov

Mk

atjfas

KoXiiTTTd avTov (XKevei ^ iVoKaro)

KkivTjs

Tidrjaiv,

Tidria-iv,

tva

j3XeiTa)(Tii'

TO

dXX

ol

eVi

21

iv.

HT}Ti

(px^Tai 6

Xv^vos

iva (ino TOP iJLoBiov rfBfj ^ vtto ttju

\vxvias

kXivtjv,

Ttdtj

Ei(T7ropu6p,e^oi

ovx iva tnl

ttjv

Xvxviav

<|>ais.

LkB.
Lk

xi.

33 ouSels

Kpvnrrjv

Tidrjcnv

fwdiou oXX' eVt

01

Xvxt^ov a|/as els

ov8e
TTjU

eio"ivopu6)xei'oi

vtto

tov

\v)(viav, tva

to

<})a)s

pXe-

Treated by Prof. Lake as a doublet, Resurrection of J, C, p. 86.

On the complications of Mk ix. 33-42 see Enc. Bibl,, ii. 1864-6.
^
The three predictions of the Passion, &c. (Mk viii. 31, ix. 31, x. 33, and
parallels; Tisch, Syn. Evang.., 70, 73, 116), are omitted from notice,
1

because they are so expressly assigned

to three distinct occasions.

Indications of Sources

lOO

Mt

V.

pt. II

15 ovhi Kuiovaiv \vxvov

Koi

Ti6fa(Tiv

avTov

tov

fuibiov

aXX eVt

Tr}v \v)(yuiv, Koi

Xdfinei

viro

TTCKTIV TOIS if Tjj OlKiq.

Here, as the thick type shows, the strongest similarities are the
and B. To the last clause in them Mt
ones between

editorial

has a parallel in substance, but

his next sentence ovras Xa/i>//^drco

As

so adapted as to lead

is

it

to

source of the original form of the saying, no decided

and Mk are found in
For though Lk

to the

conclusion can be drawn.^

the

on

kt\.

same place and connexion, they do not coincide more exactly

than the other passages do, their agreement as to KXlvrj being

balanced by the agreement of Lk B with Mk and Mt as to /uoStoy.
But the consideration of No. 2 will lend some probability to
a Marcan origin for at least
and in
secutive both in Lk

Lk A
Mk.
No.

here, as the passages are con-

2.

LkA.
Lk
6

viii.

ov

oi5

<pav(p6v
o

dTr6Kpv(f>ov

Mk

yap eanv Kpvnrov

ov

ov8e

yevTj(r(Tai,
fif}

ypoDadjj

iv. 2 2

fifj

Ka\

iva

ou yap f<TTiv KpvTTTov iav

(f)av(p<i)6^y

dnoKpvtfiou

fls (f)avtp6v t\6r].

dW

ovhi
iva

iyevfTo

eXdrj

els

^avfpov.

LkB.
Lk

xii.

oibkv

fitvov iariv
(rerai, Ka\

Be

o ovk

ovyKeKciKvfidnoKaKv(f)6r}-

Kpvnrov o ov yvaxTBt}-

aerai.

Mt

X.

26 ov8fP yap eariv

KtKaXvfi-

fifvov o OVK unoKdXv(f>6f](reTai, Ka\

KpvTTTov o ov yvaxTBrjaeTai.

Here the wording is so very

B and Mt respectively, and

Lk

similar in

Lk

and Mk, and

in

wording between
the two pairs is so wide, that we seem to have two versions of the
saying, the former handed down through the Marcan, the latter
the difference in

through the Logian document.

'

See Bacon, Sermon on

the saying

is

found.

the

Mount,

p. 132,

on the connexions

in

which

Doublets

IV

Here

Mk

as so often (see pp. 122, 131)

form of the saying, for his

difficult

lOI
has the most harsh and

purposive tm

replaced by a future, the tense which we find in Lk

There is nothing to be marked as limited to Lk

The

Lk

and Mt.

and B, as

Mt.

also used in

ytrwo-Kco is

in

is

New

No. IV of the

variation of this saying in

Sayings of

Jesus from Oxyrhynchus (1904) should be compared.

No.

Lk
For

Mt No.

this see

on

10,

3.

18 with xix. 26.

viii.

89 above.

p.

No.

4.

Lk A.
Lk

ix.

pav
V.

3
.

KCLi

Mt

KT]-

\xr\T(

av olKiav

(Is r)v

(Kfi

tl<Tf\dr]Te,

dr}T(
(COS

fie-

p.)]

V,

XWfTai vpds, f^fpxopfpoi cmo Trji noKeas

Tou

fKfivTjs

ano

pf)

nrj-

12

KOKd pdvare

Kni Of hv

vpds

/x)j

(Is

6r]T(

m/'-

10 onov (dv

av V.

etffeX-

KoopTfv

fj

(Is fiv S'

vi.

pav

av (^(\6t]t(.

l^

Mk

Tai

Kovioprov

rrodav

tS>v

noKiv

fifVfTf

5 Kui oaoi &p

VV. II,

Koi fKfWev e^epxecOe.

V,

10

X.

pav

i<T(\-

oIkIoVj

(K(l

p(V(T( (as av (^(Xdr]T(

(KfW(V.

/III)

b(^r]-

pr}8( aKovcrrj

jy.

11

p.rj

Ka\

&v Tonos

OS

8(^rjTai vp,ds

prj8(

Tovs \6yovs vpav, ($fp-

aKovaaxTiv vpSiv, (ktvo-

oIkios

p(v6p(V0L (K(W(V (KTl~

vpav

x6p(voi ^a>

TTJs

noK(cos

TOV

tov

dnoTivd(TaT( (Is pap-

T]

rvpiov en avrovs.

(KTivd^aT( TOV Koviop-

inroKdra

Tov Tcov TToSoic vpav.

vpS>v (Is papTVpiov av-

Ttjs

(K(ivqs

vd^aT(

Tolf.

LkB.
Lk
V.

V.

X. 4

(V

nripav

av (i(r(\dr]T( oiKiav,
8(

aiirfj

oifci'a

rrj

mvovTfs

Ka\

((t6ovt(s
avrSiv,

pr]

(Is fjv 8'

yap 6

a^ios

pia6ov avTov.

p(V(T(,

to

nap'

(pydTT]s

tov

pr]

p(Ta^aiv(T( (^

(Is r)v S'

av iroKiv (i<r(k-

oiKias (Is oIklov.

VV. 10,
Br)T(

1 1

Ka\ prj 8e';(W>'T(U

OovTfs

(Is

ras

vpds, ('$(\-

irKardas

avTrfS

;^ot}i'

Tutv

nodav

Indications of Sources

I02
Kat

ivnare

KoWrjOevra

rov

top

Kovioprov
tK

f)fuv

rrjs

pt. II

noXfois

vfMwv els Tovs TToBas anofiaaaofifda

Tr\f)v

vfiiv'

rjyyiKfv

We

fj

TovTO

/SacrtXeta

Sti

yivuxTKfTe

tov dtov.

have come to the complicated matter of the charges to the

Twelve and the Seventy/ but here we are only concerned with
those portions of them which Lk substantially repeats.
Except the
change to the plural which is marked above
Mk), there is nothing exclusively belonging to Lk

trifling

in

No.

Lk

ix.

For

Mt No.

7,

on

For

Lk B.

5.

86 above.

p.

No.
ix.

aKovo-axnv

23 with xiv. 27.

this see

Lk

(cf.

A and

24 with

this see

xvii.

Mt No.

6.

33.
8,

on

p.

87 above.

No.

Lk A.
Lk

26

ix.

Koi

Toiis

TOV

vios
(TCTaiy

efiovs

\6yovs, tovtov

dvdpanrov

oTav fX6r] iv

TOV

Koi

Of yap av fnaia-xwdrj

TvnTpos

TJj

Koi

fxe

fTraiaxyvOr]'
h6^rj

avTov

TUP dyiap

Mk

viii.

yap idp

Toiis

epovs

ytpta

TavTrj

TJj

dpapT<o\a),

nov

TT]

iiraKT^vpOi)

\6yovs (P

Koi 6 vlos tov

60^17

ttj

koi

/ioi;^aXt8i

dpdpw-

avTop

eiTai(T)(yp6j]aeTai,

fXBrj fV

dyyeXciP,

Of

38

pe Kai

orap

TOV TTUTpOS aVTOV

ptTU t5)v a-yyeXcar t5)p dyicop.

LkB.
Lk

g 6 8f dpvrjcrdpfvos p.f fVcI)Tap dpdpa>n<op dnapvTjdfiaeTai

xii.

TtiQP

fVoiTTiop tS>p

dyyiXciP tov 6(ov.

INIt

X.

33

epnpoaBfP
pai

Kayoi

oo-ri?

avTOP

ev
TTOTpOS poV TOV
^

be observed that Luke

8e

pe

dpvi)(TT]Tai

tS)p dpBpairaip, dpptjao-

eprrpoadtp
To'is

tov

ovpapois.

35 refers to the words fiaWavriov

having belonged to the charge to the
Apostles, whereas he himself had only recorded them as part of the charge
to the Seventy (in Mt x. 10 viroSrjpara is used to the Twelve).

and

It is to

vvoST/paTa, besides

nripa,

as

in xxii.

Doublets

IV

103

With some hesitation I have included these verses among the

Lucan doublets, although the leading verb is not the same.
The position of Lk A and Mk, and their general similarity,
point to a
Q>{

Marcan

and

avTov,

(ii)

Lk A

But

origin.

the omission of

has

(i)

the remarkable addition

eV t^ -yfvea t-uutj; ktX.,

a limitation

of oral teaching.
which would be likely to fall
we
have one of many
in
the
second
that
It seems likely
pair
cases in which Mt collected into his chief bodies of discourse various
out in the course

Logian sayings which Lk records separately (see pp. 161 ff.).

Though Lk has one of his characteristic expressions
'

'

pp. 22, 48),

(toCtoj/,

to

and another

in

(eVwTrtoj/,

in

is

none

TTpos

aWt]-

p. 18), there

A and B.

be noted both in

No.

8.^

Lk A.
8c

Mt

8ia\oyi<Tp.6s iv auTOis,

oi

TO

yovTfs, Tis apa fiti^av

Lk

ix.

46

fla-rjXdep

ap

Tt'y

fiei^ayv

fir]

auTwi'.

Xviii.

i(TT\v

t5)v

TTpoarrikdov
,

fMadfjToi

iv

Xe-

Mk

ix.

34

Xovf yap
iv

Trj

8i.e\(x.^r](Tav

68a> TiV p.(L^a)V,

^acriXeia

Tfi

ovpavap

Lk B.

Lk

xxii.

24

fy(PTo 8e

Koi (f)i\optiKia

TO

TOis,

iv au-

auTwi'

ri'y

doKel (ipai pei^ap.

The

TO before ris

There
verses

is

not

is

Lucan

much

similarity in the sequels of the

compare, however,

characteristic, see pp. 22, 47.

ix.

48 and

No.

two Lucan

xxii. 26.

9.

Lk A.
Lk

xi.

oTi

oval vplvTois ^apia-alois,

43

dyairuTe

ip Toii

TrjP

TrpcoroKadtSpiap

avpaycoyals

Koi

tovs

acr-

Tfacrpovs ip rais ayopals.

'

This

is

discourse.

the only Lucan doublet in narrative, the other ten being in

Indications of Sources

I04

Pt. 11

LkB.
Lk

XX. 46
TU)V

tS>v

BiKoiTciP nepiTTa-

v.

koi

(TToKais

2) (piXovcri

Koi

deiTTVois

Koi

Mk xii. 38,

ypap-

6, 7 (ot

Kal ol ^apiaaloi
.

iv

airo

Todv

39 ^iitixf
ypapfiarecov

tS)v 6e\6pTa>v

TTjv

ras npco-

iraapovs iv Tois ayopais

T0Ka6fhpias

npcoTOKadedpias ev rais

avvayayyais

koX

tovs

Tois

avvayayais koi npcoTO-

daTraapoiis

iv

rals

npa>TOK\iaias

dyopais

iv rots deiTTvois.

/cXtcria?

Lk B

Marcan

is

dyopa7s

rals

Koi TrpcoTOKaOfdpias

Koi

iv

toIs

and presumably in origin note

and ^XeVtre drro in it and in Mk, and

in character

the analogous Trpoarfx^Te

diro

iv

a vvayayyals

dfinvois.

crro-

Xais ntpiiraTeiv Koi dor-

iv

Tuis

iv

to7s

Trpa>TOK\i<riav

danaaixovs

(f)i\ovpTu>v

iv

pards

ypajxfiaTiCiv

iv

Tflv

Mt xxiii.

Trpoo-e'xcre

dno

the most complete identity in the rest of the passages.

and
But Mt, though agreeing with Lk
in having npaTOKKi-

alav (they

have

also he agrees with

a.nd doTTaapovs

and

Lk

against

his (^tXovo-t

is

Mk

omitS their

iv t. Beinvois,
-as)

-nepntaTeiv iv arokais

in the order of irpaTOKaSeSpias

much

less similar to their GeXovTcov

than to the dyandTe of Lk A.

It appears then that Mt's use of the Marcan source here

and modified by the influence of

affected

directly or

many

parallels in

in

Logian)

indirectly

Mt

them

Lk

xi,

is

that record (probably

to

which there are so

xxiii.

No.

10.

Lk A.

Lk

xii.

II, 12

vpds inl

orav be

u(r(f)ep(iiaiv

Taj (rvvayayas Kal ras

dpxas Koi ras i^ovaias, p^

pvfjCTTjTe ttS)s
(TT](Td(

fj

&pa a

Ti

diroXoyT)-

rtj

ftiTTfTf'

8i8d^fi

nvfvpa.

f^^P'^'

[rj

TO yap &yiov

vpds iv

avrtj

rtj

Set elneiv.

LkB.
Lk

xxi.

14.

Kap8iais

15 6(T ovv ivrali

vpSiv

diroXoyTj^^cai,
^

pf)

iyit

irpopektr^

yap

The bracketed words

daxro)

are omitted

authorities (Syr"" has to be

added

Mk

xiii.

1 1

KOI

napadidovTfs,
\aXrjat)Tj

orav Syaaiv vpas

Trpopfpipvdre

pfj

dXX*

e iav doOfj vpiv

by a very strong group of Western

by Tisch) but if they are

to those given

retained in the text, the phrase vws ^ ri forms an important coincidence

and Mt, and may point to a Logian origin for both.
between Lk

Doublets

IV

v\uv crTOjia Koi

aovrai

(TO(f)iav

dvTi<TTTJvui

dnavres

rj

105

ov Svvrj-

(v iKilvrj

avrenre'iv

ov yap eVre

aWa

ol avTiKtifxevoi vplv.

Mt

v/xeis

XaKe'ire,

XaXovvres

ol

to irvevjxa to ayiov.

20 orav

X. 19,

vfias,

iv

fKdVT]

oil

yap

he Tvapabaxriv
iras

fifpiixvqarjTf

fit}

XaXi^arjTe'

dWa

apq tovto

rrj

yap

boBrjaeTai
Tfi

vfJiels

r/

ti

vp-lv

S>pa

Ti

XaXrjcrrjTf'

eare

01

XaXovvres

TO TTVfvpa tov iraTpos vpav

TO XaXovv iv vfuv.

The Lucan

dnoXoyeopai

(Lk

2,

Acts

6,

Paul 2 only) connects

and B.

The

chief resemblances are between

In

passages are differently placed.

Mt

Mk
it

and Mt, though the

forms part of a longer

passage placed by him in the charge to the Twelve, but hardly

likely to have been spoken so early.

As Lk B and Mk are
who speaks most often

parallel in position,

it is

curious that Lk,

of the 'Holy Spirit' (p. 27), should omit

Mk's words t6 nvfvpa TO ayiov there but it occurs in Lk A.
:

No.

II.

A.

Lk

xiv. 1

OTt

TTois

iavTov

6 Vi^SiV iavTov

Ka\

TaTreivadrjaeTai

TaTTfivwv

v'^u}6r]cr(Tai.

B.

Lk

xviii.

on

irds 6

TaneivadrjaeTai,

envTov

v\l/<t)v

8e

eavTov

TOTTfivSyp

vyJAcoBijaeTai.

Mt

xxiii.

2 6<TTis 8e vyj/uarfi eavTov

TawfivcodrjcreTai,, icai

oaTis Tanfipo)-

a(i favTov {/^ad^aeTai.

Except

for the

conjunctions

kuI

and

Se,

Lk

A and

Lk

are

identical.

They agree against Mt in having nds o with a participle, while

he has otms with a verb. In Mt No. 2 (p. 83) the former construction marked the apparently Logian pair of passages
but
;

here

all

three are probably Logian.

io6

Indications of Sources

The resemblance between Lk

pt. II

31 and xxi. 21 has

not been thought sufficient to constitute another Lucan
Also the narratives in
doublet, but it is worth notice.

Lk
Lk

V.

30 and xv. i, 2 are remarkably similar. And

be compared with xiv. 3 (to which, however,

29,

vi.

xvii.

may

Mt

the parallel in

xii.

10

more

is

close)

and

viii.

21 with

xi. 28.

APPENDIX TO THE COLLECTION OF DOUBLETS

The

He

'

sayings

that hath ears,

dr^c.'

Mt A.
Mt

xi.

15

iX'^v

ara

d<oveTa>.

Mk

MtB.
Mt

9 6 exav aira

xiii.

Mk

iv.

A.

OS

Lk A.

Lk

ci)Ta

ex^i

aKOvfiv aKoveTCi.

8 6 ex(ov

viii.

Syra

OKOvdv aKoveTco.

MkB.
Mk

iv.

et

23

Tif

exi

S)Ta QKOveiv aKovfTa.

MtC.
Mt

xiii.

43

o (x<op

&Ta

aKoveTO).

LkB.
Lk

xiv.

6 xa)J' S)Ta

35

CLKOVflV aKOViTO).

As being used

3 times by Mt,

and as being merely an adjunct

was not included among the

to other sayings, this brief utterance

doublets.

Each Gospel adheres

oKovfiv,

Mk has

aKovtw,

on each occasion.

to

Mt omits
peculiarity of form
and Lk the participle with

some

the verb with okovhv,

So

it

is to

and not

editors

to sources

that these variations are apparently to be ascribed.

This was evidently a well-known proverbial phrase

Rev
Rev

ii.

7, II, 17,

xiii.

ei

29;

ns exa

iii.

6, 13,

22

oZs aKovauTa.

6 e^wi' uvs

With

all

9
pare Mt's omission of aKovav, and with the

it

aKovaara

occurs in
.

those instances

last

of them

and
com-

Mk B.

Doublets

IV

107

This is the most frequently repeated of the complete ^ sayings in

The next in order of frequency
the Gospels, as it occurs 7 times.^
are
Whosoever will save his life, &c.', 6 times including Jn xii.
'

'

25

(p.

87

f.)

To him

that hath, &c.' (p. 89),

his cross, &c.' (p. 86), each

No

5 times.

and

'

Let him take up

other saying seems to

occur oftener than 4 times.

SECTION V
THE SOURCE LARGELY USED BY MATTHEW AND LUKE,
APART FROM MARK
In the

book (1899) the title of the

present Section was The Logia of Matthew as a probable
source
Since then the scholars of England and America
first

edition of this
'

'.

have largely followed those of Germany

this source as

Q (=

admitted that to
*

call

Quelle).

For

'

the Logia of Matthew was unfairly

as assuming that Matthew and Luke
'

named by Papias

But the abandonment of that name

in designating
has been generally

it

question-begging ',^
certainly used the document

symbol

it

(p.

xiii).

in favour of the neutral

need not involve any intention of begging the

other direction, by ignoring the reasons

for holding that the only two documents named by the
earliest writer who deals with sources at all are the two
question

in the

which bulk so largely in our First and Third Gospels.*

The exact or almost exact correspondence of some
parallel passages of considerable extent (p. 66)

and the use

of not a few peculiar and unusual expressions (pp. 54 ff-)

in both Gospels combine to make it highly probable that
this
'

was a written

source.

And

the probability that

There shall be weeping and gnashing, &c.,' occurring 7 times,

excluded, as being only a portion of various sayings (p. 170).
In the received text 8 times, but
Tisch R omit Mk vii. 16.
'

WH

''

'
^

So Dean Armitage Robinson, Study of

I

the Gospels, pp.

venture to refer to the Expository Times,

vol. xii, pp.

69

f.

72

ff.

and 139.

it

is

Indications of Sources

io8

Pt.

was used by the two Evangelists independently, and not

by either of them through the other as an intermediary
source, is not much lower, and is now very widely recognized.

The only

means of arriving at sound conclusions as

to the nature and extent of the unfortunately non-existent
Q is to collect and examine such passages ^ as are found in
sure

Matthew and Luke

only,

and are

sufficiently parallel to give

reasonable ground for supposing that they are drawn from

same original. I give such a list here, though not with

the

any
For
the

of positiveness or even of self-consistency.

rather larger than the list which was offered in
edition of this book, but considerably smaller than

feeling
it

is

first

another which

am

printing elsewhere,^

my

object there

being to give every exclusively Matthaeo-Lucan parallel,

however unlikely some of them may be to have had
a

common

written origin.

making, some such

work as to Q.
Mt

iii.

7-10

list,

that

But it is only^ by using, or

we can advance beyond guess-

Source used by Matthew and Luke

109

no

Indications of Sources

Pt. ii

there are comph'cations caused

In the passages marked
of
doublets
the
existence
by
(also in Mt x. 26 = Lk xii. 2,

though not
If

Mt

in

xvi.

the rest of the passage combined with them).

2, 3 and xxi. 44 had not been omitted as

almost certainly spurious, the parallels to them would have

been Lk xii. 54-6 (?) and xx. 18 respectively.
In the above

of passages from

list

Matthew there are

contained 188 verses and 6 parts of others; putting these

together we may i;eckon them as about 191 verses, or rather

more than one-sixth of the 1,068 verses of Matthew.

From Luke are drawn 179 verses and 4 parts of verses,
which similarly we may reckon together as 181 verses,
being less than one-sixth of the 1,149 verses of Luke. If

we were

to

include,

as
^

many would

do, the partially

Son
corresponding parables
and the Great Supper (Mt xxii. i-io, Lk xiv. 15-24), and
of the Talents and the Pounds (Mt xxv. 14-30, Lk xix.
11-27), there would be an addition of (10+ 17 =) 27 verses
of the Marriage of the King's

in

each case, raising the numbers

in

Luke

in

Matthew

to ai8 and

to 208.

But such reckoning by verses is of course rough and unsatisfactory and it is better to regard the above parallels
;

as seventy-four separate or separable passages.

Fifty-six
of these, or more than two-thirds, are more or less differ-

ently placed in the

in the

two Gospels, and are therefore marked

list.

Passages which seemed at all likfely to have been derived

from Mark were excluded from the list. But of course it
quite possible, and

is

It

seemed

to

me on

it

has been suggested

in

the preceding

the whole that these partial correspondences were

not sufficient to outweigh the differences of occasion and object in these

Parables, so I have placed them in the lists of passages peculiar to Matthew
and Luke, with queries (?) attached to them in each case (pp. 3 and 15).
T., pp. ii8-a6) relegates them to
the imperfect parallel in Mt xxi. 32 and Lk

Harnack {Sayings of Jesus, E.

Appendix,
29, 30.

in

company with

an
vii.

Source used by Matthew and Luke

some of the sayings omitted on that ground

may have been handed down in variant forms through
Mark and Q independently of one another. If this is
Section, that

thought to be fairly probable, the following passages might

be ranked as drawn from Q or Logia Mt v. 13 = Lk xiv.
:

34

f.

Mt

Mt

XXV.

= Lk

V.

15

29

= Lk

xi.

xix.

(?)

'>,->,

26

Mt

and

v.

32

= Lk

xvi.

some

perhaps

mentioned above among the doublets, as Mt x. 39

Mt xxiii. 11 = Lk xxii. 26 (?) (pp. 87, 91).

18

others

xvii.

'>,'y,\

Again, in two cases some details introductory to sayings

have been excluded as due to Luke (Lk vii. 3, 4, 5, and
20, 21)

and

but on the other hand they

their omission

may have been

by Matthew may be owing

in

Q,

to his habit

of shortening narratives (pp. 158 ff.).

For those and other reasons exactness and completeness
are by no means claimed for the above list.
It contains
a speculative element which, it is hoped, has been absent
from the previous tables in this book, and the compiler of
it has had to use his own discretion on several
points as to

which there can be no certainty in the present state of our

knowledge. But, such as it is, it may be offered for use
at least tentatively and in the

of a working hypothesis.
the
supplies
following intimations, or
^
at least suggestions, as to the contents of

And

if it is

so used

way

it

and

it is an
important if the whole of Q was
with
the
homogeneous
parts that have been preserved for
(i)

us in

If

Matthew and Luke,

it

consisted almost exclusively of

sayings of Jesus, introduced, when necessary, by explanations of the occasions on which they were spoken.
This
description does not cover the first two passages, which
contain records of the Baptist's teaching.
These, however,
may have been prefixed in order to explain and account
for the

subsequent references to the Baptist

in

The general probabilities as to

are very clearly
Julicher, Jntrod. to N. T., E. T., pp. 354-60.
^

the sayings

summed up by

Indications of Sources

112
of Jesus

(Mt

xi.

3-19, perhaps

also

Ptii

xxi.

31

f.,

and

parallels).^

Sayings belonging to the period of the Passiondo not seem to have been included in Q. The
only reference to that period in the above list is Lk xxii.
and in that case the few words identical in both
28, 30
(ii)

narrative

Gospels seem to be better placed in Mt xix. 28.

With the one important exception of the general
(iii)
arrangement of the Sermons on the Mount (Mt v-vii) and

on the Level Place (Lk vi. 20 ff.) the two compilers, or at

any rate one of them, did not regard the sayings in Q as

placed in chronological order or at least they, or he, did

not attach importance to the order in which they found

them.

This appears from the

fact,

already mentioned, that

more than two-thirds of the passages are placed more or

less differently by Matthew and Luke.
we agree to exclude, as above, the two pairs of
(iv) If
in
Mt xxii. i-io, Lk xiv. 15-24, and in Mt xxv.
parables
14-30 and Lk xix. 11-27 from Q, we find in it no parables
of any considerable length. We must attribute to it, however, the brief parables of the Lost Sheep and of the Leaven
(and not improbably of the Mustard Seed also), besides
many which we may call similitudes rather than parables.

The very

interesting

and important, but unsolved and

probably insoluble inquiry as to whether the First or the

Third Gospel is the more exact and faithful representative

to us of Q cannot be entered upon here. To use Wellhausen's words,

'

Die Frage, ob

bei

Matthaus oder

bei

Lukas

ursprijnglicher erhalten sei, lasst sich nicht rund

beantworten.' ^
Harnack, who discusses the matter very
^

But there are also some reasons

for thinking that these records of the

Baptist's teaching may not be drawn from Q, but may have belonged to the
original tradition generally used in our Second Gospel, though omitted from
it

in this particular case.

So Woods

in

Studia Bibltca,

in Enc. Brit., xxix. 41.

'
Einleitung in die drei ersten Evangelien, p. 67

ii.

85,

94

Stanton

see his following pages.

Source used by Matthew and Luke

113

thoroughly, gives the preference to Matthew, though regarding most of Luke's alterations as merely stylistic.^

The relative priority of the two great sources of the First

and Third Gospels is another moot point Wellhausen ^
"
regards Mark, Harnack regards Q as the older. Sir W. M.
;

thinks so highly of the antiquity of

that he
considers it likely to have been written while Christ was

Ramsay

'

still

living

If,

'.

was above shown, the source which forms the

as

subject of this Section supplies about one-sixth of each of

the Gospels in which it is used, it might reasonably have

been expected that words and expressions characteristic of
that source could be found and noticed, in the way that
characteristics of the Priestly

Code have been observed

in

the composite Hexateuch.^ But it seems to me that such

with the exception of
linguistic evidence is wanting here
words which are required by the special subject-matter, a
:

renewed examination has failed to produce any expressions

which I could definitely label as characteristic of Q.*' This
failure

but

it

does not, of course, disprove the use of O as a source;

does strongly support the view, which the tables on

Matthew and Luke,

worked over the sources they

pp. 4-8, 16-23 suggested, that both

and especially Luke, have so

'

'

that their Gospels frequently represent to us the

substance rather than the words of the original documents.

employed

See Spriiche und Reden Jesu, translated as The Sayings of Jesus, pp. i-

x^b passim, especially

^

Op.

cit.,

pp. 73

Luke

ff.,

12-15.
^

especially 87.

Op.

cit.,

pp. 193

In his

See Carpenter and Harford-Battersby's He.xateuch,

ff.

(E. T.).

the Physician, Ifc, p. 89.

vol. i, pp. 61 ff.,

Driver's Genesis, pp. vi ff. of Introduction.
Harnack writes similarly as to the vocabulary {pp. cit., pp. 146, 152) ;
but he finds 'a certain unity of grammatical and stylistic colouring' in the

183

ff.

''

passages which he assigns

to

(pp. 162

f.).

PART

III

Further Statistics and Observations bearing on

THE Origin and Composition of each Gospel

ON THE GOSPEL OF

A.
It

certainly

simplest
I

MARK.

take this Gospel first, as being almost

earliest in date and quite certainly the

well

is

ST.

to

the

in structure.

propose to examine the portions of Mark which are not

found

in

Matthew

or

Luke}

Though numerous, they

are

most cases very brief, the chief exceptions to this brevity

viii. 32-6, and the
being the two miracles in vii. 33-7
in

in iv.

parable

What
even

in

26-9,

gives interest and

minute

their

importance to these portions,

details,

is

the theory,

now very

generally held, that a source corresponding on the whole

with our present Gospel of St.. Mark was used by the other
two Synoptists as a basis or Grundschrift, to which they
added introductions, insertions and conclusions derived from

For English readers

other sources.

this

view

is

clearly

explained and effectively supported by Mr. F. H. Woods

^
^
in Stndia Biblica
seem to me to lead
his arguments
:

In English they are brought together, in a way very convenient for

reference, in the left-hand column of The Common Tradition of the Synoptic
in Greek they can be
Gospels, by Abbott and Rushbrooke (London, 1884)
most easily collected by taking note of the ordinary type in the first
column of Rushbrooke's Synopticon.
Vol. ii (Oxford, 1890). The same view is well expressed and illustrated
by Jillicher, Introd. to N. T., E. T., pp. 348 ff.
'
The most simple and impressive of them rests on the fact that the
order of the whole of St. Mark, except of course what is peculiar to that
Gospel, is confirmed either by St. Matthew or St. Luke, and the greater
;

''

'

part of

and

in

it

Mt

by both'
xi. 10,

The different placing of a quotation in

27 can hardly be called an exception.

(p. 61).

Lk

xi.

Mk

i.

pt. III.

Mark^s Gospel

S/.

the result which he thus expresses,

to

irresistibly

conclude, therefore, that the

all

the three

St.

Mark

concerned

But

115

common

as far

as

is

substantially

matter, general form,

We

upon which

tradition

Synoptics were based

'

and order

our
are

'

(p. 94).

may now

(1909) be called
a practically certain result of modern study of the 'Synoptic
Problem ', at once suggests a further question. What is
this

conclusion, which

the account to be given of the Marcan matter which neither

Matthew nor Luke has incorporated, and which therefore
before us as peculiar to
for in two ways.
Either

lies

ignorant of

it,

because

it

Mark ?
{a)

might be accounted
Matthew and Luke were
It

was added to the Marcan source

at a time later than the date or dates at which they used

was before them, but was omitted or altered

them
when they transferred the other Marcan
by

or

it;

it

{Jb)

either

matter to their Gospels, or

in the

course of the subsequent

use of those Gospels. In other words, did those compilers

use an Ur-Marcus (to use the brief convenient German
name for an original and probably shorter Mark which was
altered

and supplemented by a

later editor), or did

they

use a source closely corresponding with our present Gospel

of St. Mark ?

As

a contribution towards the

study of
together and classify

this question,

the Marcan
bring
far
so
see
how
that
we
they are such
may
peculiarities,
The stronger
as would be likely to be omitted or altered.

propose

to

and the larger the number of instances

extends, the greater will be the weight of

such likelihood
to which

it

is,

evidence against the suggestion of an Ur-Marcus. For

indeed it is only a suggestion to account for the phenomena
which we are now considering there is no external support
:

for
^

it

in the

words of Papias,^

think,

it is thought that his phrase ob

arrangement of materials than we find

Unless, indeed,

less orderly

nor,

is

fxiyroi

there

any

ra^d implies a

in this Gospel.

But,

ii6

Statistics

and Observations

Pt. in.

the signs of compilation which

some students believe they can detect even in this Gospel.
Of such signs the most remarkable is perhaps that on which
internal evidence for

Wendt

has laid

it

in

the apparent resumption in

xii. 13 of the narrative in iii. 6 about the Pharisees and
Herodians. This may imply a collection of replies made
stress.,

viz.

by Jesus to questions and objections, of which Mark was

making use, and from which he broke off in iii. 6 to return
to

it

in xii. 13.

various materials

And a good case

may be made as

arrangement of
to chapter iv, and still

for the

and again as to chapter xiii, where

of
the
insertion of several verses from
Colani's suggestion

more as

to chapter ix,^

a presumably Jewish apocalypse has

met with acceptance

many quarters.^ But such compilation must have been

prior to that use of Mark by Matthew and Luke which the
in

hypothesis before us involves.^

In referring to the Marcan peculiarities

it

will

be best to

begin with those which have most to do with the substance

of the narrative, and from them to pass on to those which
are mainly or entirely linguistic.

As

an introduction to Section

remarks of Dr. A. B. Bruce on

I,

this

and B,

quote some

Gospel
:

'

It contains

even in that case, the re-arrangement must have taken place before the
time to which our hypothesis refers.
1
'^

See his Teaching of Jesus, E. T., i. 21.

See especially Schmiedel in Enc. Bibl.,

ii.

1864

ff.

Wendt, Teaching of Jesus, E. T., ii. 278, 358, 366,

where he summarizes what he had said more fully in the untranslated part
See, for instance,

of his work, Lehre Jesu i. 10 ff.; and Charles, Eschalology (1899), pp. 323-9.
'
'
verses generally regarded as insertions from the little Apocalypse
are Mk xiii. 7, 8, 14-20, 24-7, 30, 31, and the parallels in Mt and Lk.

The

Might not Mark himself after Peter's death have been the person who
re-arranged (perhaps not always very carefully' or skilfully) the groups of
reminiscences which he had taken down from the lips of Peter in earlier
years ? This would help to reconcile the impression given by Papias (see
*

above, p. xiii) with the express statement of Irenaeus(//a^r. iii. i) that it was
'
after the death of Peter and Paul that Mark handed down to us in writing
what Peter used to preach '. These and other patristic traditions relating
to the

and

Second Gospel are brought together by Scott-Moncreiff,

the Triple Tradition, pp. 100-8.

St.

Mark

Pt. III.

Mark^s Gospel

St.

117

unmistakable internal marks of a relatively early date.

These marks are such as to suggest an eye and ear witness
as the source of

barrassed

by

many

and a narrator unem-

narratives,

This feeling we know does come

reverence.

men whose

into play in biographical delineations of

charac-

have become invested with sacredness, and its influence

grows with time. The high esteem in which they are held
ters

more or

humble

and tone down

facts

'

of

and begets a tendency

less controls biographers,

to leave out

pronounced individuality

traits indicative

With Open Face,

SFXTION

p. 25).

PASSAGES WHICH MAY HAVE BEEN OMITTED OR ALTERED

AS BEING LIABLE TO BE MISUNDERSTOOD, OR TO GIVE
OFFENCE, OR TO SUGGEST DIFFICULTIES^
A.

Passages seeming
Christ, or

unworthy

{b)

of,

to limit the

{a)

to be otherwise

of Jesus

power

derogatory

or

to,

Him.
{a)

I,

and
32, 34
They brought unto him all that were sick
he healed many that were sick', compared with Mt viii. i6 'He
healed a// that were sick ', and Lk iv. 40 He laid his hands on
every one of them and healed them '. Here Mark's description might
]Mk

'

i.

'

be thought to imply what Paley

where out of a great number of

Mk

in

iii.

10

'

many

',

calls

'tentative miracles;

trials,

some succeeded

compared with Mt

xii.

15

Lk

'?

vi.

19

that

So

is,

also

'all

'.

2.

Mk

'

other boats
might be wondered how the
did
not mean to
Mark
however
weathered the storm. (Perhaps
'

iv.

36

it

imply that these also crossed the

^

lake.)

Cf. Dr. Abbott's art. Gospels in Enc. Brit., x. 802,

these instances were taken.

^

Evidences of Christianity, Part

I,

prop,

ii,

chap.

i.

from which several of

ii8

and Observations

Statistics

Pt. in.

3-

Mk

vi.

'He could

(f'Svmro) there do
He did not
xiii. 58

compared with Mt

no mighty work, save, &c.',

many mighty works there

(Perhaps too the omission by Mt of

24 containing the words ovk TjBvvaa-dr) Xaddv
be due to the desire not to suggest inability of any kind.

because of

also

Compare

unbelief.

their

Mk

the sentence in

may

'

Mk

vii.

45

i.

{ftr,KiTi

BvvaaOai) with

Lk

v.

16.)

4-

Mk vii.
ix.

Jn

32-7

means of healing

(cf,

also

And

6).

the words

the use of spittle as a

'

rat TTvevfiaTi

perhaps painful effort might seem to be implied in

looking up to heaven he sighed '. (Compare duaartva^as
avroii in Mk viii. 12, Omitted in Mt xvi.
2.)
5-

Mk

22-6:

viii.

and the cure

is

in this miracle also spittle

is

used as a means

;^

represented as gradual.'^
6.

Mk

xi. 20
the statement that the withering of the fig-tree was
not noticed until the next morning might be dropped as obscuring
the signal character of the miracle.
Cf. Mt xxi. 19 and 20 irapa:

xpwa1-

Mk XV.

44, 45 a

'

Pilate marvelled

might have been thought

It

if

he were already dead, &c.'

at least needless to introduce this

question into ordinary teaching.

I.

Mk

i.

Thou

'

art

my

beloved Son, &c.', said to Jesus

public honour seems to be done to

cerning Him,
^

'

This

These two are

is

my

Him

more

by the proclamation con-

beloved Son, &c.' in

Mt

iii.

7.

Luke

'

the only cases in the Synoptic Gospels in which Jesus

employs any other means than the laying on of hands (Gould, Contm. on
Mark, p. 149). The Apostles are said to have anointed with oil many that
'

'

were

sick' in

"^

Similarly,

Mk

cf. James v. 14.

vi. 13
the cure of the lunatic boy in

gradual than in Mt
on the omission of

xvii.

Mk

i.

18 or

Lk

ix. 42.

23-8 by Mt.

And

Mk

ix.

20-7 appears more

see Allen, St. Matt., p. xxxiii,

SL Mark^s

however follows Mark.

to

made

have been

Gospel

119

the revelation said in

(Compare

John

i.

33

to the Baptist at this lime.)

2.

Mk

i,

The

'

him

driveth

spirit

forth (e\/3aXXfi)

Matthew and Luke express

words av^x^t] and ^yero.

surprising that
forcible

this

'
:

it

not

is

guidance by the

less

3.

Mk

With anger

'

iii.

Matthew and Luke omit

'.

this,

though the

preserves the nept^Xfyj/dfitvos which goes with it in Mark.

else in the Gospels ascribed to Jesus, except in
is
nowhere
opyfj
i.
a Western reading of
cf., however, Rev vi. 16.
41 (opyiaBfis)
latter (vi. 10)

Mk

4-

Mk
said,

He

'

21

iii.

His friends

beside himself

is

went out

(f'^e'o-r/;)

to lay

hold on him, for they

'}

5-

Mk

'

v. 7

God

adjure thee by

'
:

it

is

only in this one of the

three narratives that the unclean spirit dares to adjure Jesus (opKifw).
6.

Mk

'

vi.

Is not this the carpenter?'

See, however, also p. 75.

7-

Mk

He would

There
passed by them '.
to
that
taken
mean
He
did
not
being
or
to
them.
intend,
wish,
help
'

vi.

48

might have been fear of

have

(^'^fXei')

this

'

8.

Mk
God
'

'.

Why

Full well (caXcos) do ye reject the commandment of

This irony is replaced in Mt xv. 3 by the graver question,
do ye also transgress the commandment
?
'

vii.

'

9-

Mk

'

He was moved

with indignation [riyavaKTi^crfu) '.

Elsewhere this verb always implies more or less blameworthy anger,
Mt XX. 24; xxi. 15; xxvi. 8
x. 41 ; xiv. 4;- Lk xiii. 14.
X.

14

&c.,

The reading
is

in

D*

Mk

i^iararai avrovs, ab dff^ iq exentiat (exsentiat) eos,

to avoid the difficulty.

probably an attempt

I20

and Observations

Statistics

pt. in.

lO.

Mk

18

X. 17,

appear in

Mt

Good Master' and

'

xix. 16, 17 as

concerning that which

Mk

Why

callest

Master' and

'Why

'

is

good

thou

me good?'
me

askest thou

But Luke follows Mark.

This
3 'Straightway he will send him back hither'.
might seem, and has seemed (see Dr. A. B. Bruce in loc, and
Speaker's Comm.), to detract from the dignity of the request, and
from the importance of the impression made by it ; ^ hence perhaps
the

xi.

'

it to
straightway he (the owner) will send them ', in
as
in
also
the
received text even of Mark. See also p. 70.
3,

change of

Mt xxi.

Mk

xi.

'

For

13

it

was not the season of

figs

This may have

'.

seemed, and has seemed to some, to imply an unjustifiable, or

least

may perhaps compare (davfiaa-fv

cf. Mt viii. 10
Lk vii. 9).

(but

in

Mk

vi. 6,

omitted in

Mt

at

We

ignorant, expectation and consequent disappointment.

xiii.

58

13-

Mk xii.

32

Of

been omitted

after

'

a truth, Master, thou hast well said, &c.'

it has
been suggested that these words of the scribe may have seemed to
a later editor somewhat patronizing ', and may therefore have
:

'

Mt

xxii.

40 (Allen

in loc).

14.

Mk

xiv.

'

Where

'

is

my guest-chamber

This

may have

seemed a harshly expressed claim, and therefore the nov may have
been omitted from Lk xxii. 1 1 which is otherwise identical with

Mark (Matthew

has no parallel clause, but

also dropped out from the received text of

Mk

xiv,

'

58

We

heard him say,

I will

This, though only an accusation by the

'

cf.

xxvi. 18).

It

has

Mark.

destroy this temple, &c.'

false witnesses (cf. John
'

* '
It certainly weakens the miraculous impression produced by the predicted success of the demand when we learn that no more was asked for

than a loan with the promise of immediate return' (Salmon,

tM the Gospels, p. 435).

Human Eletnent

St Mark^s

ii.

19),

may have appeared

have

sibly to

softened into

(There

no

is

'

am

be an unfulfilled prophecy, or poshostihty, and may therefore have been

to

Jewish

justified

able to destroy the temple of

parallel in

121

Gospel

God

',

Mt

xxvi. 6i.

Luke.)

Passages seeming to disparage the attainments or

B.

character of the Apostles.'

I.

Mk

iv. 13 'Know ye not this parable ? and how shall ye know

'
This reference to dullness in the disciples themthe parables ?

all

selves

found only in Mark.

is

2.

Mk

Carest thou not that we perish?' seems more exwe perish' of Mt viii. 25, or

'

iv.

38

pressive of distrust than the 'Save,

Lk

We

'

the

X.

40

Mk

V.

'

perish
;

of

Lk

viii.

(Compare

24.

the use of ov fieXd in

x. 13.)

Jn

3-

And

'

Who touched me

'

This quesomitted by Matthew and Luke (but implied in Lk viii. 46), may
have been thought disrespectful from the disciples to their Master.
3

sayest thou,

tion,

4-

Mk

vi.

51

i,

52

'And

they were sore amazed

in

themselves, for

^
concerning the loaves, but their heart was
they understood not
hardened '.^ There is no parallel to this in Matthew (cf., however,

his record of the

is

wanting here.

Luke

is

weakness of Peter's

(To Mk

wanting here

vii.

Luke
28-33),
a parallel in Mt xv. 16;

faith in xiv.

18 there

is

also.)
5-

Mk
^

viii.

Those

17, 18

who

Have ye your

'

heart hardened

had come, or were coming,

to regard the

Having

eyes,

Twelve as 'founda-

'

of the Church (Rev xxi. 14) would be far more likely to soften or
leave out than to strengthen or insert such passages.
It has been noticed
that Luke especially spares the Twelve
see Bruce in Expositor's Greek
tions

'

'

below.
46 f.,
^
With Matthew's omission of ov aw^Kav here, compare his insertions of
Tore awfJKav in xvi. 12, xvii. r3.
^
Or rather blinded ', which seems to be the better rendering oi nwpovv,
See Dean Armitage Robinson, Comm. on Eph., p. 266. As he
nwpQiais.
" hardness"
says,
suggests a wilful obstinacy, which would scarcely be in
referring to

i.

Test.,

Schanz.

Cf. p. 197

'

'

place in

'

either of these

two sayings.

122

and

Statistics

see ye not

and having

Observations

hear ye not ?
Matthew's version of the rebuke (xvi. 8-11).

in

'

ears,

Pt. iii.

This

is

omitted

Luke

is

wanting

here.
6.

Mk ix.
Lk

in

ix.

'

38

'

49

We forbade

'

him, because he followed not us becomes

because he followeth not with us ', which involves less

claim to personal authority on the part of the speaker

(John).
Matthew omits the incident.
7-

Mk
Mt
it

35 here the sons of Zebedee themselves make, but in

XX. 20 their mother makes, the ambitious request.
Luke omits
X.

altogether.

C.

Other passages which might cause offence or

difficulty.

I.

Mk

(WH mg

ii.
23 o^ov TToidv
not necessarily (see Judg

obonoifiv).

xvii. 8)

meaning

This phrase, though

that they broke a

new

path through the standing corn, might be taken to imply that they
did so.^
2.

Mk

'When

Abiathar was high priest '.

omitted on account of the historical difficulty
p.

ii.

26

131 on

the Proper

Names

This was probably

:

see,

however, also

in this Gospel.

3.

Mk

The sabbath was made

'

ii.

sabbath

27

This

'.

Christians,^

may
and may

man, and not man

for

for the

'

'

perhaps have been a hard saying for Jewish

therefore have dropped out of use, though

it forms a
step in the argument, which is not the case with
the words substituted in Mt xii. 6, 7.
In Luke there is nothing

here

substituted, but a break

seems

to be implied (vi. 5).

4-

Mk

'.

But

guilty of an eternal sin ', an expression so

deeper than the usual idea of punishment,

is

29
mysterious and so much
that AfiapTrjixaTos has been altered into Kpiaeai in the received
iii.

'

'^

See
Cf.

Field's A'otes

Rom

xiv. 5

f.

on Transl. o/N. T. in loc.

Gal iv. 10 ; Col ii. 16 f.

(p. 25).

text.

SL Mark^s

And

a similar account

123

probably be given of the omission of

32 and Lk xii. 10.^

may

Mt

the whole clause in

Gospel

xii.

5-

Mk
For

iv.

this

'

Mt

That

(cfa)

seeing they
'

14 has the easier

xiii.

may

see,

and not perceive, &c.'

Luke however

because (on)

'.

follows Mark.
6.

Mk

26-9

iv.

the Parable of the Seed

Growing

fulness in missionary and pastoral

work

Might
and watch-

Secretly,

there not have been fear of this discouraging activity

See End. Bibl.,

ii.

1863.

7-

Mk

viii.

31

ix.

passages Matthew
xviii.

31

'

x.

34

xvii.

21;

(xvi.

In the parallel

After three days'.

23;

33, there being no parallel to

19) and Luke

xx.

Mk

ix.

(ix.

22;

31) substitute 'on the

'

;
probably because the exactness of the prophecy would
not otherwise be evident to persons unaccustomed to the Jewish

third

day

method of computation

Mt

xxvii. 63,

Mk
ment

64

'

viii.

32

for {a)

cf

(see e. g.

Hos

vi.

And he spake

Gen

xlii.

Ki

xii. 5,

12

2)."^

the saying openly

means

if

17, 18

'.

A difficult

and unreservedly,

state-

it

napprjaia
plainly
might
be thought strange that the resurrection should have been so unexand [d) if it means that the announcement
pected when it occurred
;

was made

'

the disciples
this seems most unlikely
and indeed inconsistent with verse 34, which speaks

to others besides

at this period,

',

of the multitude as not being

had been

Mk

viii.

omitted

summoned

until after this prediction

gfiven.

38

as

In

'

this

seeming
'

against being

adulterous and sinful generation might be

to narrow the application of the warning

ashamed of

Christ.

Mk ix. 49 For every one shall

which the Western text makes an addition (from
',
Lev ii. 13) which seems to have been meant as explanatory, and which
afterwards became part of the Syrian text.
"
For other cases see Field, op. cit., p. 13.
^

Compare

the case of the obscure verse

be salted with

fire

to

'

'

'

Statistics

124

Mk ix.
how

'

13

Even

as

is

it

and Observations

Mk

'

ix.

amazed

15

'.
It is by no means clear
had been written of. Matthew
'

by dropping the words.

when

All the multitude,

they saw him, were greatly

what could have been the special

time, for any outward radiance result-

difficult to see

It is

very
cause of the amazement
'.

written of him

the ill-treatment of the Baptist

avoids the difficulty

Pt. in.

at this

ing from the Transfiguration is most unlikely

is omitted by Matthew and Luke.

and the statement

12.

Mk

22 b-2^

ix.

The

'

thou canst do anything

If

Help thou mine

prayer was granted, notwithof

have seemed to imply the
these
confessions
doubt,
may
standing
acceptance of a lower standard of faith than the Church usually
unbelief.

required

fact that the father's

hence perhaps the omission of

this dialogue.

13-

Mk ix.
but the

'

31

of man

The Son

/xeXXft Trapahihoadai

and more obvious.

iyoi /LteXXto nlveiv in

of

is

delivered

Mt

xvii.

22

up '. A prophetic present:

and Lk ix. 44 is clearer

(Similarly the o iya> irivw of

Mt

Mk x.

38 becomes

XX. 2 2.)
14.

Mk

39*5 'There is no man which

name, and be able quickly to speak

do a mighty woik
me '. This might
my
seem to be inconsistent with the teaching of Mt vii. 21-3; and on
that account the words might have been omitted by Luke, and the
whole incident by Matthew.

in

ix.

shall

evil

of

15-

In

Mt

vineyard

8 the killing is said to be before the casting out of the

the interpretation of the parable becomes easier if these

xii.
;

acts are transposed, as

is

done

in

Mt

xxi.

39; Lkxx.

15.

16.

Mk

XV.

45

this narrative

likely to

nrafin.
:

Matthew, Luke, and John use only aafia in

was a word

see Swete's note, showing that nrmfjia

be avoided here by Christians (as indeed

it

is

in the re-

Mark^s Gospel

Si.

125

ceived text even of Mark), because when employed for the dead
body of a human being it carries a tone of contempt '.
'

17-

Mk

XV. 2 5

'

It

was the

Speaker's

hour

'

for proofs that this note of

alone gives, has caused difficulties, see e. g.

Mark
Comm. in

time, which

third

loc.

SECTION

II

ENLARGEMENTS OF THE NARRATIVE, WHICH ADD NOTHING

TO THE INFORMATION CONVEYED BY IT, BECAUSE
THEY ARE EXPRESSED AGAIN, OR ARE DIRECTLY
INVOLVED, IN THE CONTEXT
have been well named 'context-supplements ', are very numerous in Mark, especially in the earlier
They occur both in the actual narrative and in
chapters.
These, which

sayings which

it

The

embodies.

nature of them

understood from the following two specimens

may

be

Mark

alone says that 'John's disciples and

the Pharisees were fasting
but this fact is again
stated in the question put to Jesus in 18 <^, which is

In

{a)

ii.

18 a

'

also recorded in substance in

In XV. 24

(p)

Mark

lots the

words

but this

is

of

all

'

Mt

ix.

14

Lk

v.

'3^'^.

alone adds to the mention of casting

upon them, which each should take
'

of course involved in the previous statement

three Synoptists that they parted his garments
*

among them,

casting lots

'.

do not propose to print a list of such repetitions and

amplifications, for it would be necessary in many cases to
I

them a lengthy context, without which it could

not be seen that they add nothing to the narrative.
But

print with

instances,

more

or less distinct and characteristic,

found and examined

more than a hundred:

in

may be

the following verses, numbering

Mk

i.

4, 7, 13, 16,

17,19,20, 21,28,

126
34,

Statistics

43*

30, 31

ii.

I,

2t, 8, 9, 15!, i6t, i8t, 19!

iv. I, 2, 7, 8, 15,

19, 30, 21, 22, 34, 38, 40,

54,

55

15, 27

vii. 2,

8* 13,

ix. 2, 8

xii. 2, 14,

2it,

and Observations

42

iii-

vi. 2, 4, 17. 29,

14, 15, 18,

x. 27, 32, '^6,

52

v. i, 15, 17,

35, 44, 50, Si,

25!

xi. 2, 4, 6,

20; xiv.

8, 13, 17, 28,

;

19, 21, 23,

xiii. 2, 19,

4it,43t;

32, 37, 39

r6, 24, 31,

Pt. in.

viii.

if,

27, 28

15,

4, 5, 7, 11, 15,

66 XV. 22, 24t, 25, 34.

In the two cases marked * the whole verse may be called

16, 17, 20, 43, 45, 57,

a context-supplement, and so may perhaps also iii. 30 the

mark f has been added to a few other instances, which,
:

with those marked

instructive

*,

may

and interesting

A few of the passages

among

Now

be considered

as the

first

most

cases.

here referred to are also included

the 'duplicate expressions' on pp. 139 ff. below.

in a simple and
original narrative, written or

dictated by, or directly derived from an eyewitness, such

and expatiations might very naturally occur

indeed
be due to that special determination to
they may
omit nothing which Papias attributes to Mark as the

repetitions

'

'

'

interpreter of Peter

'.

And

them

the omission of

after-

wards, either in the compilation of a manuscript record or

in the course of oral teaching,

But what possible cause

for

is

the

also natural

insertion

and

likely.

of them

by

can be assigned, except a mere wish to

extend the size of the narrative, without adding to its
a

editor

later

And surely such a wish is inconceivable

times and circumstances of the composition of the

substance?
in the

Gospels.^

Of course

there has been no intention of denying in this Section that

any 'context-supplements' peculiar to Matthew and to Luke
Lk vi. 8 viii. 27, 53) but they
respectively (see e.g. Mt xiv. i6; xv. 20
are certainly very few in comparison with those in Mark.
'

there are

St.

111

Mark''s Gospel

SECTION

127

III

MINOR ADDITIONS TO THE NARRATIVE

use the word

'

minor

'

now

of the Marcan additions

referred to, in order to denote this characteristic of them,

that

though

they

add

fullness

to

the

and

narrative,

though they are almost always more or less graphic and

picturesque and lifelike, they are not such as would seem

who had to teach the elements of

far
as we can judge from our earliest
So
Christianity.
records, the memoirs of the Apostles were chiefly drawn

important to those

'

'

'

purposes of (i) exhibiting 'Jesus of Nazareth

as approved of God by mighty works and wonders and
signs' (Acts ii. 23), and (ii) of supplying accounts of His

upon

for the

teaching, especially on moral subjects (see e.g.

Rom

xii

James iv Clem. Rom. xiii Ep. Polycarp ii Didache x)}

There would be no materials available for these purposes,
nor again for the proofs of the Messiahship of Jesus drawn
;

prophecy for Jewish hearers, nor again for the

Creed which soon began to grow out of the

from

articles of the

baptismal confession of faith, in the very great majority of

these Marcan augmentations.

The

them

was gathered together at the door',

spake to his disciples that a little boat should wait on
him because of the crowd, lest they should throng him '?
34 'Looking round on them which sat round about him',
35 When even was come

i.

33

ill.

iii.

following are characteristic specimens of

'

All the city

'

He

'

iv.

'.

'

iv.

38

In the stern ... on the cushion

'.

^
And so Irenaeus says that he had heard Polycarp relate what he had
heard from eyewitnesses of the Lord -ntpi -rthv Svudf^eaii' avrov kou irfpl rfji
StSafT/caXms.
Eus., H. E., V. xx, quoting Irenaeus' Epistle to Florinus.
^
How natural that Peter should recall this precaution, and that therefore Mark should write it down
yet how likely that other teachers and
writers should omit it, since it appears that after all there was no recourse
:

to the boat

on

this occasion (cf. v. 13

'

he goeth up into the mountain

')

128

Statistics arid Observations

*

viii.

in the boat with them more than one loaf,

him
in
his arms '.
Taking
He, casting away his garment, sprang up

'

36

X.

50

'

'.

And

others

may be examined

19, 20, 29, 41

i.

vi.

32;

27,
viii.

They had not

14

ix.

in.

Pt.

^^

23,46,49;

xiv. 3, 40, 41, 44,

Here

iii.

54

in the following verses

^'i,

v.

32;

19, 20, 23,

21, 23, 25, 27, 31,

II, 12, 27, 32,

17, 21, 22,

15;

ii.

ix. 3, 14, 15, 16, 26, 34,

xi. 4,

11,30;

XV.

21, 31, 32.^

8,

vii.

xii.

35

24,
X.

35,41,43;

19, 21,

3, 6,

38, 40, ^6',

25;

1,

16,

xiii-

3?

again, as in the previous Section, the consideration

of such passages seems to

strong impression

me

mind a very

to leave on the

favour of their having been dropped

presumably had in view the needs of

in

by compilers who

Christian teachers and learners, and against their having

been inserted by an editor of the Ur-Marcus.
But, in both classes of cases ( II and III), there may

seem
at

to be one serious objection to this view.

first

sight

extremely improbable

It

appears

Matthew and

that

Luke, even though influenced by the same motive,

adaptation of the

Marcan narrative

viz.

the

for the practical

use

of teachers, should have agreed in the omission of so very

many

phrases and details.

But

this

improbability becomes
in omission

slighter when we observe that this agreement

is by no means
complete and uniform. Our

business in

these two Sections has been to take note of words and

passages as to which

Mark

But

stands alone.

is

it

to be

remembered that there are a good many cases in

retains, while Matthew omits, both the context-supplements and the unimportant additional details
also

which Luke

'

'

of the

Marcan document.

which Matthew
^

There are also some cases

retains, while

Luke omits

Perhaps too some statements of Mark alone to the

explanations of certain sayings, &c.

were given

to the

quently and privately might come under this heading

vii.

17;

ix,

28,33;

X- lo-

in

but these are

effect

that

the

Apostles subse-

see

Mk

iv.

lo, 34

not so many,

much
and

Mark^s Gospel

St.

in

be seen

for, as will

(p. 158),

Luke

stronger tendency than

129

Matthew has a

to shorten narratives

depart from the model of Mark.

Rushbrooke's Synopticon at the passages

in this respect to

glance in
in the two

named

what has

proofs of

supply some
show
that there
said,
agreements, between Matthew

which

lists

follow, will

and

just been

are differences, as well as

will

and Luke, which must be taken into account in forming an

estimate of what the Gospel of Mark was when they used
it

Those marked * are of the nature of con-

as a source.

'

'

text-supplements
times graphic and

the rest are additional details, some-

but never religiously or morally

lifelike,

important.^

List L

Luke follows Mark m

*i. Mk
44 Lk V. 14
*2. Mk ii, 7
Lk v. 21
i.

to

iii.
'

6.

Mk
Mk
Mk

7.

Mkv.

4.

*5.

8.

iii.

41

v.

vi.

stand forth

iv.

who can

blasphemeth

Lk

for thy cleansing.'

'

'

is

in-

'

viii.

one

to another.'

the attempts to bind the demoniac.

Lk

with the withered hand called

he looked round about on them.'

:

15;

man

ihe

forgive sins, &c.' (which

').

'.

Lk vi. 10
Lk viii. 25
Lk viii. 29

'

volved in

Mk

'

3.

retaining, while Mattheiv omits:

'

35

clothed and in his right

sitting,

mind/

Mk V. 30 Lk viii. 45 Jesus
said
Who touched, &c.'
Mk X. 20 Lk xviii, 21 from my youth.'
Mk X. 30 Lk xviii, 30 'in this time ... in the world to come.'
Mk x. 47 Lk xviii. 37 of Nazareth.'
Mk x. 48 Lk xviii. 39 the more a great deal.'
Mk xi. 5, 6 Lk xix. 32-4 what do ye, loosing the colt, &c.'
Mk xiv. 13-15; Lk xxii. 10-12 the man with a pitcher of
'

'

*9.
10.
11.

*i2.
1 3.

14.

'

'

'

water, &c.

^
Compare Nestle's interesting remari<s on the evidence supplied by
textual criticism in support of his view that
the Gospel was originally
narrated in a much more vivacious style' than that in which most of our
'

present authorities present

pp. 192-6).
HAWKINS

it

to us [Textual Ciiticisnt

J^

of Greek N.

T.,

E. T.,

and Observations

Statistics

130

Mk

15.

To

XV. 21

which

Lk

26

xxiii.

'
:

'

(pp. 139
*

ii.

*i7.

ff.)

'

from the

'

viii.

list

'

'

').

'the country round about.'

Mark

day (or those days

the wind ceased.'

in that

*i8.

in

of 'duplicate expressions

Mk 20 Lk v. 35
Mk iv, 39 Lk
24
Mk vi. 36 Lk ix. 12

16.

from the country.'

be added the following taken

may

Pt. in.

List IL

Mark

Mattheiv follozvs

Mk
Mk

*i.
2.

iii.

33

iv.

Mt xii. 48
Mt xiii. i, 2

a boat and

Mk

*3.

iv.

Lk

Mk

who

'
:

is

my

Luke omits:

mother, &c.'

'by the sea side ... he entered into

sat.'

Mt

viii.

in retaining, tvhile

'

xiii.

where

it

had not much

earth.'

(Cf.

6.)

*6.

Mt ix. 18: 'lay thy hands on her, &c.'

Mkv. 28; Mt ix. 21 'For she said, If I touch but, &c.'
Mk vi. 35; Mt xiv. 15: the lateness of the hour twice

"'7.

Mk x.

V.

23

*5.

mentioned.

Mt xix. 25: 'they were astonished exceedingly

implied in their question).
'
X. 27 ; Mt xix. 26
looking upon them.'
26;

(this is
8.

Mk

Before passing on from the substance to the phraseology

of Mark, two other kinds of Marcan peculiarities may be

named, the omission of which seems much more probable

than their subsequent insertion by an editor
:

The Aramaic^

I.

or

'Talitha cumi
*

vii.

as

34.
it

v.

'

See

still

41

Corban

xiv.

36

is

iv.

6; also

and xv. 34

Matthew but not

in

('

'

vii.

11

iii.

17

'
;

Ephphatha'

perhaps not a case in point,

see
liturgical formula

seems to have been a

Golgotha ')

in

E. T.,

'

'

Lightfoot on Gal
('

Hebrew phrases 'Boanerges'

'

Abba

'

'

Rom

viii.

15.

In xv. 22

Eloi &c.') there are parallels

Luke.

Schflrer's Hist, of the Jewish People in the Time of Jesus Christ,

'
i. 9 f. on the 'complete prevalence of Aramaic ', though
Hebrew

II.

remained

in use as

" the sacred

language ".'

St Mark's Gospel
Some unimportant Proper Names,

2.

131
viz.

Alphaeus

ii.

20; Bartimaeus the son of Timaeus

14; Decapolis
Alexander and Rufus xv. 21 Salome xv. 40,
X. 46
v.

On

Boanerges

see above, and

on Abiathar

26)

(ii.

see p. 122.

SECTION IV
RUDE, HARSH, OBSCURE OR UNUSUAL WORDS OR EXPRESSIONS,

WHICH MAY THEREFORE HAVE BEEN OMITTED

OR REPLACED BY OTHERS ^
Various unusual words and constructions.

(a)

I.

Mk
LXX of

the opening of the heavens.

we have

the

10

i.

Is Ixiv. i;

(rxi(o^(vovs, a

word used nowhere

more usual and

Jn

i.

51

Ads

x.

In

Mt

iii.

suitable rjvfwx^w^^,
1 1

Rev

else in

N. T. or

Lk

i6 and

di'eo,;^^^i/a(,

21

iii.

as in

xix. 11.'

2.

Mk

i.

16

diJ.(f)i^d\\ovTas

without an accusative.

In the parallel

Mt iv, 18 liaWovras uficf)i^\r](TTpov, to which the received text in

Mark has been assimilated cf. Hab 1 7 dfx(j)i^aX('i to dfi(f)i^Xr](TTpov
i.

avTOv,
3-

Mk

i.

(Swete)

23

where Luke has the 'easier phrase'

So also in Mk v. 2, where
aKaddpTov.

(V nvfiifiari awj^apTO),

ex(ov iTVfvyia baifioviov

Matthew has

daipovi^oufvoi

and Luke has

the only two places in which ev

Ttvevfiart.

ex*"" Sai/xuvui.
is

These

are

used with reference to

evil spirits.
'

Dr. A. Wright has discussed the Proper

Names

in St. Marie

very

fully

Some New Testament

in
^

Problems, pp. 56 ff.

E. A. Abbott in Enc. Brit., x. 802, referred to in

Besides

Dean A. Robinson, Study of

edition, see

my

first

the Gospels, p. 46, especially

on

Mark's '190 short relative clauses'; and on his style generally, Jiilicher,
Introd. to N. T., E. T., pp. 324 f.; and on his Aramaisms which Matthew and
Luke may have 'pruned away', J. H. Moulton, Gram., i. 242 (quoting
also Maclean in
Wellhauseii), and Allen in Expository Times, xiii. 328 f.
Did. of Christ and the Gospels, ii. 129 ff.
^
See Abbott's remarks, From Letter to Spirit, 642, on 'the special force
about Mark here.
;

'

Statistics

132

and Observations

Pt. in.

4.

Mk

34 and

i.

Winer,

xi.

16

an unusual and irregular form: see

fjc^uv,

xiv. 3 {b).
5-

Mk

i.

Mk

ii.

38

Kco/i07r(5Xetj

LXX.

here only in N. T. and not in

6.

Luke by

Mk

II, 12;
55 Kpd^arroi,^ replaced in Matthew
or K\m8ioi>, but also used John 4, Acts 2.
vi.

4, 9,
kKIvt}

16 oTi= 'why'; also in

ii.

ix. 11, 28.

and

See pp. 13 and 35.

8.

Mk

21^ empdnrei, a verb found nowhere

in
Matthew and Luke by em^aXXfi.
replaced
ii.

else

in

Greek:

9-

Mk

V.

Mk

V.

Mk

vi.

23

25 6vydTpiov

vii.

here only in N. T. and not in

LXX.'

10.

23 iaxnTCiS

t)((i}

II-I4.
27 (TiTfKov\dTap, a Latin word peculiar to Mark, as also

KfVTvp'iwv XV. 39, 44,

AnL

also in Jos.
'

Marcan Latinisms
65, 66

see also ^fWjjs

viii. 2.
9).

may

satisfacere,'

45

to

be

'

The phrase in

also be added.
is

sextarius

in vii. 4

xv. 15, to iKavov

(used

noiTj(Taiz=.

But against these exclusively

set Kovarwhla

found only in

See Swete's Comm., p. xliii

;
on
of such words.
stress
the
occurrence
great
xxviii.

is

'

1 1.

f.,

Mt

xxvii.

against laying too

15-17.

Mk

vi.

39

(TvpiToaia (Tvp-TToa-ia,
'

expressions

Lk
*

X.

is

and 40

see also 8vo bvo I\Ik

vi.

Hebraistic

TTpaaiai npaaini,

(the reading dia 6vo 8vo in

doubtful).

This word is condemned by Phrynichus see Thayer's Lex., s.v.

On Mark's use of it\r)pwiia in this verse see Robinson's Ephesians,
:

p. 256.
^
Mark is thought to have a predilection for diminutives (Hastings
D. B., iii. 251) but all the other six of the seven used by him have parallel
in Matthew or in John.
*
This expression is condemned by Phrynichus see Thayer's Lex., s. v.
*
See however J. H. Moulton, Gram., i. 97.
'

Mark's Gospel

Si.

iv

133

i8.

Mk

12

viii.

ft

Sodrja-frai,

a Hebraism found here only in N. T.,

except in the citations of Ps. xciv. (xcv.)

in

1 1

Heb

iii.

iv. 3, 5.

19.

Mk

ix.

Me

ftaiv Tivfs

twv

ia-TrjKOTcov

an awkward arrangement

Matthew and Luke avoid by placing

and avTov) after tmv.

of words, which

adverbs (&8e

their respective,

20.

Mk

xi.

optative

Gram.,

14

fj.r]KfTi

had become

Kapnov

fiijBfls

cjidyot.

The

use

of

the

H. Moulton,
might here seem more like

Greek of N. T. times

rare'in the

(J.

Besides which it
and imprecation of, evil than the oh jjn^Ktri k aov Kapnos
of Mt xxi. 19, which has more of a future sense.
179, 197).

i.

a wish for,
yfvrjTai

21.

Mk
and

On

9 oTai> 6^e iyivfTo.

xi. 1

the indicative after orav, see pp.

35.

22.

Mk
is

Of these forms the first

xii. 4 eK((f)a\i(oaav or fKf(f)a\ai<oaai>.
not found elsewhere, and the second has a different meaning.

See Wright's note,

S/.

Luke,

p. 171.

23.

Mk

a verb not found elsewhere in N. T,,

/iij? npopfpipvarf,
instead of it we find p^ pfpipvr^ar^Tf in
or Classical writers
II

xiii.

LXX,
Mt X.

19,

Lk

xii,

1 1,

and

pri

npopfXerav in

Lk

xxi. 14.

24.

Mk

xiii.

locr, Blass,

and Lk
xxiv.

166 fh
Gram.,

xvii.

40).

31

is

Tov uypov.

Though

this is explicable

ec as
p. 122), the preposition

much more
we have

Similarly

siructio praegnans in

Mk xiii.

used in

(Swete

Mt

xxiv. 18

simple and obvious (so also in Mt

the contrast between another con-

e*s o-i^mytuyas 8apr](Te(T6e

and Matthew's

v Tois <Tvv, avTuv pa(TTiydiaov<nv vpas (x. ly)-

25.

Mk

19 taovrai yap al rjpepai fKflvai d\'i\l/is, an unusual expresLk xxi. 23.

sion, avoided in Mt xxiv. 21
xiii.

It is least

rare in the

Lucan books and

in the Epistles

see p. 53.

and Observations

Statistics

134

Pt. in.

26.

Mk

19 oia .. TciaiiTt] 'is perhaps unique' (Swete

loc).
does not occur in the parallel Mt xxiv. 21, nor in Dan xii. i
See, how(either LXX or Theod.) which is here being referred to.
xiii.

Toiavrt)

Gen xli. 19; and compare

Somewhat similar is Mark's ofa

Ex

24 and

xi. 6.

oinaa in the best texts of

ix. 3.

tjtis roiavrr]

ever,

in

ix.

27.

Mk

xiv.

ovTOi avTov

KaraKfifjifvov

a rather

awkward con-

currence of two genitives absolute in the same sentence, which

Matthew avoids by re-arrangement (xxvi, 6, 7).
28.

Mk

xiv.

19

fh

fls Ka6'

the exact phrase

the Pericope de Adultera (Jn

E. T., p. 138.

viii.

is

only found here and in

See Deissmann, Bible Studies,

9).

29.

Mk

xiv.

nepia-aa)!

31

sKufpiarcras is

perhaps in

Thes

found nowhere

v.

else in

Greek

{iirepfK-

13).

30-

Mk

xiv.

41

nTre'xfi:

for this impersonal use of the verb only a

single parallel (from Ps.-Anacreon)

is

quoted.

31-

Mk
only

xiv.

in

44

Mt xxvi, 48 has o-ij/iflor)

5 and not very rare elsewhere.^

ava-arjpov (for

N. T., but

LXX

which

here

32.

Mk
place

68 npoavXiov here only in N. T. and not in LXX. Its

supplied by nvKaf in Mtxxvi. 71, and Luke has no parallel.

xiv.
is

33-

Mk

xiv.

72 fm^aXoyv'. a Strange

and obscure word as used

here.

Besides the very unusual words which form the greater

'

He

Another expression condemned by Phrynichus

also

condemns pamafta used

in verse

492).
"

See Field's Notes on Transl. of N.

see Thaj'er's Lex., s.v.

65 (see Abbott, Corrections of Mark,

T. in loc.

Mark^s Gospel

St.

IV

part of the preceding

will

list, it

be seen

135
in the

Appendix

on 'The Synoptists and the Septuagint' (p. 198) that the

list of words peculiar to Mark is on the whole much less
accordant with the

LXX than the

Matthew and Luke, the

latter

of words peculiar to
most accordant of
the
being
list

LXX

But the
may be taken as representing to
us the standard of ordinary Hellenistic (or Koivr\) Greek, as
It thus appears that there was
applied to religious stibjects.
the three.

in Mark's vocabulary which would

a
probable priori that those who used his memoirs

a certain unusualness

render

it

would, intentionally or unconsciously or both, modify the

language of them by substituting more familiar or more

conventionally sacred expressions.
The relative numbers of Classical

words

the Synoptic

in

Gospels,

(p. 207), also point,

Appendix

and

shown

as

though

non-Classical

same

the

in

less decidedly, to

unusualness as a characteristic of the language of Mark.

((5)

Instances of anacoluthon, or broken or incomplete

construction, in Mark, which are altered or avoided in

Matthew or Luke or both.

These are placed together in this sub-section for comparison with

one another, as being particularly characteristic of Mark.
I.

Mk
Koi

iii.

f.

fnoirjatv tovs baSeKa

(^Koi

(nedi]K(U ovofia T(f 2ifia)vi) Uerpov,

laKafiov kt\.
2.

Mk
Km

iv.

31

f.

ois

k6kk(o

OS OTOP

fV;(drcos ex''>

aiTitpfj

fiiKpoTfpov

tiv

itavrav

orau anapij.
3-

Mk
tence

V.
is

\(ya}v oTi

23

altered in the

Western

text of

''"

The

f^^^v eniB^s.

Mark, as well

as in

Sen-

Matthew

and Luke.
4-

Mk

vi.

fvbvaaadai

8
.

tva ptfbiv aipaxnv

f.

dXXa vnobtBtptvovi

kq)

prj

and Observations

Statistics

136

Mk

xi.

Mk

xii;

19 Maijaris (ypa'^ev

Mk

Xll.

3840

32 dXX

ftrrco/iei'

pt.

in.

ii^o^ovvTO tov o}(\ov.

on

f;iiiv

iav tlvcs

tua Xd^jj.

1.
.

xtX., 01 KOTfadovTes ras

tS)v 6e\6pT(i)v iv (TToAa??

TTfpnraTf'iv Koi

omof.

No

doubt

dfXouTccp

aanaafiovs

might govem

the noun aanaa-fiovs (as in Lk v. 39; 2 Cor xi. 12) as well as the
verb nepinareiv, but the Sentence has thus a rather strange sound
which Luke's insertion of (fyiXovvrav removes. But ol KariaBovres

following the genitive t<ov BeX. is certainly an anacoluthon, which

Luke avoids by the relative pronoun and verb ot xarfadiovaip.

Mk

14 (SSeXvy/iO ttjs ipr}ixu>(T(u>s earrfKora (Mt xxiv. 1 5 faros):

apparently a consiructio ad sensum, with which may be compared

Mk
ii.

xiii.

20

ix.

Ibcjiv

(The same thought as

avTov TO TTVfvpa.

have been

may

ff.

in the writer's

in 2

Thes

mind.)

9.

Mk

xiv.

49

the ellipsis

(iXX'

tm

K\rip(o6u)cnv at

by prefixing

ypa^m, where Matthew supplies

tovto 8 oKov ylyovev instead of mXXo.

With these may be placed three other instances of imperfect conwhich do not amount to anacoluthon, but which also

struction,

disappear in Matthew and Luke

10.

Mk
verse

iii.

the repetition

of n\^6os no\v after ttoXv rrX^^o?

in

7.

II.

Mk

iv.

reading

is

fls

Tpiuxovra koi iv f^fjKovra Knl iv (Kotov:

SO

WH,

but the

very doubtful.
12.

Mk

vii.

19 KadapiCav navra ra

fiputfiaTa,

which the participle can be attached

verse 18.

is

where the nearest verb to

X/yet at the

beginning of

SL Mark^s Gospel

IV

137

13-

Mk X.
in

30 Qvhe'ii ia-Tiv os
the second clause os oix}
29,

d(j)^Kfv

the saying to nds Sans

d(f)riK(u

There are also

Mk

tav

Xuf^rj (xviii.

jj^rj

/xij

Xd^rj,

where Luke has

and Matthew

30),

alters

X^jLi\|/'fTat.

34 three
broken constructions more or less characteristic of Mark, but
there happen to be no parallel passages in which we can see

how Matthew

in

Luke

or

them, however,

Mt

cf,

26

iv.

vii.

dealt with

xxv.

2-5

xiii.

them (with the

of

last

14).

asyndeton or want of connexion.

As the word 'harsh' was used in the heading of this
Cases of

{c)

'

',

may here be called

which may well be called

section, attention

to an abruptness of

construction,

harsh, in the reports

of certain sayings in Mark, as contrasted with the reports

in

Matthew and Luke.

This arises from his use of

'

asyu-

from the absence of conjunctions or other conAn examination of the chief instances ^ of
words.
necting
deton

',

i.

e.

this difference will, I think,

that the smoother

make

Matthew and Luke were

in

and crude forms

Mk

Mk

V.

39 with

Mt

xviii.

16 Koi;

Mt

Mt

ix.

xvi. 6 koi;

xix, 24;

ore

x.

Mk

xii.

x.

Mk
'

"

versa.

21 with

Mt

^^ with

Lk

viii.

14 with

Mt
xii.

Compare
ix.

50 yap

52 yap; Mk
Mt

16

xix. 14

be,

viii.

and

15

Lk

25 with Lk xviii. 2^' yap, and cf. also

9 with Mt xxi. 40 and Lk xx. i^d
xxii. 21 ovv

and Lk xx. 25

tou-vv

25 be and

xii.

yap

iii.

ii.

more rough

Lk xx. 29 ovv;Mk
with
Mt
28
Lk
xxii.
and
xx. ^^ ovv ; Mk
23
Lk
xx.
Mk
xii.
27 with
38 8e^;
36 with Lk xx. 42
Mk xii 37 with Mt xxii. 45 and Lk xx. 44 ovv
xiii. 6 with Mt xxiv. 5 and Lk xxi. 8 ydp Mk xiii. 7
xii.

xii.

altered from the

Mk

24 and

Mk

Mk

xii.

Mk

ovv Mk
17 with Mt
Mk 20 with Mt xxii.
;

appear highly probable

Mark, and not vice

in

27 with Lk iv. '>,6

and cf also Lk v. 36
i.

with

it

and more connected forms of the sentences

owed some of them to Mr. (now Archdeacon) Allen.

Here Matthew agrees with Mark, so the contrast is only with Luke.
I

and Observations

Statistics

138

Pt.

in.

Lk xxi. 9 yap Mk xiii. 8 b with Mt

Mk xiii 8 <:^
xxiv. 7 KOI, Kat and Lk xxi. 11 re, Kai, koi
8
with
Mt x. 17 ydp ; Mk
with Mt xxiv.
U; Mk xiii. 9
Mk xiv. 6 with Mt xxvi. 10
xiii. 34 with Mt xxv. 14 yap
Mk xvi. 6 with Mt xxviii. 6 yap [and Lk xxiv. 6 aKX6i\.^
yap;
with

Mt

xxiv. 6

and

Mk

Avith their parallels

no

there are

'J,'^,

parallels,

Marcan

of the

and 41 are perhaps also worth considering

to which
and Mk iv. 28 and xiii.

xiv.

but which illustrate this feature

style.

Only those cases of asyndeton which occur in the sayings

of Jesus or of others have been referred

Mark has

For although

to.

several similar cases in his nart'ative (see

ix. 24,

X. 27, 28, 29

xii.

viii.

19,

xiv. 3<5, 19),

24, 29, 32 (?)

i^b\
38
they cannot be treated as characteristic of him, since they
are largely outnumbered by the cases in which Matthew,
;

of his narrative with the

Evangelist, begins a sentence

historic present Ae'yet or Xiyovaiv,

xvi. 15

22

<5,

^^,

xvii.

23, 33

64

25

xviii.

(see

and the Fourth

to himself

by a usage almost confined

ment of any conjunction

Mt

22; xix.

and without the employviii.

7, 8,

ix.

10,

28 ^

18,

20

xiii.

51
xx. 21,
;

43; xxvi.
But
bis).^

xxi. 31 bis, 41, 42; xxii. 21, 42,

xxvii. 22 bis

also, in

a parable, xx.

numerous though these instances of asyndeton in narrative

are, they do not convey the impression of abruptness which
is

given by Mark in discourses.

In Luke the decidedly asyndetic constructions are very

few; see, however, xiv. 27

courses

vii.

42

xvii. 32, :^^;

xix. 22 in parables

*
Tisch places in verse 9 the
referred to.

words

vii.

43

xxi. 13 in disin

apxfj wBivaii' ravra

the narrative.
which are here

^
Against these is to be set Mt xx. 26 without a conjunction, while
43 and Lk xxii. 26 have SL
^
Mt iv. 7; xix. 21
Similarly 6^77 is used without a conjunction in
mg Xtyti) xxvi. 34 xxvii. 65 (?) also in a parable xxv. 21, 23.
;

Mk

(WH

Mark's Gospel

St.

139

SECTION V
DUPLICATE EXPRESSIONS IN MARK, OF WHICH ONE OR
BOTH OF THE OTHER SYNOPTISTS USE ONE PART,

OR

EQUIVALENT

ITS

Matthew.

Mark.
32

i.

o\//-ta?

8e ytvofxevr]!

Vlil.

oTf fdvcTfv 6 rjXios

i.

viii.

fKa0e-

Koi

XeTrpn

17

d\l^ias

Luke.

de yevo-

IV.

pevrjs

aTrrjXdfv ott' avToii

42

16

T]

40 SvvOVTOS 8i TOV

TjXlOV

3 (Kadepiadq aiiTov

V.

Xenpa

13
Xinpa dnrjXdfv
an avTov
'}

piadr]

20 Tore vrjartvaov-

*ii.

aiv iv
ii.

25

XP^'"'' ^(^X^^

26 ov bvvuTai

iii.

aWa

15 Tore vrjarevaovaiv

ix

35 TO re vr)(TTfvaovaii>

V.

TfXos

'^"''

<TTr]vai,

XU. 3 (TTiivaufv

xii.

26

TTwy ovv (TTn6rj-

(TiTai

)(fi-

Kivais Tois ^pepais

e'v

(Ke'ivT) jfj Tj/xtpq

^(laiXela av-

17

vi.

3 eireivaafv

xi.

18

TTcos

(TTadqaerni

1)

^aaiXela nlrov ;

tov J
iiv. 5 TO TTfrpwSef ottou

xiii.

Ta

TTfTpiobt] 07T0V

viii.

viii.

16

T171'

Trfrpav

OVK flx^v yriv noXXT)i>

7roWr,v

21

*iv.
.

jj

VTTO to;'
VTTO

riji*

fi68iov

TOV p68iov

V. 15 VTTO

(cdrci)

kKIvtjv

ty

33

39 fKonaafv

6 nvi-

pos Koi (ytvero

yaXtjir]

viii.

26 ey(VTO

yaXi]vrj

viii.

rj

vtto-

also

KpvwTqv

ouSe vn"
*iv.

a-KfVi

kXIvtjs,

xi.
.

Toj/ p68ioi>

24 inavaavTo Kai

eye'vero yaX7]VT)

pfydXt]

fxtydXT)

tiv.

40

oijlTO)

Ti

SeiXot i(TTfj

(X^'^ TTLCFTIVJ

viii.

Tl

29

fietXot

f'cTTf,

V..I5 Tof Sdi/xorifo/ifroi',

,

19

17

nia-Tii

d(pi'

35 rw uvdpconov
ov TCI daipopia

e^rjXdev

TOV

fty

TToG

25

viii.

Tov fcrxrjKOTa tov

Xiyidva
V.

viii.

vpiov j

oXiyoTVLcrToij

OlKOl' (TOV

lV TO)/ OLKOl' (TOV

viii.

39

viii.

39 oVa

TTpOS TOVS (TOVS

V.

19 oan 6 Kvpcos

troi

6 dtos

nenoirjKfp Kai -qXtrjcriv

ae
V.

23

ti/a

fiTLdfjs

Xfipns avTji Iva

ras

a-todf]

IX.

16
o"Ou

(TTlBfi TIjV

x^tp<i

eV avTTjv xai

(reTai

fjj-

croi enoiTjcTfi'

and Observations

Statistics

140

Matthew.

Mark.
V.

Luke.

(^o^rjdelffa Ka\ rpe-

33

Pt. III.

viii.

47 Tpe/xovaa

viii.

52

fiovcra

V.

39

vi.

dopv^eiade Ka\

71

'''

'otf (Tuy-

f'*'

XUI. 57

yevevaiv avrov Kn\ iv

TTJ oIkio. avTov
*vi.

kvk\(o

(Is TOXIS

36

ev

Kai

Tij

5 els Tits KWfias

15 f^cidev.

*IJ

/xdf KOI

flaTTO-

12

ix.

aypovs Koi Kotpas

vii.

XV,

1 1

(cXat'ere

avTov

oiKia

xiv.

/x;)

raJ /cvKXa)

ko)-

aypovs

[Wanting here]

elaepx^iKVov

pevofievov

21 fdcodev

vii.

ix.

K T}y

17 ovmo podre ovSe

viii.

/car' tSi'af

22

X.

9 OVTTW

Xvi.

xvii.

iiovovs

oTU'j'j'do'aff

XV. 19 6K TTjS Kaphitts

j/oetTf

[Wanting here]
[Wanting here]

KaT Iblav

Xv-

xix.

22 XvTTOVHtVOS

kui

xix.

29

xviii.

23 nepiXvTTos

xviii.

29

novfxfvos

29 eviKev

X.

ijxov

\(VKfv\ Tov fvayyeklov

X.

I'Cv

30

Tc3

e'j/

(V(K(V TOV iflOV

xviii.

KaipcS

38
.

TTteti'

TO noTTipioy

TO ^dnTKTfia

r]

TOV 6iov
fv

T(S

Kaipco

wanting

here,

30

TOVTO)

Tovro)
X.

elveKfv Trjs ^a-

(TiXfias

ov6p.aTos

XX.

22

TTtetl'

TO TTOTripiOV

[Luke
but

cf. xii.

50]

^mrTi.(rdi]vai

xi.

eWiff fl<TiTopev6-

xxi. 2 v6vs

xix.

30

{lanopevofievoi

p.(VOl
Xli.

14

dovvai

t^eariv

KTivaov Kaiaapi

rj

xxii.

ov j

17 e^f(TTiv boi/fai

KijviTOv

KcuVapi

j;

oyy

bSifitv
xii.
.

44
.

rj

fxff

bafievy

TTiivTa
,

oaa tix^v

[Wanting here]

o\ov TOV ^'wv

XX. 22 (^((TTip

fjfids

Kai-

aapi (}>6pov 8ovvai

ov J
xxi.

rj

4 iravTu TOV ^lov ov

elxcv

avTTJs
"txiii.
Kcii

"ixiii.

28 OTraXo?

yevtyrai

xxiv. 32 y(VT]Tai anaXos

Koi

K(f>vr] TCI

(f)vWa
29 iyyvs ivTiv tVl

Bvpnis
*xiv. I TO

Hdaxa

Ka\ to

Til

(f){iWa

xxi.

30 Trpo^dXuxnv

fKCfivrj

xxiv. 33 iyyvs iaTif enl

xxi. 31 iyyvs iaTiv

dvpais
xxvi. 2 TO HdtTX"^

xxii. 1
fxcov

f]

Tj

iopTi] Tcov d(vXfyofifvr] ndcr;|fa

See also the preceding verse.

If with Tisch we were to retain in Mk xii. 23 orav avaarwaiv after
Tp dvaaTciaft, it would supply the next case but see WH, Notes, p. 26.
^
D a omit iiai tcL d^vfia see Allen on Mt xxvi. 2.
^

iv

St.

Mark^s Gospel
Matthew.

Mark.
6

XIV.

n(f)fTe

rl

avTTjv'

Luke.

xxvi. 10 tI kottovs Tvapi-

Konovs TTap)(eTfy

avTTj

141

X^Te

XIV. 15 fcrrpconevov eroi-

TTJ

yvvaiKiy

But

[Luke wanting.
cf.
Jn xii. 7

n(f)(s

xxii.

12 earpafievov

Tlj

xxii.

34

en avTOv Xa-

xxii.

[Wanting here]

liov

Xiv.

30 (TTjUfpoPTaVTrj
WKTl
'

43 fvdvs
XnXovvros

xiv.

TJ]

xxvi. 47

TaVTY]

(TTjfiepov

47 en airov XnXOVVTOS

XovvTos

61 iciotna koI ovk xxvi. 63

xiv.

iv

34

VVKTl

avTov

iTi

xxvi.

[Wanting here]

eVicoTTa

diTfKpivnTO ovdev

68

XIV.

oi8a

oijTe

ovre

21

XV,

napayovTa

ep)(6pfvov

djr'

Tl

Xc-

xxii.

oidn avT(:v

^''

57

yeis

26 fpx6p.evov

xxiii.

aypoO

?xvi. 2 Xt'av Trpwi

ott'

fiypoO
.

XXVin.

avartiKavTos tov rfKiov

*

70 OVK oiSa

xxvi.

(7ri(rTap.ai ai) ri Xe'yeiy

xxiv.

(TTU

Tt/

crKovar] is

opdpov

(Badecos

In these cases Luke also has two phrases, so the contrast

is

only

between Mark and Matthew.

t In these cases Matthew also has two phrases, so the contrast
Mark and Luke.

is

only between

The

following places, with their parallels, are also worth

notice, though in these cases it may be said that something

added by each part of

is

IVlark's duplicate expression, so

that one part does not merely repeat the other:

15

iii.

5,

29

vi.

30

11;

viii.

ix.

1 2,

35

x. 16,

Mk

46

i.

xiv.

7,44; XV. 32,42.

And

the following passages supply

^
way of writing

of IVIark's pleonastic
8

iv. 2,

may

It
'

V. 5,

26

vi.

vii.

some other

IMk

viii.

28

i.

28,

xv.

25
^^
perhaps be mentioned as a sign
;

Perhaps, however, the iSov

in

instances

;^^,

38, 45

of Mark's

Matthew and Mark may be taken

LXX

26,'^

equivalent to tiOvs, which (or eiidews) is the

rendering of
out of the five cases in which the Hebrew can be compared.

'^f? in

as an

three

*
It is only meant that this pleonastic way of writing is especially and
predominantly Marcan, not that it is exclusively so see Lk v. 26 ix. 45
and especially viii. 25, where Luke has the duplicate exxviii. 34
xi. 36
Mt viii. 27.
pression as compared with Mk iv. 41
'
'E naiSiodfv (Mk ix. 21 only) and dwo fxaKpodev (p. 12) may be here
:

noted as grammatically pleonastic expressions.

Statistics

T42

and Observations

Pt.

in.

fondness for 'duality' that he uses the double negative

much more frequently than the other Synoptists, the

numbers
Acts

in the historical

Jn

5,

books being

But no great

17.

of a construction so

Mt

stress can

common

in

3,

Mk

17,

Lk

8,

be laid on the use

Greek generally.

(For
another negative, see above, p. 13.) Perhaps too
Mark's fondness for the use of a compound verb followed

ovKiTi with

by the same

preposition

may come under

this heading.

This section has an important bearing on a point which

much discussed before the priority of Mark to

was

Luke had obtained

Matthew and
It

acceptance.
as

32,

through

all

used to be thought that

general
such passages

present
in

above) Mark had put together

But after looking
Matthew and Luke.
these instances of Mark's habitual manner

42
phrases from
i.

its

xiv.

30

(see

^
of duplicate expression, it will appear far more probable
that he had here used two phrases in his customary way,

in these cases Matthew happened to adopt one

Luke the other, whereas in some other cases,
and
them
xiv. 43 (see above), they both happened to
e.g. Mk ii. 25

and that
of

adopt the same

1
^

one.-^

For instances of this see Allen's St. Matthew, pp. xxv f.

So Plummer, Intern. Crit. Comm. on Lk iv. 40, agreeing with E. A. Abbott.
How natural and obvious a course it would be for any writer to chopse

one or other of Mark's similar phrases, instead of retaining both of them,

is illustrated by an interesting fact to which Prof. K. Lake called my attention,
when the above list of parallels was first published. It appears that in at
least six of the places there referred to the Sinaitic-Syriac text of Mark
i. 32, 42 ; vi. 36 ;
gives only one part of his duplicate expression, viz, in

Mk

vii.

21

X.

30

be imperfect).

xiv. 43.
Cf.

See

also xii. 14 (in

Lake's Text of the N.

xii.

44 the Syr^'" text seems to

T., p. 38.

SL Mark^s

vi

143

Gospel

SECTION VI
THE HISTORIC PRESENT
be seen

It will

is

present'

IN

MARK
the 'historic

in the following lists that

very frequent in Mark's narrative, comparaand extremely rare in Luke's. This

tively rare in Matthew's,

usage accounts
Xt'yet

for the

numerous occurrences

in

Mark

of

instead of d-mv (since diruv has no present in use),

which constitute a large proportion of the cases

Matthew and Luke agree against Mark.^

Now

which

in

(as we see was probably the case in other

Matthew
and Luke made this change of phraseomatters)
logy from Mark, they were only preferring a more usual to
a less usual mode of expression. For it appears from the
LXX that the employment of the historic present had been
up to this time by no means common with the writers of

sacred

if

story in the

instance,

we

Koivr\

or

Hellenistic

take the verbs which

Mark most

and

Greek

if,

for

frequently uses

it will
way,
be found that they are thus used in this one short Gospel
considerably more often than in the whole of the historical

in this

viz. Xeyei, Xiyovaiv,

books of the Old Testament.

into account,

we

find that

Mark

^px^raL, ep^ovrai,

And,

if

we take

all

verbs
in this

is

nearly approached
usage by only one of the various translators whose hands
can be traced in the
namely the renderer of

LXX

Kingdoms (=1 Samuel)

into Greek.^

In John the historic present is found 162 times (besides

two cases preserved by Tisch in xi. 29). But when we

remember the

respective lengths of the two Gospels

occupying about 41 and John about ^^ pages

Test.),

it

appears that

Mark

uses

it

more

in

WH's

(Mark
Greek

freely than John.

This however would be mainly accounted for by his propor'

See Appendix

On the

to Part III, p. 208.

use of the Historic Present in

LXX,

see Additional Note, p. 213.

Statistics

144

and Observations

Pt.

in.

much higher than

there arc comparatively few cases in Jn v-x and

tion of narrative to discourse being so

John's

xiv-xvii, and

The usage

none
is

at all in chapters ix, x, xv, xvii.^

frequent

Moulton says that

it is

in

Josephus. And
in the papyri.^

Dr.

J.

H.

common

In several cases the historic present gives to this Gospel

something of the vividness produced in the parallel places
of Matthew and Luke by the use of I'Sou, which is never

employed by Mark (or by John)/// narrative, but by Matthew

33 times and by Luke 16 times.

List of 151 Historic Presents in Mark.^

St.

VI

Mark^s Gospel
Parallel

Mark.
iii.

xii.

5 Xeyei

word

145
Parallel

(if any)

in

Matthew,

13

Xc'yei"

word

in

10

VI.

{if any)

Luke.

eirrev

13 ava^aivii.

12 eyeVero

TTpotTKaXeirat

13

e'^eX-

Trpo(Tf(f>a>vrj(T{v

19 epx^rai

20 (Tvvepx^TM
46 Ibov

31 epxpvTM

32

48

eliTtv

49

tiTrei/

33 ^e'y"

34
iv.

VIII.

[47 dwev]

Xcyouo'tj'

Xe'yei

2 (Tvvfixdr](Tav

xiii.

(j-umyerat

19 TraptycycTO

20

OTT/jyyeXf;

21

l7r<V

4 (rwidfTOy

13 Xe'yti
viii.

35 ^V'

18 (Kf\fV(Tev

22

eiTTfJ/

36 napakafi^dvovaiv
37 yiVerai

24 iyiviTO

23 Karf^rj

38 fyf ipovcriv

25 TJyiipav

24

V.

Xeyoi/rey

Xe-yovcrii'

7 Kpa^as

9 Xeyei

30
34 f^fjXBfv

15 epxovrai

,,

,,

K(u'

IX.

18 iSou

n'mTii

..

.npocrehdaiv

frTrei/

fvpnv

41

1801/ ^X^fi/

TTfaav

npotreKvpei.

,,

TrapfKoXei

49 (pxfTai t

35 epxovTm

50

Xe-yfi

23 f\da>v

38 epxovrni
,,

38 Xeywy

23 TrapaKaXet

36

Xeyovres

35 ^X^ai*

6e<x>pov(Tiv

19 Xeyei
22 epxfTai

BiTjyfLpav

28 di/axpa^os

29 (Kpa^av Xcyov-

X/yet

,,

aiTiKpidri

51 eX^coi/

Qeaipii

39

^e'y^t

40

TrapaXa/A^di'f t

52

fXeyfj/

earfj'

5 1 OVK d(l)fjK(V

fl pi)
,,

41
vi.

,,

25 eto'eX^wi'

elanopeveTni
Xf'yei

epx^TM

xiii.

54

e'X^wi/

iv.

54 ((ftavrjcrfv Xtyav
16 ^X^er

dKoXou^oifrti'

7 TrpocTKaXeirat

30

(rvvdyoi^Tai

31

Xe'yei

37

Xeyoutrti/

X.

7rpoCTKaX(rd-

ix.

(TVVK.aKcardpei'os

10 vTTWTTpeylravTfs
xiv.

7 Xeyovo-ii/

38 Xeyet

13

ciTrav

Parallel word {if any)

in Matthew.

Mark.
vi.

and Observations

statistics

146

Pt. iii.

word

Parallel
in

{if any)

Luke.

38 \iyov<nv
45 anoKvH

(?)

22

xiv.

27

50 Xeyet
vii.

(rvvayovrai

inepoiTaxTiv

XV.

l\akr]<ji.v

\lycov

1tpO(Tip\OVTai

Xf'yoj/res

18 Xeyei
28 Xeyci

32

aTToXiicri;

25 ^X^ev

48 fpX'^TM

(f>pov(nv

16

elTTfU

27

7rei/

30 irpourjkdov

TrapaKaXovaiv

34 ^f'y"
viii.

(LTTtV

I Xe'yfi

32

6 n'opayyeXXft

35 TrapayyeiXa?
2 eiTrej^

12 Xeyei

17 Xeyei

19

Xeyouo-ii'

20

\eyovcriv

eiTrei/

22 epxpVTM
,,

<f)epov(Tiv
...

7rapaKaXoC(rii'

16 flneu

29 Xeyei
33 Xe'yfi
ix.

2 irapakafx^dvei

ix.

20

c'TTfJ/

23 eiVef
/ii.

28 TrapdKa^av

Trapakafi^dvfi

dva^epei

dvafj>(p(i

dve^r]

5 Xyfi

eiTTfi'

33

*"rj/

19 Xeyet

17

flTTfJ'

41

etTTO'

35 ^ey"
X.

I
,,

epxfrai
(Tvvnopevoi/Tai

xix.

^\6ev

2 fjKoXovdrjanv

II Xe'yei

23

Xe'yrt

24

Xe'yft

27 Xeyfi
35 irpooTToptvovTui

42 Xeyfi
46 (pxovrai

49
xi.

I
,,

frrrev

xvin. 24 finev

26

ftTrff

27

t7rfj

XX. 20 npo(rfj\d(v

25

etTTff

29 (KTropfvofitvav

xxii.

xviii.

erTTfi/

25

35 iyiVtTo
Tw eyyifetJ*
.

({xovovai

(yyi^ov(Tiv

1 fjyyi(Tav

OTTOffTeXXfl

2 Xy

23

Xvoucrtf

aTTfOTfcXei'

2 Xf'yaj'

xix.

29 ijyyiaev

dTT<XTfCKtV

30

Xfycoi'

33 XuowwP

St.

VI

Parallel

Mark.

Mark's Gospel
word

{if

any)

Parallel

word

{if any)

Statistics

148

Parallel word (if any)

in Matthew.

Mark.
XV. IJ ivhibviJKovaiv

xxvii.

28 nepifdrjKav

29

TrepiTidfaaiv

,,

and Observations

Parallel ivord (if any)

in Luke.

fTTfdrjKav

31 drrrjyayov

21 dyyapevovcriv
22 (})fpovaiv

32 Tjyydpevaav

24 (TTavpovcrtv

35 (TTavpdxravTfS

8iap.fpi^ovTai

Pxxiii. II TVfpi^aXuiv

20 f^dyovaiv

33

pt. iii.

26 aTrr]yayov

eX^di/TS

33 V^^''

biffitpivavTo

38

<rravpot5i/Tai

iaravpaaav

,,

34

^la/xfpi^ofitpot

27 (TTavpovaiv

32 rjyoVTO

avaipiBrivai
xvi.

2 epxovrai

xxviii.

4 d(a>poii(Tiv
6 Xeyet

xxiv.

^X^i/

5 finav

5 etTrei'

*
Tn these 21 cases only does Matthew agree with
the historic present (no less than 9 of them occur in

Mt

ri\6av

3 evpov

Mark

Mk

in

xiv.

using

27-41

xxvi. 31-45).

t This is the only case in which Luke agrees with Mark in using
the historic present.
Mark does not ever use the historic present in Parables.

ZiJ/ </ 78 Historic Presents in

ii.

13 (Palverai

(})

ix.

15

,,

d(f)ir](Ti.v

6 Xeyei
8 TrapaXap^dvei

xii.
xiii.

xiv.

viii.

xix.

Xf-yovo'ii'

1 1

d(f)ir](nv

31

19

Xc'yft

XV.

20

^JjtriV

17 \eyov(Tiv

7 XfyoviTiv
Xe'yei

ID \eyov(Tiv
18 Xeyet (}(j>T]a'iv)

Xe-youtrij/

ID Xeyfi

22 Xeyet
8

13 Xeyei*

51
8

di/a(f)fp(t*

25 Xeyet
xviii.

37 Xeyet

5 TapaXa/ijSafft

20 Xeyei

14 TrpocfpxovTai*
28 Xf-yft

TrapayiviTni

13 napayivfrai

iv.

xvii.

Xt'-yft*

9 Xcyft*

19 (paiverai
111.

MATTHEW.^

Xeyet

XX. 21 Xe'yei

Xe'yft

22

npoa-f'pxovTai*

23 Xeyei

4 Xeyei*

12 XeyouCTiv

7 Xfyei

33 Xfyovaiv

33 \tyov(riv
xxi.

34 Xtyti

13
16

Xe'yei

Xt'yei

22 Xeyn
26 Xeyet

xvi. 15 Xe'yei

19

Xe'yei

20

xvii.

napakap^dpfi*

(?)

Xe'yoi^trij'

Xe'yei

31 X(yov<Tiv

Matthew the words which signify speaking (Ae'yei,

constitute slightly more than three-fourths of the whole
number, being 59 out of the 78 ; while in Mark they constitute less than
half, being 7a out of the 151.
^

It is

kiyovaiv,

noticeable that in
<pijaiv)

Mark's Gospel

St.

VI

xxi.

xxii.

31

xxvi. 31 Xeyei

Xe'-yfi

64

41 \iyov(jiv

42 Xeyet
16 OTToo-reXXov-

36 epxtrni

xxvii. 13 Xeyei

22

40 epxerai

Xc-yci

21 \kyov(nv

,,

\iyei
42 Xeyouo'iJ'

tvpi(TK(i
*

These are the 21 cases

xxviii.

\yfi

45 fpx*'-"'

43 ^^V'

Xeyet

71 Xtyei

X/yet

38 Xeyei

xxvi. 52 Xe'yei

35 ^V'

20

149

Xe-yei

\eyovaiv
38 oravpovj/Tat
10 Xeyet

\iyu*

in

which Matthew agrees with Mark

in

using the historic present.

Matthew
xiii.

also uses the following

5 presents in Parables

28

Xe'yovo-ti/

29

(}>r](Tiv

44

VTrayet

7 XeyouCTii/

TTwXet

Xeyei

dyopaffi

8 Xeyei

xviii.

XX.

12 Xeyei
XXV. II epxovTai.
1

40

viii.

(Ptjaiv

9 epx^Tcu

(Twaipfi

List of 4 [^r 6] Historic Presents in

vii.

8 Xeyet

xxii.

32 Xeyei
6 Xe'yei

49 epxtrai t

xi.

LUKE.
xi.

37 cpwra

45 Xeyi

Besides the above 4 cases, there are only the following 2, which
are in passages double-bracketed by
and omitted by Tisch

WH

xxiv. 12 jSXeTret (as in Jn xx. 5)

t Agreeing with the epxovrai in

Luke
xiii.

It

xxiv.

Mk

36 Xeyei

(as in

may

xvi. 7 X/yet

xvi.

xx. 19)

v. 35.

also uses the following 5 presents in Parables

8 Xcyfi

Jn

23 bpa

xvi.

29

xix.

Xt'yet

22 Xeyet

be added that in Acls there are 13 Historic Presents

(^j^o-iV

xxii.

x. II dfcopfl

xxiii.

viii.

36
27

evp'uTKfi

xxv.

2v

18
5
\.(f)r}<Tiv

xii.

31 ^?(Ti2
8 Xf'yfi

xix. 35 0jjo-iV
xxi.
^

Except

in this

37

22,

24
xxvi. 24)

Xe'yfi

one very doubtful case, Luke never uses kiyei of Jesus

(Abbott, in Enc. Bibl., ii. 1766).

'
In the recital by Cornelius.

and Observations

Statistics

150

SECTION
THE CONJUNCTION

in.

Pt.

VII

PREFERRED TO A^ IN MARK

Kai

The two most constantly recurring causes of the agreement of Matthew and Luke against Mark are two
preferences of Mark, viz.

(i)

for Xiy^iv instead of eiirfu', as

referred to in the last section,

The

and

for Kai instead of hi.

(ii)

few words of notice in anyclose examination of the Marcan peculiarities, though the
latter preference requires a

difference

in

practically so

meaning between the two conjunctions

Ae
for, as Winer points out,^
slight
'

is
is

used when the writer merely subjoins something

new, different, and distinct from what precedes, but on
Hence in the
that account not sharply opposed to it.
often

Synoptic Gospels

Now

are

there

and

Kai

at

U are

Matthew and Luke have

Mk
28

iii.

b,

^6

4,

32

ix.

iv. 11, 18,

30

X. 23

54; XV. 15 b

xiv. 12, 53,

26

least

^S

cases

v. 13,

14

xi. 4, 8, 9, 18,
;

xvi.

parallel.'

in

which

where Mark has

hi

20,

sometimes

and

i,

31

vi. 2,5^

xii.

both

Kai:

^J b

35

see
viii.

xiii.

parallels.

by those who
are enumerating the points of agreement between Matthew
and Luke against Mark. But it seems to me that they
Such cases must of course be counted

in

carry hardly any weight as signs either {a) that the

Petrine source which Matthew and Luke used was different

language from our Gospel of Mark, or {b} that either

Matthew or Luke must have seen the other's Gospel.^
in

For

it is

to be observed,

Kai rather than

his Gospel.^
1

liii.

U is a

Two

first,

that Mark's preference for

characteristic of his style throughout

proofs of this

may

7 b.

See Abbott, Corrections of Mark, 536 ff. and E*ic. Brit., x. 807 a.
Chapter xiii is an exception and, speaking generally, U is less rare
;

be given

in the later than in the earlier chapters.

Mark^s Gospel

St.

vii

He

151

than half as freely as the other

hi is found in Mark only about
156 times/ whereas it would be found quite 300
times if its use was as general as it is in Matthew

I.

uses

8e

less

For

Synoptists do.

and Luke, where

it

is

about

employed

and

496

508 times respectively (those Gospels being longer

than Mark by more than one-third).

we take

If

a.

denoted

the sections and sub-sections of Mark, as

in

WH

respectively,

no

less

have

by fresh paragraphs and by spaces

they amount together to 88. Of these

than 80 begin with koi, and of the others only 6

the second word. But in Matthew out of

8e as

159 such divisions only 38 begin with kui, while 54

hi as the second word
and in Luke out of the

have

145 divisions only ^^ begin with Kai, while 83 have hi

as the second word (including hi Kai 4 times).
Therefore, in the above-mentioned places where Matthew
and Luke agree against Mark, the three were only adhering
to their habitual preference.

And, secondly,
that

had

different

it is

worth notice that we see

writers (in this

case,

different

in the

LXX

translators)

their personal proclivities in this little matter,

though

preponderates on the whole as the rendering

of the Hebrew copula.^
If we take as specimens a few
historical
from
the
books, we find hi used tolerchapters
Kai largely

Gen

ably often in

xviii,

iv,

xix

Ex

iii-vi,

very nearly absent from Judg xiii-xiv

Neh

(=2

i-ii

Esdr

xi, xii).^

If,

whereas

it

is

3 Ki xvi-xxii

then, other Hellenistic

For these numbers I have had to rely on Bruder, with some corrections
Moulton and Gcden do not give 5t or Kai. On John see Abbott,
Joh. Gram., 2i33f.
^
It is curious that, as to this one small point only, Mark should be nearer
to LXX usage than Matthew or Luke.
See Appendix A to Part III, 'The
'

of

my own

Synoptists and the Septuagint (p. 198).

^
In these eleven chapters there are but five instances of 5*', viz. 3 Ki
xvii. 13 ; XX. 2, 6
In Jonah there are but four instances, viz.
xxi. 23, 39.
'

i.

5;

ii.

10

(in

the Psalm)

iii.

iv.

11.

and Observations

Statistics

152

Pt.

in.

writers thus varied in their use of these conjunctions,

need not look

for

anything suggestive or significant

we

in the

Matthew and Luke happened to have one habit,

Mark
and
another habit in this same matter, and that
consequently two of them often agree against the third
when we can compare them in the triple narrative.
fact that

On

the whole

me

seems to

it

that such an examination

now been attempted

are
which
in
favour of the view
largely
supplies
source
used
that the Petrine
by the two later Synoptists was
Marcan

of the

peculiarities as has

results

have

Ur-Marcus but St. Mark's Gospel almost as we

Almost but not quite. For instance, a later
i ('Jesus
hand is very probably to be seen in

'

not an

',

now.

it

editor's

Christ

i.

^
')
'

tion of

ix.

41

('

the gospel

Christ's
^

'

and

^
')

probably also in the inser-

'

'

in

persecutions

viii.

35 and x.
'

'

perhaps also in the reference to the Jews in vii.

and again in the numerals aoo and 300 (vi. 37 xiv. 5),

30

39,

34
both of which are also found
;

(vi.

xii.

5)

in the

and possibly

in

Johannine tradition^
a few other cases of

matter, such as the '2000' in v. 13, and the

disagreement of the witnesses in xiv. ^6, 59.
additional

For these

last four are interesting

and

definite particulars

For the only other occurrences of 'Jesus Christ in the Gospels are Mt. i. i,
xvi. 21 (?)
Jn i. 17 xvii. 3 it (or Christ Jesus') is found 15 times
in Acts and very frequently in the Epistles.
2
For Christ as a name is found without the article here only in the four
Gospels and Acts (Lk xxiii. 2 not being a case in point) with the article
Mt i. 17 xi. 2 xxiii. 10 Acts ii. 31 and viii. 5 and in the Epistles frevSaros
quently both without and with the article. In this verse too Mark's
may perhaps seem less original than Matthew's more unusual fvxpov (x. 42).
"
Mark (p. ro).
evayf(\iov, however, is a word generally characteristic of
'

18

'

(?)

'

'

in the
For, excluding the phrase King of the Jews ', this title is used
Mt
xxviii. 15 ; Lk vii. 3 ;
in
the
4
times
;
Gospels
Synoptic
(here
plural only
but in John 63 times (excluding iii, 25 but including iv. 96), and
xxiii.
;
*

'

51)

in

Acts 70 times.
*
But on the relations between

I 731

ff-

this

and Mark compare Abbott, Joh.

Voc.,

St Mark's Gospel

vii

153

on the one hand, it seems extremely improbable

that both Matthew and Luke would have thought fit to
such

as,

leave out, and such as, on the other hand, a subsequent

^
would wish to add,
editor, or scribe, or owner of a Gospel
if

they had happened to come to his knowledge.^

*
See Sanday, Inspiration^ pp. 295, 297, on the freedom' which seems to
have been used in propagating the text of the Gospels
also Blass, Philology
of the Gospels, pp. 77 ff. A. Robinson, Study of Gospels, p. 24.
2
On the agreements of Matthew and Luke against Mark, where they seem
to be using the Marcan document as a Grundschrift, see below. Appendix B
'

'

'

to

Part

p. 116.

III.

On

possible compilation in the

Second Gospel see above,

B.

ON THE GOSPEL OF

MATTHEW.

will

be collected some phe-

of this Gospel, bearing

upon the method and

In the following sections

nomena

ST.

purpose of its composition. The word composition is an

appropriate one, for in turning from Mark to Matthew we

have passed from the simplest of our Gospels to that in

which there are the clearest signs of compilation and of
artificial

arrangement

(see especially Sections III, IV).''

SECTION

THE QUOTATIONS FROM THE OLD TESTAMENT

It

has often

been noticed

that the quotations which

by the Evangelist himself agree much less

than those which occur in the course
the
with
closely
The following tables will show
of the common narrative.
are introduced

LXX

to

what a remarkable extent

Class

I.

this is the case

Quotations avowedly introdi(ced by the Author

or Editor of the Gospel?

pt. III. B.

Class

Sf.

One

II.

Matthew^s Gospel

quotation recorded as spoken by the Scribes

in the Introductory Chapters

Mt
in

ii.

155

6 contains 8 words that are in

I and II.

LXX, and

16 that are not

LXX.

Class

Quotations recorded as spoken in the part of

the Sermofi on the Mount peculiar to Matthew.
III.

Statistics

156

Class V. Quotations

and Observations

pt. in.

occtirring in the course of the double

or triple Jtarrative, but not themselves

either Mark or Luke.

recorded by
Words

Words

not in

in

.....

No.

Mt

1.

2.

ix.

xii.

13

LXX.

3.

xiii.

4.

xxi. 16

14, 15

LXX.

47

60
Is

vi.

Rom

Acts xxviii. 26 ;
9 is also expressly quoted in Jn xii. 40
8
but the quotation of it by Matthew belongs to this class,
;

xi.

because in
are used,

Mt

Mk

it is

iv. 1 2

and Lk

viii.

o,

though some words from

it

not expressly quoted.

16 and xix. 18, 19 are also referred to and discussed by

but
I have not included them here, as they are not stated
Turpie,'
to be quotations.
For the same reason several passages are here
xviii.

omitted, which are referred to as

'

citations

by some writers on

this subject.

Such computations of the number of words as

entered

in the

have

above tables can only be taken as approxi-

mate, for in some cases the agreement with the

extends to smaller or larger portions of words

LXX
;

only

and other

students might be either more or less ready than myself

But such divergences
to count in such portions as words.
in either direction will

not affect the main result that in

Class I (and also in the unimportant Classes II and III)

is very much less close
the correspondence with the
in Class I about half
in
Classes
IV
and
V.
For
than

LXX

of the words, but in Class IV not much more than oneseventh, and in the small Class
only one-thirteenth of
This is a very
LXX.
them, differ from the words of the

broad
'

distinction,

and such

as suggests prima facie that

In The Old Testament in the New, a book devoted to this subject (London,
Swete {op. cit., p. 387) also gives Mt xix. 18 f. with Mk x. 19, Lk

1868).

20 ff. as a quotation from Exxx. 12-17, thus

instead of the nine marked ^ in my Class IV.

xviii.

making ten

'triple' quotations

Matthew^s Gospel

St.

we have

work

before us the

of

157

more than one author or

editor.

would add a few words of comment on Class

For

above quotations.

and as forming a conspicuous exception

that they, unlike John, do not put
their

own

[a)

that

of them,

in

in

to the general rule

remarks

forth

or

the course of their narratives.^

subdivide these 10 quotations and to

It is instructive to

observe

of the

deserves special notice as being

Matthew among the Synoptists,

it

distinctly characteristic of

comments of

viz.

Nos.

i,

4, 5, 6,

8,

7,

introduced

are

support or illustration of facts or statements for

which we have also the authority of one or both of

the other Synoptists the Virgin-birth, Nazareth as

the
at

home

of Jesus in His youth, the early ministry

Capernaum, the frequent healings, the avoidance

of publicity

(so

much

insisted

upon

in

Mark), the

This is also the case

habit of speaking in parables.
as to the one item in Class II, viz. Bethlehem as the
place of birth, in which Luke agrees with Matthew.
only of them, viz. Nos. 2 and 3, are brought

{b)

forward

in

connexion with incidents which we

Matthew the

Egypt and the

only in
flight into
massacre of the innocents.
{c)

The remaining

2,

Nos. 9 and

viz.

find

10, refer to events

which are related by all the Synoptists the riding

into Jerusalem and the betrayal by Judas for a sum

But

of money.

is

it

Matthew alone who gives here,

and in anticipation of the
be cited by him, two additional

with

in

correspondence
prophecies about to

1
In Mk i. 2, 3
Mt iii. 3 Lk iii. 4-6, however, it is the Evangelists
themselves who quote the prophecies. And Lk vii. 29, 30 may perhaps
also be taken as another kind of exception to this rule
but not Lk
;

i.

1-4,

which

tory note.

is

only a preface, or

Mk

vii.

3, 4,

which

is

only an explana-

Statistics

158

and Observations

the two

details, viz.

animals, ass and

Pt. in.

colt,

xxi.

in

the amount of
2, 7, and thirty pieces of silver as
the price paid in xxvi. 15 xxvii. 0}
With these last details may be compared three other
;

which

Matthew, without expressly quoting

seems
to be influenced by their language,
prophecies,
in

places

viz.
1

Mt

xxvii.

Mk xv.

where
2%

Mt

2.

thonKav avrC^ niiiv dlvov [Xira xpXrjs fi(ixiy[xivov,

34

b(>)Kav

xxvii. 43,

23 has ka-iwpvKrixivov:

Mt

irXovarios,

xokrjv.'^

mocking chief

is

II

THE SHORTENING OF NARRATIVES

There

(xxii.)

priests, &c.

applied to Joseph of Arimathaea.

SECTION

in

is

shorten the

Ixviii. (Ixix.)

57 is the only place in which the word

used in Is liii. 9 in connexion with ra<^T/ and

xxvii.

Odvaros,

Ps

where several words from Ps xxi.

are attributed to the

3.

cf.

this

common

MATTHEW

IN

Gospel an observable

tendency to
condensation
by
which do not lead up to,

narrative, especially

or omission in those parts of

it

This characteristic
or directly bear upon, sayings of Jesus.
of Matthew may in many cases be measured and appre-

by the simple means of noticing the amounts of

space which the three narratives occupy in the parallel

ciated

Bp. Gore, Dissertations on Subjects connected with the Incarnation, p. 32,

in Mt xxvii.
that the above two details and the
gall
34 may be modifications due to the influence of the language of Zechariah
and the Psalmist respectively. But in all these cases the historical event
stands substantially the same when the modification is removed.' See also
*

Cf.

where he admits

'

'

Swete on

Mk

xi.

and

further addition (Apol.

Gen

7 to the
I.

same

effect.

xxxii) that the colt

And we may compare

was 'bound

to

Justin's

a vine', as in

xlix. 11.

Similarly the tT^povv avrov of xxvii. 36 may have been suggested by

Ps xxi. (xxii.) 18 Karevo-qaav Koi i-neibov fie the words are not identical, but
2

both are in close connexion with the division of the garments.

Number of words

i6o
(in

Statistics

and Observations

the absence of a third parallel),

it

Pt.

in.

was he who abbre-

viated, and not either of them who expanded, the matter

contained in their source.

Most of such

cases are of course

parallels with Mark, since the parallels between Matthew

and Luke only are mainly in discourses and very rarely in
The following are instances of both kinds
narratives.
:

in

Tisch
Syn. Ev.

Mt

S/.

ni

Matthew^s Gospel

SECTION

III

SIGNS OF COMPILATION IN
has been already noticed

It

i6i

(p.

MATTHEW
that, in recording

no)

Matthew and Luke seem

from the same source, but that

draw
more than

sayings of Jesus,

often to

materials

in

two-thirds of such cases they arrange the materials differhave now to notice further that this difference
ently.

We

of arrangement is very frequently caused by Matthew

placing the sayings together in large blocks of discourse,
while Luke records them separately, and in many cases
gives

them.

The

divergence
1.

Mt

vi.

2.

which led up

or circumstances

the questions

compared with

9-13
19-21

Lk

xi.
xii.

,,

1-4
33, 34

to

instances of this

following are conspicuous

The Lord's Prayer.

The treasure and

the

heart.

24
25-33

3.

4.
vii.

5.

7-11

God and mammon.

xvi. 13

,,

>)

xii.

,1

xi.

22-31

Against anxiety.

9-13

Ask and

it

shall

be

gate,

or

given, &c.
6.

13, 14

xiii.

,,

23, 24

The narrow
door.

7.

10.

31-3

11.

xviii. 12,

12.

xxiii.

13.

13

37-9^
xxiv. 28

25-7
12-17^

,,

,,

,,

,,

x. 23,

>)

)f

xiii. 18,

,,

,,

,,

,,

xiii.

,,

,,

xvii.

xxi.

24

never knew you, &c.

Persecutions foretold.

Blessed are your eyes,

&c.

192 Parablesof Mustard Seed

and Leaven.

XV. 4-7

The Lost Sheep.

33-6

37

The

Jerusalem, &c.
eagles gathered to-

gether.

Mk

xiii. 9-13 are more closely parallel to Mt x.

But the words certainly appear very unlikely
to have been spoken at the first and temporary mission of the Apostles
recorded in chapter x. It seems as if Matthew had at this point looked
through all his materials, and collected from them all the sayings that had
any bearing upon missionary work.
2
ovv, which is the true reading, seems intended to exhibit these prophetic parables as called forth by the success and progress recorded
^

Both thjpTpassage and

17-23 thaiAo

Mt

xxiv. 9-14.

in v. 17.
2

is

The connexion

better

in

Matthew seems

still.

HAWKINS

J^

sufficiently good, but that in

Luke

and Observations

Statistics

l62

it

be

will

and especially Nos. 1-7, are

that two accounts of the

If these parallel passages,

examined,

Pt. in.

seen

and contexts may be given.

differences in their situations

Speaking generally (for opinions will differ as to particular

cases, especially towards the end of the list), either {a)

Matthew

altered

their

mainly with the purpose

places,

of combining them in collections of sayings, or {b) Luke

did so, with the purpose of breaking up those collections
their component parts, and supplying for as many
of the sayings as possible the occasions which drew them
forth.
Without attempting to decide or foreclose the

into

question, I

seems by

must say that to me the former alternative

more intrinsically probable, and by far the

far the

more accordant with the phenomena before us.^

Those who agree with me in adopting that alternative
will feel that the above instances lend some a priori
probability to the supposition that it was Matthew, rather
than Luke or Mark,
as the following
:

Mt

V.

who

with
compared
^

13

transferred sayings in such cases

^
\
\

(?)

vi.

14

Lk XIV.
,

Mk

'

33, 34

xi.

A
M

25

Salt losing

its

Forgiveness

savour.

when

praying.
VIU. II, 12

X. 34,

Lk

35

,,

37

42

xiii.

xii.

28, 29

Many

shall

come from

51-3

east and west, &c.

Not peace but a sword,

26

Loving

&c.
xiv.

Mk

ix.

41

(or hating)
father or mother, &c.'
Giving a cup of cold

water.'

1
Among the numerous modern supporters of this view, I would specify two
American writers as particularly clear and forcible, Bacon, Sermon on the
Mounts pp. 226 ff., also 222 note and E. D. Burton, Principles of Literary
Hobson's TheDiatesCriticism, &c., pp. 35 ff. Another Chicago publication,
Tatian andtheSyn. Problem (1904), brings out the way in which this
saron
;

of
further by Tatian, especially
process of compiling discourses was carried still
in his use of Luke's so-called Perean section (pp. 59-61, 76).

is

Observe the connexion implied by

Whether

in these

very doubtful.

See

ovv.

two cases the sayings come from the same source

also p. 152.

in

7-

SL Matthew's Gospel
compared with

Lk

x.

xi,

Woe

13-15
21-23
39, 42,
43. 46-

52
xvii.

163

to Chorazin, &c.

Things hidden from the

wise and prudent, &c.
Woes pronounced on
the Pharisees, &c.

[
)

As

24

the lightning in the

heavens,
xvii. 26, 27,

34 35

xii.

39-46

As

in

the

days

of

Noah, &c.
Watchfulness.

See also other cases among the doublets (pp. 80 ff.), and
among the passages marked * on pp. 108 f. and cf. p. 195 (^):

Statistics

164

and Observations

Pt.iii.

the Maccabaean history

by Jason of Cyrene in five books which the writer of
2 Maccabees says (ii. 23) that he will assay to abridge in
one work ', in the course of which traces of a fivefold division
others trace in Ecclesiasticus,^

[e)

'

'

seem

show themselves

to

still

in certain breaks,^

(/) the five

parts which (besides some interpolations) Dr. Charles as well

as previous scholars sees in the Book of Enoch/^ and {g) the
five Pereqs which make up the Pirqe Aboth, as distinct from

the supplementary Pereq of R. Meir, it is hard to believe

that it is by accident that we find in a writer with the

Jewish aflinities of Matthew the^^'^ times repeated formula

about Jesus ending His sayings (vii. 28 xi, i xiii. 53
xix. 1 1 xxvi. i). Are we not reminded of the colophon which
'

still

book of Psalms,

closes the second

'

The

prayers of

'

*
(Ps Ixxii. 20) ?
And as to early Christian literature, we are told by
Eusebius both that the Exposition of Oracles of the Lord by

David the son of Jesse are ended

Papias was divided into five

who

{H. E.

a-vyypdjxfxaTa

them

iii.

39, refer-

which

/3i/3Aia),
may perhaps
imply that he found the oracles which he expounded thus
divided already and also that the work of Hegesippus which

ring to Irenaeus,

calls

had come down to

commentaries
^

"his

days consisted of five memoirs or

(virofivrifiaTa,

H. E.

iv. 22).^

Speaker's Conim. on Ecclus., p. 19. Mr, R. G. Moulton speaks of the

as seeming to be the favourite number in Wisdom literature

number 5
generally
astes,

and

'

five

books

in

Proverbs and Ecdesiastictis,

Wisdom^

five discourses in

five

essays

in Ecclesi-

Literary Study of the Bible, p. 404

But he does not seem to me to give satisfactory
:

see also pp. 284, 386.

proofs of this, except as to Ecclesiasticus and perhaps Proverbs.
2
Viz. at iii. 40; vii. 42; x. 9, 10; xiii. 266 ; xv. 37. It should be observed
especially

and
^

the verb hrjKovv, Which

See Book of Enoch,

D. B.
*

how

is

used in

ii.

23, reappears in

vii.

42

X. 10.

i.

The

ed. Charles, pp.

25-32

Enc. Bibl.

i.

221

f. ;

Hastings'

706.

LXX word

For aweriKeaev used of the completion

(B i^fTiXiaiv).
'
A later instance is the great work of Irenaeus himself, Adv. Haer. For
the habitual use of established numerical divisions we may compare the
long prevalence of five-act plays and three-volume novels in our own literary
here

is (^(Ki-nov.

of discourse see Deut xxxi.

history.

xxxii. 45

SL

iv

As

to

Matthew''s Gospel

165

whether that formula which we seem to discern

Matthew was due

those five verses of

in

to an editor of the

Gospel who himself made these compilations, or whether

he brought it in from the Logia with some collections

which already existed

Two

opinion.

points

Lk

alternative: (i)
avTov

so closely

is

words, to

Mt

vii.

be noted

may

vii. i eTretS^

parallel

28

there

in

iirk-qpcocrfv

common

iravTa

origin for

to,

prjixara

them both

Matthaean

is

finite

form an

substance, though not in

(2)
nothing distinctively
wording of the formula on the contrary,

to

favour of the latter

kol kyiv^TO ore ereAecrei' 6 'IrjtroCs tovs

Xoyovs TovTovs as to suggest a

and

in

difficult

is

it

there,

found

in

in the

iytvero, followed

these

by
only
5 places in
while
it
in
occurs
22
times
Luke
Matthew,
(also twice in
Mark and nowhere else in N. T.).
Another difficulty is involved in the impression conveyed
verb,

is

in four out of the five cases (viz.

Xoyovs TOVTOVS

xxvi.

xiii.

TiavTas tovs Xoyovs tovtovs

Mt

vii.

28; xix.

tovs

and especially
that whoever inserted

^^ ra? Trapa^oXas TavTas,

^)

the concluding formula regarded all the preceding sayings

as having been delivered at that time.
For this may seem
to suggest as alternatives either (a) that the collection and
compilation of various sayings, which we have seen on

other grounds to be probable, had not taken place, or (d)

that it had taken place before the blocks of sayings came
into the hands of the writer of this formula, and that he

was therefore unaware of

their having

been so composed.

B.

But

further,

we have some

intimations not only of the

existence of five such collections, but also of the plan upon

The navras used in this one case may be meant to cover the denunciatory
'

discourse

'

'

which

fills

chap, xxiii

chapter in conjunction with the

for if

first

we

read the last four verses of that

three verses of chap, xxiv,

it

will

appear

likely that in the Evangelist's mind the desolation of the Temple supplied
a link between the two discourses which is obscured by our division into

chapters.

Statistics

i66

and Observations

which the materials of them were arranged.

have been often a numerical plan, the numbers

Pt.

It

in.

seems to

3, 7,

and 10

being used as helps to memory, precisely as the numbers 3,

4, 7, and 10 are used in the Pirqe Aboth^ which is a speci-

men

of Jewish teaching accessible to everybody in Dr.

Taylor's edition.^

(See especially

i.

i, a,

19

ii.

iii.

R. Meir, 8 and 10.) Let any

and v, passim
iv. 19
one read through those five treatises and the appended
Pereq of Rabbi Meir, let him remember that such numerical
;

also

^
and
arrangements are common in the Mishnah generally
if he will then turn to St. Matthew's Gospel, I think that
here again it will be hard for him to believe that it is only
;

by accident

that

we

there find seven Beatitudes on character

a decided difference in length and in style

between them and the blessing on the state of being per(for there

is

the petitions of the Lord's Prayer extended from

secuted)
^
the reference to three degrees of sin and
five to seven
;

of punishment (v. 22) which has never been satisfactorily

explained the three external duties of alms, prayer, and
;

fasting

chapter
third

1-18); the seveti parables in the thirteenth

the seven woes in the true text of the twenty-

(vi.
;

chapter

(xxiii.

23

the

three

Lk

contrast

matters of the

weightier

xi. 42).

law

These instances are

all

but we have also the genealogy compressed

into a triad of fourteens (i. 17), as a kind of memoria

in discourses

Cambridge, 1897 (ed. a).

So much so indeed that Hershon in his Talmudic Miscellany finds it
best to sort and group his extracts according to the numbers which are
prominent in them, the Threes of the Talmud,' the Tens of the Talmud,'
2

'

and so on.

Cf. Enc. Brit. xvi.

504

b.

should perhaps be noticed that each of the two additional petitions

contains a characteristic Matthaean word, viz. '^evrfiriro) and 6 irovrjpus or rb
'

It

If the attempt to show correspondences between these seven

and the seven beatitudes was successful, it would bring out the
I
think it fails on the
numerical arrangement still more pointedly.
but the fourth and fifth items of the comparison (' daily bread
whole
and hunger and thirst ', forgive ... as we forgive and the merciful . .
novTjpov.

petitions

'

'

'

'

shall obtain

mercy

')

are at least noticeable coincidences.

St.

IV

technica

and

Matthew^s Gospel

in the course of chapters viii

167

and

ix,

between

and second collections of sayings, we have a collection of ten miracles, which is made up in a very unchronothe

first

way, but which reminds one irresistibly of the

enumerations in the Pirqe Aboth (v. 5 and 8), Ten miracles

logical

'

were wrought for our fathers in Egypt, and ten by the sea.^
Ten miracles were wrought in the Sanctuary.'

exclude from the above

list

the three Temptations in

3-10, because of the parallel in Lk iv. 3-13 and the

Mt xxvi. 39-44, because of
the parallel in Mk xiv. 35-41. There are also at least two

Mt

iv.

three prayers in Gethsemane,

cases peculiar to Luke, viz. the

'

three aspirants

'

in ix. 57in
and
the
three
in
xv
and
Lk
xi. 42-53
62,
parables
chap,
there seem to be three woes pronounced upon Pharisees
;

and three upon lawyers. But after allowing for these cases,
and for doubtfulness as to some of the Matthaean instances,^
remains true that these numerical arrangements are
decidedly characteristic of the First Gospel, and especially of
it still

the portions of
1

his

it

which are devoted to the sayings of Jesus.*

Unchronological, because (i) Matthew brings down to this division of

narrative three miracles which Marl< and Luke place considerably

viz. the healings of the leper (Mt viii. 2-4 ; Mk i. 40-5 ; Lk

12-16), of Peter's wife's mother, with the subsequent cures at eventide
(Mt viii. 14-17 ; Mk i. 29-34 Lk iv. 38-41), and of the paralytic (Mt ix.
2-8 Mk ii. 1-12 ; Lk v. 17-26). And (ii) the two briefly recorded miracles

earlier,
V.

in Mt ix. 27-31 and 32-4 are so strikingly similar to those recorded later
on, viz. in Mt xx. 29-34 ^nd xii. 22-4 respectively (see pp. 93 ff.), that
the suggestion naturally occurs that Matthew inserted this anticipatory
mention of them in order to make up the conventional number of ' ten

miracles

For it seems very

them (see Exp. Times,

'.

difficult

to

suggest any other reason for

24 f.). In these chapters the

only important passage unconnected with the miracles is the call of Matthew,
&c., in ix. 9-17: in all three Gospels it follows the healing of the paralytic,
inserting

xii.

474,

xiii.

and the anti- Pharisaic element in both incidents may have caused so close
an association (whether documentary or oral) between them that Matthew

them both together.

the Jewish expectation that the Messiah would be like Moses in
miracle working see Edersheim, Life and Times of Jesus, i. 176.
'
3 On the other
threes are suggested in
hand, many more Matthaean

transferred
2

On

'

.Mien's
*

Commentary,

p. Ixv

also on pp. 6, 38.

On the use of mystical numbers by John see

E.F. Scott, The Fourth Gospel,

i68

and Observations

Statistics

Pt. in.

SECTION V
THE TRANSFERENCE AND REPETITION OF FORMULAS,

MATTHEW

ESPECIALLY IN
For want of a better word

'

use the term

formula

'

to

express the short sentences, or collocations of two or more

words, which recur mainly or exclusively in one or other
of the Synoptic Gospels, so that they appear to be favourite
or habitual expressions of the writer of

Such expreswords

it.

sions are, as a rule, longer than the characteristic

and phrases tabulated

than

fragmentary

Part

in

doublets

the

more

but shorter and

I,

collected

in

Part

II,

Section IV.

Some of them are confined exclusively to one

I.

Peculiar
1.

to

Matthetv :

Matthew than
2.

in

17

KvvTjcrav aiira xxviii.

4. viol Ttjs ^aa-iXtlas viii.

6.

eldais

Tcts

rare in

ix.

18

so irpoafXdovcrai

. .

npocrt-

9 and cf. xv. 25 and xx. 20.

12 xiii. 38.
;

TO (TKoTos TO e^uTepov

els

more

e. g.

X. 34.

nvrai viii.
3. Trpo(Tf\da)V npoaeKiivei

5.

is

Mark

vofii(TTjT OTi rjXdop V.

fifj

17; xvi. 21 (though apxe(r6(u

or Luke).

HTTo TOT^ rip^aro iv.

Gospel

viii,

12

xxii.

(vdvprjaeis avToav ix. 4

xii.

xxv. 30.

25

1 besides, and not in LXX).

TrpojSaTa to aTrokaiKoTn o'kov 'itrparjK X. 6

{ivdv/jirja-is

only ActS I,

Hebrews
7.

TO.

xv. 24.

8. fv Tats avpaycayals avrcov pacmyaxrovcriv vfias x. 17

/xatrrfyaxrerf iv

Tois avv. vp5)v xxiii. 34.

9.

fv eKfivco T<3 Kaipa xi. 25

and
10.

ms 6

K.aT

e'/c.

k.

rjXios xiii.

in

43

Acts

xii. I

xii. i

xvii. 2 (so

xiv. I

and

Rev

11. )(a)p\s yvvaiK&v Koi naiBlmp xiv. 21

12. oSj/yoi Tv(f)\oi XV.

13. TOTS avvrjKav

on

14
.

(Lk has

eV

avr^

r. k.

in xiii. I,

xix. 23).

i.

19

x. i).

xv. 38.

xxiii. 16, 24.

flntv xvi. 12

xvii.

3.

(wvTos \v\. i6; xxvi. 63 (these two cases only in

Gospels, but also Acts 1, Paul 6, rest of N. T. 7).

14. Tov 6fov Tov

LXX

and Vulgate the three pairs of

Inge in DCG. i. 888. In the
spiritual gifts in Is. xi. a are raised to seven by the addition of eio-ejSf/as or
= * true godliness ' in the Anglican Confirmation Service).
pietatis (
p. 21, or

St Matthew^s Gospel

15. (f)o^rjBt]iTav a<f)68pa xvii.

xxvii.

54

so

169

Observe also the reproduction of much of the language of Mt

in viii. 16

ix.

35

Peculiar

II.
1.

wtrre

/xij

to

xiv. 35 (cf. pp.

2.

fKeyev

4.
5.

dvvaadai avrovs

iv

92

iv.

23

f.

f.).

Mark :

ov8e (payflv fVKaipovv

3. TjSecos

xvii.

i\viTr\6r](rav (T(f}68pa

xviii. 31.

23;

rfj

aprov (fynydv

iirjbe

3 1.
dibaxj] avrov iv. 2

avTov fJKovev

20

vi.

20

iii.

compared with

vi.

xii.

38.

xii. 37.

ovBeva fjdfXfv yvSiVai vii. 24

ovk r}BiKev tva rts yvol ix. 30.
ov yap ^8fi Tt airoKpiOrj ix. 6 (cf. Lk ix. 33)
oIk iiheicrav rt airoKpi;

dwaiu avra xiv. 40.

6.

III.
1.

Kal evayKoXiadpfvos avro ix.

Peculiar to

2.

noielv

TToXXa

ofjLoicos iii.
.

14

ii.

II

Koi erf pa

4. 8oxrjv TToielv V.

... avrd

x. 16.

Luke :~

ho^a iv vyIfia-Tois
the context).

3.

36

29

xix.

vi.
1

iii.

31
8

38 (and
x.

in

both cases

(Iprjvr]

in

37 (besides only

Jn

occurs in

v. 19).

ere pa ttoXXo xxii. 65.

xiv. 13.

5. novoyevfi^ in records of miracles vii. 12

viii.

42

ix.

38 (elsewhere

only Christological).

ns rS^v apxaicav aviorr} ix. 8 and 1 9.

8e fjixepa fjp^aTo Kkiveiv ix. 12
compared
rjfiepa xxiv. 29.

6. Trpo^jjTJjs
"/.

f]

8.

iv

rw

eivai

avrov Trpo(Tivx6pevov

ix.

18;

xi. I.

9. nroixovs, avaneipovs, ;(c)Xoi;y, TV(f)\ovs xiv.

1 3,

with KeKXiKev

^Bt)

fj

(See also p. igS-)

with which cf. the very

similar verse 21.

10.

(Cat rrjv

yvvaiKa xiv. 26

t]

yvvaiKa xviii. 29.

11. 01 viol Tov almvos tovtov XV}. 8

12. trvrrre to (tttjOos iavTov xviii.

The above

lists

xx. 34.
;

rvnTOVTSS ra

48.

are not intended to be exhaustive, but

to give specimens of expressions or

formulas

'

peculiar to

But there
another class of them which
more important and interesting, because more likely to

each Synoptist.
is

arrjdrj xxiii.

is

throw light upon the process of the formation of the

I mean those which are used once
Gospels.
(or in a few
cases twice) by a Synoptist in common with one or both
of the others, and are also used by that Synoptist inde-

pendently

in

other parts of his narrative.

and Observations

Statistics

170

There are a few such cases

vii.

passage
1.

acfjfODVToi (Toi al afiapriai (rov

Tiai
T}

Lk V.

tls ecTTiv ovtos

= Mk

20, 21

ii.

5,

aecraKev

xviii.

= Mk x.

42

Lk

ere

52

d(f)it]aii>

= Mk v.

viii.

48

also

Lk

tis dCvarai cifiap-

a/so d(f)fa>vTal aov al ifiap-

Tt? OVTOS eaTiv os koL afxapTias

tt'kttis crov

Lk

50 and

vii.

Lk vii. 48, 49.

= Mt ix. 22 and

34

xvii. 19.

Lk viii, 48 = Mk v. 34 (vwaye) also Lk vii. 50.

Jam
16,)
= rt ert (XKvWfis rov 818,;
fxrjiceTi orKvXKe top SiddcTKaXov Lk viii. 49
Mk V. 35 also Kupie, o-kvXKov Lk vii. 6.
oi 8e Tjyvoovv to pfjfia rovro Lk ix. 45 = Mk ix. 32
also compare

3. TTopevov els elprjvtjv

Acts

(Cf.

4.

xvi.

36

ii.

5.

fifj

r]v

an

TO p^fia TOVTO KeKpvp.p,ivov

Lk

/xem

avrwj/, kui ovk iyivaxjKov to. Xeyo-

xviii. 34.

6. Ti TTOirjO-as C^^fjv alauiov KXrjpovoiMTjcra)

and

iroiTjaa Iva,
7.

oIk

d(f)e6ri(reTai

(Tiu

cf.

Mt

also

fir]

Lk

xix. 16 o-^S)

Lk

Xidos eVt Xida &Se

(both have oi

d(f)(drj and eVi

\idov)

much more

repetitions are

Thus we

Gospel especially.
yfvvTjfiaTa
xxiii.

No,

iii.

20, pp. 97 f .)

find

Mt

= Mk

17

iii.

Mt

TTovTjpol ovTfs

= Lk xi.

vii. II

Mt

xii.

49

one

d(\>ri(Tov-

Lk
I7

28

also

Mt

xiii.

42, 50

Mt

xi.

av
.

vnaye cmicrat
2aTavd Mt
Sex^rai

TTOirjo-r]

iii.

22

in

also

Mt

= Mki.

xii.

words

xvii. 5.

15 {tov 6fov)

Mt

also v. il): also

cf.

34 and
Doublet

13 {vTTapxopTes)

also

= Mk

Mt

and

iii.

xii.

2.

Mt

viii.

34.

i.

Mt

xxii.

13

= Lk xvi.

v. 17,

and

xxiv. 51

16 (6

vop,.

vii. 12,

viii.

12

= Lk

xxv, 30,
Kal oi jrpo^.)

and

xxii. 40.

Mt xii. 50= Mk iii. 35

Mt vii. 21 (6 noiZv) cf. also xxi. 31.
Mt xvi. 23 = Mk viii. 33 also vnaye,

ro deXrjpxi tov Trarpos fiov

TOV deov)
fiov,

13

Mt

also (in the latter order)

(os ap

Mt

also

7:

iii.

is).

ol 7rpo<f>rjTai Ka\ 6 vofxos

10. fp.e

Mk xiii.

connexion with that

in

eic^ earai 6 KKavdfios Ka\ 6 ^pvyjios tS>v 686pt<i>v

xiii.

9.

7 (ri

41 ; Lk v. 13:
xiv. 31 (these, however, are not cases of heal-

ing, as the first

8. ocTTis

frequent in Matthew,

iv.

5. fKreivas rfjv x^^pf^ (said of Jesus)

7.

11

i.

^aaiKfia tS>v ovpavcov Mt

X. 7
(?) Lk X. 9 (r. dfov:

also

Lk

f)

(Cf.p.97.)

6.

44 ovk

xix.

(Cf. the transfer of the Baptist's

eV wevSoKijo-a

Mt

Mt

6;)^tSj'mi'

33.

3. rjyyiKev

4.

= Mt xxiv.
Lk

X.

x. 25.

\i6ov eVi \idov iv aoi.

But such

2.

Lk

also

also

= Mk

18

xviii.
:

xxi. 6

and therefore they are treated here

1.

one

in the

Luke, chiefly

Tias dc^etvai;

2.

in

48-50

Pt. in.

also

2aTava

iv. lO.

Mt

xviii.

= Mk

ix.

37

= Lk

ix.

48 (of receiving

Matthew's Gospel

St.

v
children)

11. f'Xerjaov

xviii. 38,

Mt

also in

Lk

not occur in

x. 16,

39

Mt

also

40 (of receiving the Apostles

which compare).

x.

ix.

27

12. (f)o^ovfJieda TOP o;^Xoj, Travres

xxi. 26 ==

Mt

= Mk X.

xx. 30, 3I

Mk

32

dufKreivav
.

Mt

also

rov

xiv. 5

^l(odvt]v
{(j)o^fj$T]

and

xxi.

46

ox^ovs, eVel fls Trpotprjrqv avrov elxov (i. e. Jesus).

xii. 5 KaKeivov
ou 8e aireKTUvav Mt xxi. 35
ovs 8e diroKTtvvvvTes : also Mt xxii. 6 tovs bovKovs

e(f>o^rjBr]aap Toiis

13. Tovs hovkovs

= Lk

47, 48

ep^ouo-tf

npo(f)fiTr]v

xi.

avrov elxov (i.e. John),

Trpo(pr]Ti]v

does

it

xv. 22.

yap

(very nearly)

TOP ox^op, oTi MS

Mt

vU) Aaveib

vlbs (or

171

= Mk

Kai dneKreivav.

aWovs

14. TrdXiv dTTfCTTetXev

dTreareiXev

Mt

also

xxii.

Mt

8ov\ovs

aXXoi' 8ov\ov

xxi.

36

= Mk

Koi aXXoi^ (cf. also

ndXiv

xii. 4, 5

Lk xx.

II,'

I2)

4 ndXiv diredTfiXev aXXovs dovXovs.

= Mk

xii. 9, and Lk xx. 16 dnoXfo-fi

Mt xxi. 41
TOVS yeapyovs : also Mt xxii. 7 dTimXea-fv tovs (f)ove'is eKfivovs.
16. dyaTrrjO-eis tov irXijaiov (tov its (rtavrov quoted in Mt xxii. 39

15. aTToXeVfi avTovs

Mk xii.

31 (and

cf.

Lk

x.

27)

Mt xix. 19.
Mt xxiv. 30= Mk

also in

xiii. 26 =
dvdpanov epx6p.evov
and o^eaOf ktX. in Mt. xxvi. 64 = Mk xiv. 62
28 Xbrnaiv tov vlov tov dvdpwnov ip)(6p.vov (where

17. off^ovrai TOV viov tov

Lk

xxi.

also

Mt

Mk

ix.

27

xvi.
I

and Lk

ix.

27 mention only the kingdom as being

seen).
18. dXr]65>s d(ov vlos

19

Mt

Mt

xxvii. 54

= Mk

Kai eyeveTo ot fTeXeaev 6 'irjaovs

(?).

xi. I

xiii.

53

xix. i

xxvi.

xv. 39

Mt

Mt xiv. 33.
Lk vii. I

also

28 = (?)

also

i.^

of such

careful examination

vii.

cases

certainly leaves

the impression that the mind of Matthew ^ was so familiar

with these collocations of words that he naturally reproduced them in other parts of his narrative, besides the
places in which

they occurred

his

in

sources.

It

is

to

be observed that these apparent reproductions often occur

earlier in the Gospel than do the apparently original
occurrences of the formulas, which seems to indicate that

Matthew drew them from

'

On

this

formula see pp. 164

of formulas peculiar to

Mt
^

vii.

f.

Matthew

his

memory

above
if

Lk

of his sources

must be transferred

it

vii.

is

and

to the list

not taken as parallel to

28.

This

is

of course

one of the many cases

as a symbol to denote the compiler of the

have been.

in

first

which

'

Matthew'

is

used

Gospel, whoever he

may

and Observations

Statistics

172

not from documents before him.^

the drift of this section

So

far as

favour of

in

is

element of the oral theory.

Before leaving the subject of these

it

Pt.

goes, then,

some considerable

formulas

',

it

should

be noticed that there are a few of them which occur

Formulas

(i)

in

two or three of the Synoptic Gospels

being one of them)

different positions in

(Matthew always

in.

by Matthew and by

placed

differently

Mark :
1.

Kal ovx wf ol ypafifiuTfis

e)(^a)if,
22 referred to the first preaching
in the Capernaum Synagogue (and so Lk iv. 32 ev i^ovaia rjv
6 Xoyos avrov), but (d) in Mt vii. 29 referred to the impression
made by the Sermon on the Mount much later in the Ministry.

r]v

yap

8i8d(TKa)v alrovs ois i^nvaiap

(Mark adds avrmv),

Mk

(a) in

i.

Mk

i.
exovrai noiKiXais voaois, used (a) in
34 (cf.
of the healings at eventide, but (d) combined in Mt

2. KOKfflf

some other words from

3.

Mount.
on ^a-nv

xxvii. 17

(Mt

i>s

LXX)

the 5,000, but

(<^)

which occurred
4.

Kai

oxrel)

(a) in

in

Mk

Mt

ff.

irpo^ara

iv. 40)
24 with
before the Sermon on the

p.f]

txovra

rroifieva

ix.

34 placed before the Feeding of

36 before the Mission of the Twelve

earlier.

used

(a)

in

Mk

xii.

Parable of the Wicked Husbandmen, but (d) in Mt

the question as to tribute to Caesar rather later.

(ii)

Formulas

and by Luke
I.

(Numb

Mk vi.

avrov dirri\6av,

d(f)evTfs

iii.

Lk

iv.

differently placed

12

after

xxii.

the

22 after

by Matthew, by Mark,

ovBfh ovKeri erokfia avrov eVepwr^o-oi is (in substance) placed

(a) in Mk xii. 34, after the Two Great Commandments (omitted
here
(d)

in

Mt

in

Luke)

xxii. 46, after

the subsequent reference to Psalm ex

but
(c)

in

Lk

XX. 40, after the earlier confutation of the

Compare the suggestions made on

Or

commendations by

pp. 93-5.

for perhaps an exception may be found in the

scribes given by Mark and Luke only, viz. (a) koXws,

almost always

StSdffKaKe,

Sadducees.

in dKr]6fias etvts in

ments, but (6) SiddanaXe, Ka\ws

Sadducees.

Mk

xii.

eTiras in

32 after the two great commandxx. 39 after the confutation of the

Lk

(a) in

Mk

22

i.

t^ 8i8ax!J airov is said

Lk iv. 32, of the preaching in the
;

Synagogue
(d) in

Mt

vii 28,

Mount
(c) in
(</)

in

in

the

Sermon on

the

also

Lk

Mt

eKirXTja-a-taSai

formula has been placed

this

in

employment

8i8axjj tov Kvplov (cf.

verbs 8i8da-Ketv and

Cleansing of the Temple

the confutation of the Sadducees.

Luke's Gospel,
its

HfyakdOTTjTi TOV Beov

Do

made by

18, of the result of the

here because of
rrj

of the impression

xxii. 33, of

Though not used

(irl

Capernaum

Mk xi.
Mt

173

2. f^ir\T)<T(rovTO eVt

Matthew's Gospel

5/.

ix.

Acts

xiii.

12 eWXijTrd/xei/os

43 f^enXrjoraovTo

xiii.

54

Mk

vi.

eVl

Tfj

2 where the

are used).

not such cases of repetition and transference of

formulas point, like the former instances, to oral processes

of preservation and transmission ? Of course men who,

and perhaps also as teachers, had previously

acquired knowledge by such processes would not be debarred
from the use of manuscripts as their chief authorities, when

as disciples

they set themselves to draw up Gospels. But they would

be likely to use them with great freedom, and from time to
time they would dispense with the trouble of turning to
them, when they thought that their own traditional information was sufficient.
See p. 217.

Statistics

174

C.

and Observations

ON THE GOSPEL OF
Division

ST.

in.

LUKE.

ON THE LINGUISTIC RELATIONS BETWEEN

GOSPEL AND ACTS
In the case of

Pt.

ST.

LUKE'S

one Synoptic Gospel we have the

compare it with another book

this

advantage of being able to

which both claims to be (Acts i. i) and appears to be the

work of the same author. This comparison should be
helpful in many ways towards a right appreciation of the
time and manner of the composition of the Gospel.

SECTION

THE LINGUISTIC SIMILARITY BETWEEN LUKE AND ACTS

This similarity is so strong that it is generally admitted
to establish the fact that the two books in their present

shape come from one author or editor, whatever materials

in them.
Numerous writers have

he may have used

brought together the correspondences in vocabulary and

phraseology and mental standpoint which link the books
together,^ and there is no need to reproduce here the

abundant proofs of a similarity so generally admitted.I have noted two special points of likeness between

But

Luke and Acts which

same time bring out points of

between Luke and the other

at the

comparison and contrast

Synoptic Gospels, and which therefore bear directly upon
the Synoptic Problem.^
N. T., ii. 261-8 Zeller, ii. 213-54 and
both in Eng. tr., besides more recent writers.
'
The tables given above on pp. 16-23 and 27-9 supply materials for
many such proofs.
*
'Verbs compounded with prepositions' was the title of a third such
'

See

e. g.

Overbeck,

S. Davidson, Inirod. to

p. 248,

Div.

A.

I. I

Words

St.

Luke's Gospel

175

peculiar to one or other Gospel and to Acts.

Fifty-eight words are peculiar to

Luke and

Acts,

viz.^:

176

Statistics

and Observations

Seventeen words are peculiar to

VIZ.

ao-^aX t'fci)

Pt.

in.

Matthew and Acts,

SL Lukes Gospel

Div.i. 11

SECTION

177

II

DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE LANGUAGE OF LUKE

AND ACTS
It
(p.

was

said at the beginning of the preceding Section

174) that the similarity between the language of

Luke

and Acts has been abundantly proved and illustrated. But

I do not know that much attention has been
paid to the
linguistic

differences

between the two.

are important in their

to throw doubt on the

way for,
common authorship,
;

suggest that a considerable time

the writing of the two books.^
five
i.

headings

Words and phrases

These, however,

while quite insufficient

they seem to

must have elapsed between

They may be placed under

characteristic of Luke's

Gospel

in

contrast to the other Synoptics, but used in Acts at least

three times as often as in

(aTTooToAos,)

o.v{]p,

dvojxaTt

axP'j

= 'by name'),

in the table

notice as

re.

Luke

^y^v(To followed by infinitive,

The above should be examined

given on pp. 16-23.

coming under

Some

this category are

others deserving

Ads.

Statistics

178

and Observations

Pt. III.

Karaya as occurring never in Matthew or Mark, once in

And the supple5, 8, 9, 8, 7 times respectively in Acts.

7rayy(\ia,

Luke, and

lists

mentary

more or

on pp. 27-9

Under

this heading,

are bracketed

( )

linguistic evidence,
for

will

suggest some other cases which are

less in point.

and the subsequent ones, a few words

these are comparatively unimportant as

because they

may

be mainly accounted

by the subject-matter.
Words and phrases never occurring

ii.

frequently in Acts.
(Under the preceding heading

(i)

Luke, but

in

we had words,

&c.,

which might be quoted as evidence both for the similarity

and the dissimilarity between Luke and Acts under this
:

and the following headings

alone

is

brought

(ii,

iii,

iv,

v) the dissimilarity

out.)
Acts.

Dlv.

I.

It is

'

in Actsii.

he said

38

v.

'

179

Luke has

in his Gospel no instance of

understood
instead of expressed, as it
being

also remarkable that

the verb for

is

Luke's Gospel

vS/.

II

11

ix. 5,

xix. 2

xxv. 22

xxvi. 25, 28, 29

kox vvv beginning a sentence, as in Acts

(cf. also x. 15); nor of

17; vii. 34
16
xxvi. 6
;

33 XV. 10;
Acts vii. 37;
;

iii.

(LXX)
(cf.

also

xvi.

xxii.

x.

v.

36

38

xiii.

xxiii.

xxiii.

15

24; xxiv. 22;

Words and

frequently in Acts.

n;
;

xvi.

37; xx. 22, 25;

iii.

xxii.

21); nor of vvv olv as in Acts x.

nor of the participle duas as in
xxvii. 35.

phrases rarely occurring in Luke, but

^ cts*

Luke.

SL Luke's Gospel

Div.i.ii

i8i

than Acts,^ whatever the date of the latter book

may

be

a question on which the next Section will bear.

[To enter upon the difference which Peine and others

have observed between Acts

which they

refer

Luke's use

to

and

i-xii

of

xiii-xxviii,"

authorities

and

in

the

former part of his work, does not come within the scope
of this book.
But in the above statistics as to Acts that
division into

two parts has been taken

into account, for the

sake of students of that particular subject.

Here it need
be
said
that
only
although (i) the above tables (see especially
iii) show that the divergence of the language from that of
the Gospel is greater in the second than in the first part
of Acts,^ and although (2) this is still more decidedly the
case as to the 413 words which are peculiar to Acts (p. 204)

and which occur more than twice as often

the

first part,*

and although, again,

(3)

second as in

in the

a few words or phrases

can be pointed out as characterizing the two parts respectively,^ these phenomena taken together are of small weight
^
This would also account for the apparent difference in chronology, &c.,
between Lk xxiv and Acts i. In the interval between the composition
of the two books Luke might have received fuller information as to the

days subsequent to the Resurrection see also Wright's note on Lk xxii, 52.
Bishop Chase stands almost alone in regarding Acts as planned and composed' before the Gospel (Camb. TheoL Essays (1905), pp. 380, 406 f.).
2
I adhere to this division of Acts, though Harnack draws his line at
I need hardly say that the imxvi. 5 {Ads of the Apostles, E. T., p. xxxii.
portance of this book to critical students of Acts is very great in some
respects even greater than that of the better known Luke the Physician),
On the failure of past attempts to assign sources to various parts of Acts,
see Knowling in Expositors Greek Test., vol. ii, pp. 22-30, and Chase,
:

'

Credibility
^

In

of the Acts,

p. 15.

making these comparisons

second part

is

the longer

it

fills

it

must be borne

39 pages, while the

in

mind

first

that

part only

the
fills

30 pages in WH.
*
Most of these 413 peculiar words are found only once, so the whole
number of the occurrences of them is only 564, of which 180 are in chapters
i-xii, and 384 in chapters xiii-xxviii.
*
See Weiss, Introd. to N. T., E. T., ii. 333. His strongest instances

seem

to be i^iarTjixi

KaKfi

(cf.

surely

and irpoaicapTepioj used only in the first part, and taw,

also KaKelOiv), and vovrjpos used only in the second part.
For
such words as aana^onat, SiaXiyofiat, Karavraa}, atPo/j-ai (used of

proselytes) in the second part would be naturally suggested

by the sub-

i82

Statistics

and Observations
common

against the mass of linguistic evidence for

Some

Pt. iii.

author-

them may perhaps be accounted for by the

ship.
use of documents in chapters i-xii but a large proportion
of

them are due

of

to difference of subject-matter, and to the

fact that the scenes

and surroundings of the

are so diverse, being in the

and Palestinian than

first

part so far more Jewish

in the second.]

SECTION

III

SPECIAL CONSIDERATION OF THE

IN

facts recorded

RELATION TO

ST.

'

WE '-SECTIONS OF

ACTS

LUKE's GOSPEL

In Acts xvi. IC-17; XX. 5-15; xxi. 1-18 xxvii. i -xxviii.

16 inclusive, we find four passages, containing 97 verses,
;

first person plural,^ and thus

one of Paul's companions
himself
as
been
having
represents
These passages may be, and have been, accounted
in travel.

which the writer uses the

in

for in three ways.

(a)

First,

the compiler of Acts

extracts from a

'

travel-document

have inserted these

may
'

which had been handed

down to him, and may have accidentally or carelessly left

the we standing in them, without mentioning that he was
*

'

But, although instances of such

have
been
negligence
supplied from mediaeval chroniclers,^
it does not seem at all likely to have been committed by this

making

direct quotations.

author,

who was

also evidently

evidently no unskilled writer, and

had no hesitation

in

'

working over

'

who
and

jects of the narrative, as well as dnoXoyfofJicu, (yKakfu and (yKXrj/xa, and

An imKarrjyopiO), upon which Weiss does not lay stress for this reason.

portant addition to what

in the occurrence of the

I
'

have called the strongest instances may be found

18 times in the first part
'

periphrastic imperfect
and only 6 times in the second.
*
It is also used in D's addition to Acts xi. 28.
writer's presence in Pisidia
2

Zeller,

ii.

258.

is

implied in xiv. 22,

And
'

we

it is

must

possible that the

enter.'

Div.i.

SL Luke^s Gospel

ni

we

adapting his materials, as

Marcan and Logian sources

183

see xn his treatment of the

in his

Gospel.

(^) Therefore a second theory is preferred by Zeller and

others, to whom a late date for the composition of Acts

seems on other grounds probable.

we

'

that the

'

is

left

the view

They adopt

in the narrative designedly,

because

the compiler wished to identify himself with the older

reporter ', and so to pass for one of Paul's companions ',^
'

'

in order

to

The

(y)

recommend

his production

'.^

third account of the matter

is

that the writer

was from time to time a companion of Paul in

and that he simply and naturally wrote in the

when narrating events

at

his travels,
first

which he had been present.

person

There

would be nothing strange, nothing that required any explanation, in his doing so

personality was

would

evidently

in all probability

for Theophilus, to

known (Lk

i.

whom

Acts

i.

his
i),^

be aware also that he had been

a fellow traveller of the Apostle of the Gentiles.

Now this last view, which attributes the composition of
the third Gospel and of the whole of Acts to the original
'

author of the

from

We '-Sections,

receives very strong support

linguistic considerations.*

A.

istic
1

of

refer

Overbeck,

i.

43

back to the

(in

Eng. tr. of Zeller).

N. T., ii. 372.

S. Davidson, Introd. to

Acts,

words and phrases charactereach Synoptic Gospel, as they were collected on

Let us

So Schraiedel

in Enc. Bibl.

s. v.

I.

that, as the epithet KpaTiare seems to show, Theophilus

actual person, and not ' a representative of the Christian reader
but the assumption is of no great importance for our present
generally
'

have assumed

was an

'

argument.
*
Pre-eminent among recent critical writers who have adopted this view,
and largely upon linguistic grounds, is Harnack in Lukas der Arzt (1906)
see especially pp. 47 ff., 56
(in E. T., Luke the Phys., pp. 67 ff., 81 ff.).
See also Burkitt, Gospel History, &c. (igo6), pp. 110-20.
:

flF,

and Observations

Statistics

184

and some remarkable

pp. 4-^3,

Pt. in.

results bearing

on our

present point will appear.

As

Lucan words and phrases,

may
summary on p. 33 that the number
of the occurrences of them (viz. iii) in the 97 verses of the
We '-Sections of Acts is very nearly as large as the number
(i)

to the characteristically

be seen

it

in the

'

And

116) in the 661 verses of Mark.

(viz.

verses of

than

less

Matthew

Matthew they occur only 316

'

Again,

(2)

times, which

is

We

if

we

contrast the occurrences of the words

and phrases characteristic of each Gospel, we

The Matthaean words and

a.

1,068

as often as in the
'-Sections, though
eleven times as long as they are.

tivice
is

in the

Matthew 904

times, which

as the 30 occurrences of

is 2i}oo\x\.

them

find that

phrases are found in

forty-five times as often

in the

'

We '-Sections

The Marcan words and

b.

357 times, which

is

II occurrences of

phrases are found in Mark

about thirty-two times as often as the

them

'

the

in

We '-Sections

while

The Lucan words and phrases are found in Luke 1,483

times, which is not much more than thirteett times as often
c.

as the III occurrences of

Once more,

(3)

if

in

them

in the

a similar

'

We '-Sections.

way we

take the separate

words and phrases, without regard to the frequency of

their occurrence,

we

find in the

'

We '-Sections

Out of the 95 Matthaean words and

slightly more than one-tiinth
a.

phrases, 11 or

b.

Out

one-sixth
c.

what

Out
less

of the 41

Marcan words and phrases,

of the 151

Lucan words and

or about

phrases, 45 or some-

than one-third (the almost exact proportion being

three-tenths).

The

II

Matthaean words,

&c., are (khO^v (twice), KeXcvw,

Kfpbaivao, XajxTrds, [xovov, odiv, itapdivos, npocrepyoiiai (twice?),

Div.

I.

St.

III

Lukes

(Tvvayoi (twice), tot^ (4 times),

ones are eAeyoy (3 times,

185

Gospel

rpo<\>-\]

viz. xxi.

(4 times): the 7

Marcan

xxviii. 4, 6), evOicos,

KaTaK^ilxai, Kpario), ttuXlv, irapCcTTrjixi intransitive (twice), ^epco

(twice)

Lucan

the 45

more

ones, which are generally of a

distinctive and important kind, are to be seen on pp. 16

Such evidence of unity of authorship, drawn from a comfif.

parison of the language of the three Synoptic Gospels,

appears to me irresistible. Is it not utterly improbable
'

We '-Sections

that the language of the original writer of the

should have chanced to have so very many

more

corre-

spondences with the language of the subsequent compiler

than with that of Matthew or Mark ?

B.
view of the importance of this matter as supplying the best, and almost the only, means we have for
fixing the approximate date of any Gospel, it may be

But

in

worth while to add some other evidence

not comparative which points

also

happens to

instances of:

fall

in the

same

under three heads.

Words and

The

phrases found only in the

and in the rest of Acts ^
i.

positive

direction.

'

following are

We '-Sections

JVe

aTTOTrXeo)

ntpvo)

^ia

....
....
....
....
....

Siarpi^o) with ace. of

5

fKfl(T

tWXew
e^eijLii

time

eVi^ouXij
fjfiepai iKavai

10

fjfiepai.

Tr\f iov(s, TrXetovs

and
This

i86

Statistics

and Observations

Pt.

We^jxfpai Tives

Kad' ov rponov
fifvdo

....
.

Rest

4
I

with acc. of person

.....
....
.....
.....
.....

fieraXafji^ava Tpo(f)ijs

15 vtavias
OXJ

TV)(ODV

TTpo(TKfK\r)p.m

ra

fi'i'

Tfi eTnota-fi

20 xmtpmov
xmovoica

with acc.

(in vii.

3(?)
I

26 with

4
*

fjfitpq)

Total

3
2

28

46

omitted because the reading in xxvii. 39

and KaTa(f)ep(o because it is used in such different senses.
e^wBtca is

Words and

'

'

JVe

'

is

doubtful,

We '-Sections

phrases found only in the

and Luke, with or without the rest of Acts also
ii.

of Acts.

^
.

in.

Rest

Div.

I.

HI

St.

Luke's Gospel

187

phrases found in the We '-Sections and also

used predominantly, though not exckisively, in the rest of
iii.

'

Words and

Acts or Luke or either of them

1 88

Observe also the

'

nerplcos, ovk oXiyov)

oil

and Observations

Statistics

xxviii.

20;
XV, 2

xvii. 4, 12,

27

We

'

xix.

11, 23,

in

Luke

ii.

12

It

must be remembered that

(vii.

24

xii.

5;

(i.

xxi.

18; xiv. 28;

39; xxvi.

19), twice

N. T. (Thayer refers to Jn
11 where a verb is used).

xv. 13), rare in rest of

34 only/ besides

iii.

Litotes' of ou with an adjective or adverb (as

'-Sections (xx. 12 ; xxvii. 14,
4 times in

12 times in rest of Acts

2),

Pt. iii.

characteristic of

Luke

Cor

ii.

the words and phrases

all

are excluded from this

list,

as having

been already treated in this connexion (pp. 183 fif.) otherwise it would have been a far longer list, and would have
:

more numerous correspondences between the

We '-Sections and the other Lucan writings.
Against all the above similarities we can only set a few

showed
*

far

We

The
'-Sections.
expressions that are peculiar to these
only two of these to which any importance can be attached
'

are -napaivioi (xxvii.

xxviii. 13

?).^

For

coming to shore

9,

and

22)

ev^i)8po/xe'co

(xxvii. 20,

irepiaipio)

(xvi. ii

xxi.

(xxvii. 3; xxviii. 12;

Xiyofxat (xxvii. 8, 13), irXoos (xxi. 7

cf.

i),

Lk

40

Kardyeadai of
v.

11), Trapa-

xxvii. 9, 10), viro-nkio)

and other such words are amply accounted for

We do not find elsewhere rfj kripa
the
subject-matter.
by
but the next day
xxvii. 3)
for the next day (xx. 15 ?
often in the We 'of
so
much
more
be
to
spoken
happens
*
Sections than in any other passages of the same length
(xxvii. 4, 7),

'

'

'

'

that there
variety of

On

is

nothing remarkable

the whole, then,

internal

in

Greek phrases to express

and

there

is

there being a larger

it.

an immense balance of

of the
linguistic evidence in favour

view that

the original writer of these sections was the same person as

the main author of the Acts and of the third Gospel, and,
^

But see

"

On

also ov fuxKpav in

Mk

xii.

34

the medical use of itapaivio} see

Jn xxi. 8.
Knowling on
;

xxvii. 22, or in Biblical

World, XX. 376, referring to Hobart.

3
2 Cor iii. 16 and Heb x. ir.
TTtpiatpfoj is also found in
*
It is spoken of in these 97 verses very nearly as often as in the whole
of the rest of Acts, and considerably more often than in the whole of
Luke.

Div.

I.

Luke^s Gospel

St.

in

189

consequently, that the date of those books

lifetime of a

within the

lies

of St. Paul.

companion

SECTION IV
SUBSIDIARY NOTICE OF THE SIMILARITY BETWEEN THE
LANGUAGE OF THE GOSPEL OF ST. LUKE AND OF

THE PAULINE EPISTLES

The

Synoptist with a friend and

which we have seen to be so

identity of the third

companion of

St.

Paul

abundantly proved by the language of Acts generally, and

of the We '-Sections of it in particular, is confirmed and
'

by some remarkable

illustrated

between

similarities

his

{Ji).
Gospel and the Pauline Epistles. See
This again (cf. pp. 174-6) may be best shown by a comparison with the other Gospels.

also p. 196

A.

An

examination of the vocabularies of the Gospels

There are

gives the following results.

Thirty-two words found only

and Acts) and

in

Matthew

Twenty-two words found only

in

Mark

(or

Acts) and in Paul.

One hundred and three words found only
Luke and Acts) and in Paul.

Twenty-one words found only

Acts) and in Paul.

The preponderance
significant.

(or

Matthew

in Paul.

in

in the case of

in

John

(or

Luke

is

Mark and
Luke

(or

John and
surely very

Lists of the words are given below.

There are about 78 words found only in Acts and Paul,

besides the 44 of the above 103 which are found also in
Luke, as shown on the next two pages.
^
2 Tim iv. ii
Philem 24. From Dr. Hobart's work
Cf. Col iv. 14
on The Medical Language of St. Luke (Dublin, 1882) may be selected some
forcible indications that the writer of Luke and Acts was an iarpds
;

(Col

iv.

14).

Statistics

190

and Observations

Pt. III.

B, Referring to the lists of 'characteristic words and

phrases of the three Synoptists given on pp. 4-23, we see
that of the 95 of Matthew, 48, or slightly more than half,
'

are found in Paul;

less

than

of Mark,

of the 41

half, are found in Paul

19,

or slightly

of the 151 of Luke, 99, or

very nearly two-thirds, are found in Paul.

Thirty-two words found

in

Matthew

('with

or without

Div.

I.

IV

and Observations

Statistics

192

Words marked
or Mark or John
that the

thus

there

are found in Acts also.

is

words are found

no

Pt. iii.

[As to Matthew

significance or importance in the fact

in Acts also

but

it

is stated

for the sake

of comparison with Luke, in which case the fact does require to be

noticed.]
in Pastoral Epistles.

t Only

Note on the Relatmt betweeft Ltike, Acts, Paul,

and Hebrews.
It

is

also interesting

notice, as

to

an additional link

between Luke, Acts, and Paul, that they are very much
more closely connected in language with the Epistle to the
Hebrews than the other Gospels are. The following figures

show

this

Four words are found only

and ravpos, which are

(vBvfiTjais

in

Matthew and Hebrews

also in Acts

Mark and Hebrews

Five words are found only in

none which are also in Acts).

Sixteen words are found only

in

(there being^

Luke and Hebrews

nine which are also in Acts).

Four words are found only in John and

(besides

').

Hebrews

(besides

(besides fx0s,

is also in Acts).

which

Twenty-two words are found only in Acts and Hebrews.

Hebrews.
Forty-six words are found only in Paul and

be well to give the words, so far as concerns the

Gospels and Acts
In Matthew and Hebrews only
iXtiifuov, tXtas, awriXeia, rpi^oXos.
In Mark and Hebrews only: ajrojSoXXw, /Sajrrtcr/ios, (K(i)ofios,
It

may

fVKaipos, oXoKaiiTafia.

In Luke and Hebrews:

ypdcfiopxii,

dvop66ci>\,

darpovl, Sta^aiVw

rJXos X,lfparfia,

opai J,

J,

avmTtpov,

Stari'^e/xat J

dnaWda-aaX, dno-

eKKdira, ivoxXfa, fvdf tos,

IXdaKopai, Xvrpmais, ftiroxos, TraXai6(0, navTeXTis,jrapaXv-

napirjfit, napoiKto), TroXt'rijs J,

irSppadev, avvavrdo} J, TfXdoxris, (pvm.

16 are in
(The 9 words marked | are also in Acts, the remaining
Luke and Hebrews only.)
vaaanos.
In John and Hebrews only
yr/pdaKO), eXarT<5(, rdxuov (?),
:

On

the mention of Acts see the remark in square brackets above,

applies here also.

which

Div.

St.

IV

I.

Luke's Gospel

In Acts and Hebrews only

deraXeuTOf, ddTelos, ^ofj6(ia,

Kardnavais,

KaiToi,

193

ayicvpa, dvaBexofiai, dva$(a)p(a>, dpxvyogf

eitrei/it, eirrpofios,

7rtoTXXw, fpvdpos, iawTtpos,

in

different

virap^is (see

also the

KaTanava>, KaTa(f)fvya>, Ktcpd'haiov

senses), 6p66s, irapo^va-por, irarpidpx^rjs,

cr;^e8oi',

(but

nine words marked J above).

also be noticed that there are

may

It

{a) nine

words occurring

in

Luke, Acts, Paul, and

Heb

only,

viz. d^ioQ), d(f)i(rTr]Hi, 8iap.apTVpOfJuii, fK^tvyay, Karex^oi,^ opL^a), TrapaKKrjais,

Tvyxdva, xptw

and ten words

[d)

avraTToBidcopi, dnoKtipai,

rd^is, Toivvv

and

(f )

in

Luke, Paul, and

Heb

only, viz. aptpnTos,

diroXvTpacris, Karapyto), Koirrj^ \fiTovpyia, poixds,

"^

it

may be added that there are seventeen words found

and Heb only, viz. dWdaao), dvayKolos, dvirjpi, d(T(f)aKTis,

in Acts, Paul,

eppeva (in Paul and

with

;^tpwi/),

TTiKpia,

nov

Heb

XfiTOvpyea,

from LXX),
ptToKap^dvoi,^

(?), npo(T(f>opd, crKXrjpvixo,

ivTvyxdva),
vvvi,

enldfo-is^

TTtpiaipfco^

(always

nfpiepxopai,^

{motrrtWco,

But such cases are much fewer when we turn to the other
Gospels, there being none in Matthew, Acts, Paul, and Heb

and two in Matthew, Paul, and Heb only, viz. fxera/xeand TrpeW one in Mark, Acts, Paul, and Heb only,
TTapabi^opt-ai,^ and one in Mark, Paul, and Heb only, viz.

only,

Xo/xai
viz.

avafxtjxvria-KOi)

avoo, Soopea,

three in John, Acts, Paul, and

'KL9dC(t>,

and two

in

Heb only, viz.

Heb only,

John, Paul, and

viz. (Kdcrcrcav, Xarpeta.^

^
2

For Kartixero in Jn v. 4 is not reckoned.

See also the references to napa = beyond on p.
The Pauline employment of these four words is

45.
in the Pastoral Epistles

only.
*

If

with Tisch

here, and

Heb

we

read rdxftov in

Tim

iii.

withdrawn from the above short

only.

14, that
list

word must be added

of words in John and

Statistics

194

and Observations

Pt.

in.

Division II

ON THE SMALLER ADDITIONS

The

'

peculiar

GOSPEL

portions of St. Luke's Gospel, which are

and which amount to about 499

are those which seem to imply the use of a source

enumerated on
verses,^

IN ST. LUKE'S

p.

15,

or sources (probably written) which Matthew and Mark did

not use. But, besides them, there are many shorter passages

Gospel to which the other Synoptists have no

The most important of these amount to about
parallels.
this

in

13 verses, viz.

Lk

iii.

i,

5,

15

18

19^, 20^;;

iv.

a; i^b\ 14 ; 15; v. 17 <^; 39; vi. ii; lib; 17 a; S3>

vii.
viii.
20, 21
29, 30
34, 37 (5, 38
3 , 4, 5, 6, 7 10
I

iSa; 2S b, zg a 4.3, 44. a x. 8 b 25, 26 xi.

41
44 45, 46 a 53, 54 xii. la andb; zgb;
36 40,
33^1 3.5-; 41; 52; 54, 55(?)'; xiii. 22,23; '^5-7

12 b;
;

ix. 9

3a,

20-2 30 37 a; xviii.
4; 5
16
XX.
xix.
b; 20 b; 26 a; 3$ ay
28;
37;
31^; 34; 43^;
xxi.
12
a; 18; 19; 21(^,22; 2^b; 26 a
36(^,38^; 39;

xiv.

25

XV. 3;

xvii. 3 b,

34-6
4& b 49
;

31^

7,

a; 15 19 /^, 20 40
66
a 67, 68 xxiii. 2
6^\

xxii. 3

61 a

43.

44

45

<^

4-6 14-16
34 45 ^ 48 51 ^ 53 b\ 56 xxiv. 4a 5b;
Ha; II; 12; 36b', 40; 5^^', 52^.
If these 113 verses are added to the 499, the number is
',

22

3^

^,

23

612, being

more than

half the 1,149 verses in the Gospel.^

An

attempt, which can only be tentative and to a large

extent speculative,'^ will now be made to classify these
smaller additions, and to suggest a possible or probable

account of them.
Including, of course, the 132 verses of chapters i and ii.
In Westcott, Introd. to Study of Gospels, p. 195 (8th ed.,
pecuhar matter in Luke is estimated at 59 per cent.
1

It is

on

this account that

it

has been placed so

similar examination of the minor additions in

materials for such classification.

late in the

Matthew

1895),

the

book.

failed to

supply

SL Lukes Gospel

Div. II

195

()

Luke may have

Matthew

retained, while

omits, the occasions of

Lk xi.
sayings which they drew from a common source
^
xvii. 5
20-2
46 a ; xii. 41 xiii. 22, 23 ; xiv. 25 xv. 3
in
26.
the
hst
x,
xi.
on
also
25,
37, 38,
perhaps
(Compare
:

and

45,

37 a

15

p.

see p. 161.)

Luke may have

retained the original narrative in

while Matthew, after his manner, shortened

vii.

3a,

The

4, 5, 6,

20, 21.

7a; 10;

may be

following

(See

Lk

it:

its

vi.

from other sources

later insertions

v.

193, 20; 43, 44

34 a; xxiv. 12; 36

xxiii.

(?)

p. 158.)

WH in single or double brackets Lk

are placed by

fullness,

17 a

39

they

xxii.

a.

40; 51^; 52

{d)

The

either independent traditions, or variants

may be

following

of traditions preserved also elsewhere

xi.

32);

xii.

Mk

xiii.

2, 3

is

40, 41

Mt

(cf.

34-6)

xvi.
;

xxiii.

52

xiii.

13

3,

(cf.

viii.

Mt

(cf.

Mt

x.

Lk

vii.

36)

xviii. 2

30

Mt

(cf.

(cf.

22

(cf.
;

Mt

xxi.

vii.

Mt

xxi.

xxiii.

27, 28);
xxv. 6 and

[perhaps 54, 55,

25-7
1

29,

Mt

(cf.

15); 35-8

xiii.

;]

26); 44

25,

Mk

6;

accepted as genuine

II, 12); xvii. 3

Mk

(cf.

Mt

(cf.

22,

if

Mt

23

xvi.

xxv.

Mt xxiv.

h).

(e)

the additions which

Among

prayerfulness which

Lk

vi.

12

(5

ix.

is

may be

assumed

18 a; 28

d,

editorial,

some bring out

the

be the constant habit of Jesus

v. 16; xi.
See also iii. 21
29 a.
to

i.

(/)
Others emphasize the right use of wealth, the duty of liberality,
Lk vi. 33, 34, 37 d, 38 a xii. 32, 33 a and the mention of
&c.
:

leaving

named on
xvi.

allm
p.

v.

11 and 28.

15,

Lk

vi.

1-12, 14, 15, 19-31

Perhaps also verses

i,

(Compare, among the longer passages

24-6; xii. 13-21 ; xiv. 1-14; 28-33;
and perhaps viii. 1-3.)

2: but

cf.

Mt

29, 30.

ix.

10, 11

Mk

ii.

15,

16;

Lk

v.

and Observations

Stattsttcs

196

Pt. in.

{g)

Other such additions

effect

they

of the narrative.

may be examined

Lk

ill.

18 TToXXa

iii.

19 ^ KoX

iii.

20 a

iv. 1 5 Koi

fifv

Trepi

may
The

be described as merely heightening the

words of them are given here, so that

together

ovv Koi ere pa napaKaXcov evrjyyeXi^ero top Xaov

ndfTccv hv

{Troirjirev novrjpcbv

*.

6 'HpdBrjs.

TrpoaedrjKfv koI tovto eVl ttcktiv.

avTos f8i8(i<TKv eV rais avvnycoyais avraVf 8o^a^6fifvos vno

navTOiv f.

\.

vi.

IJ b Koi dvvctfus Kvpiov ^p tls to Icurdai airop.

11 a avTol be inXTjcrdrjaap dpoias.

43 ^ ^e'rr\T](r<T0PT0 Sc ndpTes eVi rrj jifyaXeioTrjTi tov 6fov

43 d TvapTOiP 8e Bavfia^oprap eVl naaip ols eVot'ei t.

ix.

ix.

,,

xi. 53j

54

Koi

^P^CLVTO oi ypafjifxarfis koi 01 ^apiaraloi Stipas fpexdP

dTro(rTOiiaTiC(ip

drjpfvcrai tc k

xii.

I".

avTop

TrXeioPciP, fPe8p(voPTfs

TTfpt

tov (TTOfiaTOS

avrop

aiirov.

a fniavpaxBiKxSiP Tap fivpidSap tov o^Kov, &aT

KOTaTraTfiv

dWrjXovs.
,,

43 ^ '^'*' '"^^^ ^ \aos I8a}p tScoxei/ aipop rm 6(a> t.

37 rjp^nfTO dirap to ttK^Bos tS)P fiadrjTcip )^a'ipoPTS
(fxopfj p.(yd\r} nepl naamp S)p dSop 8vpdpK0P t.

xviii.

xix.

xxii.

61 a Koi

xxii.

65 Koi Tepa TroXXa

xxiii.

48

TtJP,

xxiv. 4

,,

xxiv. 5 ^

Kvpios ipe^Xt^fp toj IleTpa.

^\a(r(j)t]poiiPTfs

eXfyop

els

avTOP

*.

Koi TrdvTef 01 (Tvpnapayepopupoi oxXoi inl ttjp deapiap rav-

(TTpa(})e\s 6

aipfip tov 6f6p

TVTTTOPTtS TO OTTjdt] V7re(Trpe^0I'.

Koi iyipiTO tp tc5 dnopfia-dai avTas irepl tovtov,

''''

KXipovaap to Trpoa-ama

(Is ttjp yrjp.

with one another the passages marked * and t respectively, and observe the use of nds or airas 10 times in these
17 short passages; also in v. 17 c.

Compare

Perhaps some other additions, which have been left for class (t),
might also have been placed here, e. g. Lk iii. 15 ; xx. 20 (5 26 a;
;

xxiii.

53

l>.

(^)

The

following seem

Luke because

to

be Pauline expressions, introduced by

so familiar to himself

'
:

Lk

12 d

viii.

(tva

/jtrj

nurrfi-

The only similarities named here are some of those in which the Epistles
seem to have suggested the language of the Gospel in numerous other
cases the reverse of this appears to me more probable e. g. in i Cor vii. 34 f.
^

there
I

Cor

is
iv.

almost certainly a reminiscence of Lk x. 39-41 and in Rom xii. 14,

12 of Lk vi. 28 (ivKoytirf not being genuine in Mt v. 44). The use of

d6(Ttiv in I

Thes

iv.

8 and

Lk

x. 16

may have

originated in either.

Luke's Gospel

St.

Div. II

197

8 3 compared with I Cor X. 27 nav to napanwhere the words are almost identical, though
6ffjivov vfiiv eadUrf,
the object of the precept is different ; xx. 1 6 3 (fifj yivoiro being used

(Tavm

(Tcodcba-iv)

X.

only here, and Paul 14)

(al(j>vi8ios

Col

i.

(TTiaTaTai'KTX.)

And

13.

xxi.

18 recalls

xxi.

34-6 compared with i Thes v. 3,

53 ^ ^ i^ovaia tov (tkotovs aS in
St. Paul's spoken words as recorded

xxii.

in Acts xxvii. 34.

also, in

(Thus

one of the longer passages peculiar to Luke, ch.

reminds us of I Thes V. 16, 17 irdpTOTe

iravTore npocrfiixfaOai

xviii. I

Xniptre^ abiaKfiizTOii TTpo(TV)(eu6e.)

(0
Other additions, of various kinds, which

Lk

probably
date)

6 (lengthening a quotation)
44 <z;
luravoiav) ; ix. 9 (5 1

V.

32

5,

(fts

iii.

i,

may be

regarded as

the
(historical introduction fixing

editorial

\v. i

15;

xi.

36 I
45 which

a*
xii.

13^; 14a*;
2gb', xvii. 30;

is parallel to Mk ix.
;
34 (almost repeating ix.
xxi. 12 a;
32) ; xix. 28; XX. 20 3 26 a; 35 a |, 36 3 J, 38 3 J ; 39
21 b; 22 + ; 25 3, 26 a; 37, 38 ; xxii. 3 a (cf. Jn xiii. 27) ; 15 | ;

xviii.

31 3

40; 453

0770

T^r

4-6; 14-16 1; 22
(cf.

Jn

xix.

41); 56

Compare

t These

XvTTj;?
b,
;

);

23;

45

48 3;
fl

66 a; 67,68;

49;

(tov r)Kiov iKKu-noinos)

xxiv. 7, 8 a;

xxiii. 2

51a; 53

11.

these two with one another.

two are connected

with,

and

account of Jesus being sent to Herod in

partly caused

by,

the

xxiii.

7-12.
here may be derived
other
included
These
and
X
perhaps
sayings
from a special source, written or oral.

An

instance of

Luke 'sparing

the Twelve'

see p. 121, note.

Statistics

198

and Observations

APPENDIX A TO PART
(see p.

pt.

in

III

135)

THE SYNOPTISTS AND THE SEPTUAGINT

The

LXX

degree of familiarity of the Synoptists respectively with the

to some extent be inferred from the proportions of the

may

words peculiar

and

mark

to

each of them which the

LXX

contains and does

of the words confined to each Gospel

to Acts have been drawn up on the following pages, the

Therefore

not contain.^

lists

LXX

being placed against those which are not found in the

(including of course the apocryphal as well as the canonical books).''*
Judged by this test, Mark is considerably the least familiar with

LXX for out of the 71 words peculiar to him, as many as 31,

being about five-twelfths, or not very much less than one-half, are
the

marked *.
Matthew occupies an intermediate place

for in this case there

are 112 peculiar words, out of which 36, or slightly less than one-

marked *.
Luke shows most

third, are

familiarity with the

LXX,

for in his

Gospel

there are 261 peculiar words, of which only 73, being about twosevenths, or rather more than one-fourth, are marked *.

And

if

we take with

which occur

in

it

and

the words peculiar to the third Gospel those

nowhere else, the whole number

in Acts, but

amounts to 319, out of which 80, or almost exactly one-fourth,

are marked *.
It is true that among the 413 words peculiar to Acts a larger
'
This is by no means the only test. I have ascertained, though the proofs
cannot be given here, that the characteristically Lucan expressions (pp. 16 ff.)
are in very much more frequent use in LXX than the Matthaean, and these
again in considerably more frequent use than the Marcan. See, for instances,

the notes on 'ItpovaaXi)^ (p. i8), ei'/xt with dative (pp. 38 f.), and oiipavos,
In Plummer's Contnieniary will be found numerous notices
f.).

ovpavoi (pp. 52

of Luke's 'Hebraisms' (see the Index, s. v. Hebraisms); and if these are

carefully examined it will be found that in very nearly, if not quite, every
case they agree with the LXX, and therefore do not imply any knowledge
of

Hebrew or Aramaic.
The other Greek versions

of the O. T. are not taken into account.

Appx.

The Synoptists and

the Septuagint

199

proportion is absent from the LXX, for 154, being more than
But the list of the words will
one-third of them, are marked *.

show

that this excess is completely accounted for by the difference

of subject-matter, which in Acts calls for the use of many nautical
and other terms for which there was no occasion in narratives of

which the scene was almost exclusively Palestinian.

Words marked t
The figures 2, 3,

are non-Classical

see p. 207.

&c., in the following lists

mean

word

that the

many times in the Gospel to which it is peculiar the

absence of any figure implies that the word occurs only once.
Proper names, numerals, and Hebrew or Aramaic words are
occurs so

omitted.

Words peculiar
SixdCco

dyyos

Matthew.

to

65 KaTairovTt^ofiai 3
KTJros

fy pais

"f*
KoplSayds
Kovarcudia * f 3

35 eyicpvvTOJ

dyKiarpov
aOwoi (? 2)

(idta
*

5 alfMOppoea)

Kpvipaioi 2

fiprjvoiToios

70 KVfUVOV

aiperi^a)
*

* 2
dxpiPoco

40

10 dva^iPd^oj

Acts)

fxeraipu 2

fMfTomeaia 4
*

f^opici^a}

dvairios 2

(^(jjTfpos

75 fuKiop

fxtcrOoofxai 2

fmyafiPpfvo) f

vofna/xa

45 imKadi^oj

dndyxo/Jiai
diroviiiTcxi
1

iixmtrprjixi (?

voaaiov

(irtopicea}

5 fiapxiripLos

imatrdpo)

(?)

o'lKereia

80

ipevyoftai

PaTTaXoyiu

^poxh t

ipi<piov (?

Lk)

Sdviov (Sdi'eioj'Tisch)
Suva *

nayiSevo}

(??)

evvofoi

25

twov\i^<x)

^t^dviov

5iaHco\vco

Oavfjidaios

SiaWdcrcrofmi

Bepiarfis 2

Staaacpico 2

Ov(jl6o(uu

SiSpaxi^ov 2

'f'

*
napojAoid^aj (?)
* 2
napoipis
(? l)

f 8
7roA.vA.07ia

90

irpoPifid^o}
irpofpOdvot]

60 lana *

nvppd^w

KaOd
30

85 irapaOaXdaaios

55 eipvxcpos
SiaKaOapi^o}

"I"

ovSanws

iraTpoi 3

(vUa

Scd/icov

o'lKiaKOS *

bXiyomaria
* 6
ovap

ipi^ai

("

50
20

/xa\aicia 3

fvOv/xeofiai 2

dfpiP\r]crrpov

dvrjdov

KWVOJ\f/

(ixiropia

ditixriv

2 (??)

pairi^ai 2

* 2

SlfT-fjS

KadrjyrjT-qs

* 2
&(7Td^ai

KaTadf/xaT't^co

KaraiMvOdvco

aayrjVT]

95

*
afXrjvid^o/xai
(TtTiaTUS *

200
arariip

Statistics
*

and Observations

pt. Ill

Appx.

The Synoptists and

Total 71, of which 31 are marked

marked + as being non-Classical.

Of

the above 71 words,

the Septuagint

201

LXX, and

19 are

as not in

60 are only used once

7 are

used twice

and 4 are used three times or oftener, and are therefore treated
among the 'characteristic words and phrases', pp. 12, 13.
Besides numerals, proper names, and 5 Aramaic words (p. 130),
*
is excluded from this list as being only found in the

^awio-t/iof

Appendix

(xvi. 18),

and

f$ov8tvf<o

f as being only another form of

f^ovdfveo}.

in

Perhaps neC^ should be added, as ireCoi may be the right reading

Mt xiv. 13. KuTrrw is omitted, because it occurs also in Perk,

de Adult.,

Jn

viii.

6,

(?).

Words peculiar
ar(Ka.\r\

to

Luke (Gospel

only).

202

Statistics

KaraK\iv(ij 5

fKKpffiofiai (or -a/jiai)

fKflVKTTJpi^O}

and Observations
vapakioi

135 KaTOKprifivi^ai

lT<A.ecw 2

fcaraXiOa^oj

irapefji0i\\<u (?)

napOtvia

aTa7rAe'w *

f/x)3(iA.Acu

napaT^pTjffis

Karavevoj *
*
90 eKKoof^ai

pt. Ill

185

aTa(n;/>a)

TTtStJ'OS

TTfJ'tXpOX

140 KaTaa<j>a^o}

95 fVHVOS

Ktpafxos

ntpiHVKKooj
*

nfpiaiT&ofiai
*
irrjyavoy

Koirp'ia

wadpoi^o fiat *

Kovpiov

iifaiTfo} 2

195

enavepxofiai 2

/copos
1

eTretSrjTTfp

50

KpaiTtaKr)

npayfiarfvopiai

(jcpfir.

vpeafifia 2

lepvirrrj

npaKTcup 2

*
kiriKpivco

irj'a<ijo'

vX.rip.fi.vpa

WH)

littiaipxoijuu

105 fm\eix(o

TTfpiotKOS

145 Kkiaia

(^aaTpdirro)

190 TtipiOlKiCU*

K\ividiov * 2

f^airio/iai

TTfpiKpVTtTOJ

KipaTiOV

fvvevoj

100

KaTa\pvx<^

Kap-npaii

200

*
TTpofJifKeTdoj

irpoaavafiaivoj

KeTos

firitropfvoftai

55 ^^Pos

ewiaiTifffiSi

no

(liVOVV
fXfpiarrjs

(iKpopto)

115

60

/xm
2

e<p7]ii(pia

npo<f>(poi 2

^yfixovfvoj

2 (1)

irToiofxai 2

vTvaaoj *

/xvXiKos

^1)705 2

Trpoffif/avw

fiiffOios

npoffpTiyvvfii

fitTfcopi^opiat

(?)

euep7tT7ys

irpoaTTOifOfnai

205

tTrtCTX'^'"

iirixtoo

(vye

irpoafpya^OfMi

\vfftTf\(a}

em<rTciTr]s 7

vpoahaitavao)

210

firjyfxa

voaaia

c6.\os

voaa6s

a'lKfpa

165 oSevw
fftTtVTOS 3

o'lKOyOflfM

120 Oecopia

dopvfia^w

70 6proy

opOpi^o)

(??)

(opi'(JsWH)

220 airapyavoo)
ovCTta 2

(??)

130

tffwy

arrpaTOirfdov
*

*
*

avyKvpia

KaraSfOj

235 avKapivoi

iTaviT\r)6ti

avKO/xopia

TrapdSofos

Kara^aais

avyyfvii

7raj'Sox*<'

TravSoxf^^

crriyfiri

6<^pvy

175
2(T(i77Xos

ffAcSAov

125 Bvpuao)
iSpus

OKiprao) 3

OltTOS

t
1

0p6pPos

OKaVTM

ovfiSoi

Brjpfvoj

215 atTojxfrpiov

onfipos^

vapaKaOi^ofxai

180 vapaKa\virro(uu

avKixpavTta) 2

avWoyi^ofuit

The Synoptists and the Septuagint

Appx.A

TtrpanXoos

avfjujxnivia

230 avvufu

(7/0

awKaKviTTO)
avvKaTaTiOffiai

Tpavfia

<ppoviixcos

rpvyuv

LXX)

(adj.

virepfKxvwoixai f

XOpoi

vnoKpivofxat

Xpau

avvmirTO)

vTtoarpctivvvcti

avvrvyxavoj

vwoxoopfw

Xpeo<pei\T7]9
*
\pwxoJ i"

235 (rvvrrapayivofiai

260

Of

(piXoveiKia

Total 261, of which 73 are marked

marked

<pdTvr]

240 TfTpaapx*"'* t

{tcixpTjfu)

oJof

250 (pdpay^

avv<pvofiai

Tt\(a(pop(Oj

in

245 vSpaimKos

avvoSia

255 XP^

vypos

avvKviTTw

203

as not in

LXX, and 38

are

t as being non-Classical.

these 261 words, 221 are only used once

5 are used three times

therefore treated

30 are used twice ;

and are

5 are used four times or oftener,

the

among

'

characteristic

words and phrases

',

pp. 16-23.

There
fxoyis,

in

much

also

is

evidence for dmnTva-a-a),

but they are not in

App.

to

Mark

both

t?i

Luke and Ads, hut peculiar

+I

fVfSpevoj

dvaSt'iKWiii

fviaxvo

dva^TjTea) 2 I
*
dvaKaOi^ct}

fifjs 2

(UKpcoveoD

dvivpioKoi

lwjxip<u

dvTtiirov

iavepa

2+3

iaais

2+1

15 tuaxvpiiopiai

iXaiuvf
ivavTi
2

45

(1) 2

trfpiKd/XTTM

irponoptvojuai

irpoaSoKta
vpo'inrdpxo'

50 arpaTTjyoi

arparid

+3

avvapTrd^oj

+2

+8

+2

(?)

avyytveia

* 2

1+3
avv^dXXdv 2+4

+3

KaTamnro}

+1

+2

npo^dWa)

55 avv(i(u

((>') (?)

ffvywXijpoai 2

KaraKoKovOfO}

+2

+1

Tpav/xari^aj

Tpax^s

K\aats *

Total 58, of which

marked

35 Ka06Ti 2+4
KaraKXfioj

o kvavTiov 3

+
1+3
2

1 + 2
+2
+3

Ka6irifii 1

Sto5ei;cu

SovXt] 2

KaOe^TJi

SiaTTjptco

them.

oSwdo/xat 3

6a/xPos

to

dfiiKfoa 2

30 fvTovaJs

diTOTivdaffaj

StiaTTj/jii

(v\aPTj9

dwoypacpTj

and

being also

napafiid^o/xat

dvacftaivofiai

Lk)

(??

+3

25 fmPt0a(a}

Sianopicij*

t,

XoifJLOS

eiTfiSov

5 dvaaitdu

10 dnoSfxop-CLi

BXaTrrca is omitted,

text.

(xvi. 18).

Words found
aiTiov * 3

WH's

daiTepoTrpcoros

40 KpariffTos
7 are

marked

t as being non-Classical.

+3
*

as not in

LXX, and

two are

Statistics

204

and Observations

Pt. Ill

Where no numbers are given, there is but one occurrence of the

in Luke and one in Acts, which is the case in 30 instances

word

out of the 58.

There
though

is

it

also coiisiderable evidence for drarpe^w in

is

not adopted by

WH.

occurring also in Perk, de Adult., Jn

Words peculiar

"OpOpos
viii. 2.

to

Acts.

is

Luke

omitted,

iv.

16,

because

Appx.

The Synoptists and the Septuagtnt

*

KardaxfCis

(irtyivofiat

115 (yic\r]na

tinZr}pL(oi

iSa<f>os

(laKaXeofjMi

165

imKeWu*

Kara^tpw

(kSotos

*
5 /COTt5wA.0S

emvfvaj

KaTf^iffTTJpU

krrivoia

KUTOlKla

Koiriiv

220 KoXvufidoj*
KoKwvia *

kiriaTpotpi]
i-iri<r<pa\r]i

*
(KKOXV/Jlfido}

175

KOViTOS

fin<l>av^s

KOV(pi^aj

fpeiSoj

(Knrjdaou

eaOrjffis

130 (KirXtai*

"t*

(iriTpomi

i Kir i into)

KrijToip

XafxirpoTTjs

180 fv6v/^os
*

fv9vpais

iKTap&aao}
135 eKT fvfia

230

\6yios

((paWo/Mi
*

ffiixaivoiJiai

KvTpuT-fjs

eveSpa

fiayia

CriTTjpa

6(op,dxos

(virvio)

eipprj

paKpoOvpiws
*

195

150 (^o\(0p(vofiaif

lep6av\os

fteyaKuos

iVirevs

pie<X7]p0pia

pearoopai
245 pLeraPdWopai

leaOoKov

pLiTaicaXiopm

KaKuats

pfTaTTtpLiropai

200 Kap5toyvw(TTT]s * f
f^virvos

Kapno(p6pos

KarayytXivs
155 inaKpoaofiai

160

KaTaKKrjpovo/xfw f
205 KaraXoiTTOS

Karavvaaojiai
KarapiOfiiu

(iru/xt

Karaada)
Karaffocpi^opLat

210 KaTaffTfWo}

250 prjSapais
piaOojpa

KwraZ'iKrj

(Trav\i$

imPov\Ti

pLiTOlKl^aj

ptTpiojs

infyfipai

iirticftva

240 pavrevopai

KaOrifxtpivds

iirapxtia

p-avia

KaOdtTTco *

iiravayKis

ptaffTi^o}

Ivvvviov

f^OpKiaTTjS

pae^rpia

6I/T0ir0S*

fvcjri^ofiai

f'

235 fMy(va)*

Oapaoi
190 Oed

iV(6s

Xvpaivopai

145

185 ixxppocvvrj

^evKTTjpia

40

kifir/v

\i\p

evpaKvkaiv

(Xfvais *

\l0fpTlVOS

einopia

(Kipvxo^

Ajr/s

tvnopfOfxai

fKTiOffiai

XdffKoi

(vdvSpofXfo)

tKir\r}pwais
fKffu^ai (?)

225 XaKTi^oa*

fVfpytria)

(KTr\r)p6<o

"t*

K\ivdpiov

kiriaTTj pi^co

enOanPos
125 (kO(tos*

70 ImaKevd^ofMt

(Kuae

+
f

Karatftpovqrrjs
2

imp,e\(ia

fKSirjyeofiai

Kararpexo^

eniKovpia

120 tKPoXrj

205

-]

poaxotrouo)
vavKXrjpos

vavs

255 rfavms
vecoKopos
*

vrjoiov

oSoivopioj

2o6

Statistics

oOovt]

260

and Observations
*

vpoKtjpvaao)

oiKfj/xa

310

6\oK\r]pia

355

opyvid

opoOtaia

70

315

irpoaairei\(Ofxai

avvKarwpr](pi(oimi
avvKividi *

vpoaSeoijuxi

f
*

npoOKXivopiai

avvofjiiKfu
avvofioptai

7r/)o(rweii/os

ox^eofiai

irpo(i(pa.Tws

naOrjTos

320

awroftajs

nportivo}

avvTpo<pos

TTporpftrofuu

avvxfco, -xwvoj

rrpoxfipoToi/eoj

npZpa

275 Ttapa^aKKo)

325 VpdjTWS
*

a<pdyiov
*
a(pvSp6i'

375 raKTos
*

irapairXfO}

^a^dovxos

irapaarjfios

pqSiovpyrjfia

iraparv^X&voi
napaxftf^dCf^O'

prjTCop

TeKpLripiov

TfffaapaKovTafTTjs
*

TlflOJpfO)

(Tf^affTOS

335 crimpios

TOtXOS

f
*

rrarpwos
*

aifiiKivOiov

TpifTia

f
385

vfpiaarpartToi

mpiKpar-qs

aKfvTj

(?)

aKa}\r]K6BpojTos

vepiixevo)

antp/xoXoyos

295 iripii*

390

345

iiirovofo]

avyxvaii

Trifxirprjixi

avpi//r)(pi(oi

300 nXSos

vnoTtXioj *

<yr(p(6<u

TTipirpiltO}

395 viroTp(x<u*
<f>avraaia

awaOpoi^ai

(pdats

350 awaWaffcai

vvofi

nop<pvp6n(u\is

305

vnonvfca *

nviKrSi *

iroXiTapxrjS

v-rroPd\\(u
vito^ojvvvpLi

*
vepipriyvvfii

vnrjpfTfoa

(TTffX/xa

iffptoxv

vntpwov

ancKT/poTpaxiJ^os

"f"

iiTrfpffSoj'

340 aKTjvonoioi

-^

Tponoipopicij

TVCJlUVlKOS

neipdofiai

nepaiTepaj

rpiarfyoi

aiTiov

iTf^evo)

380 TtTpdhiov

aav'is

*
*

irapoTpvvco

rdxiora

puvvvfiat

285 wapevox^ioJ
napoixofiai

rdpaxos
*

330 paSiovpyia

irapaTfivo)

CX^V

irvpd

napavoixio}

290

a(f>o5pws

Trvdcov *

TrapdKffOjxat

280

370 avaTpo<pr]

TrpajTO(TTaTT)s

irapaiv foj

(Twcufiooia

vapaOewpiofiai

")

awiTfpiKa/jifiava)

irpox^i-pi-Coixai

iravTri

365 awiriyu

iTpoffaiiTo\T]fj.irTr}s

vavoiKii

(TWTrdpufii

360 awo^tvai f

irpoaXaKeoj

npocrnriyvvfxi

ipiXavOpuiirojs

<pi\6ao<poi

avvSpofi^

avvfntriOffiai

rrpijvi^s

vpoKaTayfiWo)

awKOfi'i^oj

ovpavoOiv

ox^^oiroieai

avvKaTafiaivu

npoaeaoj

(^vyOpviTToj

npoopaw

7rpocFK\r]p6o/Mi

265 oTTTavoiiai \

pt. Ill

400

<pi\o(pp6yais

awfiTOfiat

<ppvd<Taoj

avveipiaTTjfit

(ppvyavov

Appx.

The Synoptists and the Septuagmt

(pvXaKi^oj

207

2o8

and Observations

Statistics

APPENDIX

TO PART

Pt.

in

III

(seep. 143)

THE ALTERATIONS AND SMALL ADDITIONS IN WHICH

MATTHEW AND LUKE AGREE AGAINST MARK
Among

the

183 sections

which Tischendorf divides

into

his

'
Synopsis Evangelica, there are 68 which afford opportunities for
of
all
three Synoptic Gospels.
comparing parallel portions

But of these 68 there are 10

(viz.

14, 15, 17, 47,^ 50, 56, 75,

III, 134, 139) in which a considerable amount of matter, chiefly

consisting of discourse, is found in Matthew and Luke, while it is

absent from Mark.

seems reasonable, therefore,

It

most of them

in these sections, or in

possibly

1 7

to

suppose that

perhaps 14 and

(for

must be otherwise accounted

for

'),

and

the editors of

Matthew and Luke turned to the Matthaean Logia, or some other

such document (Q), in search of additional matter which should
contain more of the teaching of Jesus than was supplied by Mark.*
There remain 58 of Tischendorf s sections which can be almost
entirely accounted for by a free use of the Marcan source, with
occasionally some short insertions made by Matthew and Luke
independently of one another. These sections may be thus subdivided into three classes
^

There would have been

opposite to

Mk

xii.

28-34

69,

Mt

if,

xxii.

in

Lk

132,

34-40, as

it is

x.

25-7 had been printed

in Synopticon, p. 88.

*
With 47, cf. 91 Tischendorfs arrangement is here less clear and
See Synopticon, pp. 17, 18.
satisfactory than usual.
'
It may be that these sections, or at any rate 14, 15, were abbre:

viated

by a subsequent editor of Mark

to the public ministry of Jesus,

(see p. 152) because they

with which

this

Gospel

is

were

prior

mainly con-

cerned.

There may probably have been a similar reference to Q when 49,

were being drawn up, though we happen to have in them no important cases of agreement between Matthew and Luke. For Mt xxi.
44 is probably not genuine.
*

128, 138

Appx.
a.

Agreements of Matthew and Luke

There are

7 sections (viz. 25, 29, 33, 142, 147,

which there

in

209

148, 159)

no instance of Matthew and Luke agreeing

is

against Mark.
b.

There are 30 other sections

(viz.

16, 35, 36, 38, 39, 40,

143,

48, 51, 52, 73, 109, 114, 116, 118, 128, 130, 131, 133, 138,

144, 145, 146, 153, 157, 161, 162, 163, 164, 166) in which slight
verbal agreements of Matthew and Luke against Mark are not

have noted about 100' of them (including some

infrequent.

which extend only to portions of words, such as Mt xx. 30 irapayf t,

Lk xviii. 37 ijapepxfrat and Mt xxvi. 20 AvIkhto, Lk xx. 14 &.vii7t(Tfv).
But they can all be explained, with more or less probability, by one
;

Either (a) they consist of words so ordinary and

that the use of

of three causes.

and so nearly synonymous with Mark's

colourless

them may be merely accidental

against

Mk

Mk

xii.

37

xii.

22

Xeyf')j or

explanations as

it

(e.g. the additions

(/3)

and
of

they are such obvious amplifications or

for any writers to introduce

Mt

of idavfxaaav in

viii.

27; Lk

viii.

25; of

Mt xii.
in Lk vi.

vci Mt Ix.
Lk v.
of
7
Lk vi. i of iiovois in Mt xii. 4 and fiovovs
Mt xxi. 38 Lk xx. 14) or (y) they are changes

26

Koi fjcrdiov in

IdovTfs in

Mt xxii. 27 Lk xx. 32 vaTtpov"^

45; Lk xx. 44 koKu. against

xxii.

would be natural

Tov oiKov avTov

tj

(e. g,

Mt

etrxaroj/;

koI ia-dieiv in

i,

to a

usual Hellenistic vocabulary and style from the

and unusualness of Mark. This last is
harshness
comparative
the
be given of the great majority of these
account
to
probably
as
be
seen
agreements,
by an examination of pages 131 ff. of
may

more smooth and

'

'

need only be pointed out here that the most numerof

course the most unimportant, of such identities are
though
caused by the strong preference of Mark for the historic present
book.

this

It

ous,

(p.

143),

result
c.

and

from

for

km rather than

Se (p.

150),

and

that not

a few

his sparing use of conjunctions, &c. (p. 137).

There remain 21

sections (viz. 37, 49, 53, 58, 59, 70, 71,

72, 115, 122, 124, 126, 154, 155, 156, 165, 167, 169, 171, 172,
In these I have noted about 118 ^ agreements of Matthew
173).

and Luke against Mark which are of the same kinds as those
to in the preceding paragraph (b), and for which the

referred

three explanations there suggested

at any rate if there were no other

y) would be adequate,
such agreements to be con-

(a, ^,

Only approximate numbers are given, because of various readings.

This word is characteristic of Matthew (p. 8).

HAWKINS

2IO

and Observations

Statistics

But there are others:

sidered with them.

are certain other alterations from,

which

narrative, as to

Pt.iii

in these sections there

and additions

to,

seems almost impossible

it

the

that

Marcan
Matthew

and Luke could have accidentally concurred in making them. In

these cases at least the changes seem to be owing to some influence,
direct or indirect, of a common source, and not to the independent
judgement of two compilers. I append a list of the instances which
to me convey this impression most forcibly, adding references to
the pages of Synopticon, in which they can most easily be examined,
as well as to Tischendorf's sections.^
Tisch. Synop-

1.

Mt

Mt

xiii.

II

Lk

......

37

12

49
53

31

58

37

airw (cf.
and Lk only)

59

40

.....

70

53

71

57

72

60

30 itoXka-nXaaiova, instead of
x. 30
.
.115

71

10 vfuv SeSorat yvwvai ra

viii.

...

v^iTv

4.

Mt
Mt

Mk

of fiaaiXevs as in
\evs in
5.

ixvarripia,

more difficult expression in Mk iv. 11

TO fivaTTjpiov SfSoTcu .
.
.
.
ix. 20 ; Lk viii. 44 rod KfMffrriSov added .
.
xiv. I ; Lk ix. 7 o rerpadpxrjs used of Herod instead

instead of the

3.

Mt xiv,
Lk ix.

Mt

xiv.

though he

vi. 14,

is

ox^ot riKoKovOrjaav avTw

ol

II 01 Se 6x^01 yvovres qKoKovBrjcrav

mention of healing

Mt

7.

Mt

8.

Mt

9.

Mt

10.

Mt

11.

Lk xx. i SiSckxkovtos, where

Mt xxi. 23 SiSaffKOfTi
Mark has no mention of teaching
Mt xxvi. 50 Lk xxii. 48, the fact that Jesus then

xvi. 16

Lk

in Mt(i'. 14)

6.

XffovTos
xvii.

ix. 20, the

........
.......

avTov \a\ovvTos

Lk

17;

Deut xxxii. 5)
xix. 29

use of rov Oeov, though not

same connexion

quite in the
xvii.

Lk

ix.

41

/foi

Lk

ix.

34 ravra 81 avTov

bifarpannivq added

(cf.
.

xviii.

inaTovTaitKaaiova

Mk

....
....

xxi. 17 r]v\ia6r] : Lk xxi. 37 rjiXiCero (but the

are not in quite the same position)
:

words
124

70

126

81

154

no

spoke to Judas, though the words recorded are not

same in the two Gospels

the
*

21

called ySact-

13 KOI aKovffavTfi

also the

12.

Page.

well as to the wine-skins

2.

ticon.

Lk v. 37 iKxvO^fffTcu, whereas in
17 (KXfiTai
ii. 22 the verb dir6K\vTat applies
to the wine as

ix,

Mk

Syn. Ev.

There is a full discussion of this list

pp. 42-58, and a reference to

(Jan. 1909), to which

it

in Prof. Burkitt's Gospel History, Sec,

in /. T. S., x. 174 ff.

by Mr. C. H. Turner

would call attention. I quite agree that textual

and is likely to diminish further, from the force of
several of the instances ; and, on the other hand, I have not been able to
find any others that seem worth adding to them (1909).
I

criticism has diminished,

Appx.

Agreements of Matthew and Luke

211

Tisch SynopSyn. Ev. ticon.

Page.
13.

Mt xxvi. 75 Lk xxii. 62 koX k^eXOiav t^u fKXavaev viKpSis,

where Mk xiv. 72 has fm^aXoiv fK\auv. But
bracket the words in Luke, where they are omitted
;

WH

by some important Latin

authorities

17.

Mt xxvi. 68 Lk xxii. 64 t/s effriv 6 iraiffa^ at

Mt xxvii. 40 t utos r
Lk xxiii. 35 t oCtos kariv
where Mark has not this conditional form of sen
tence observe also rod Otov, though in somewha
different connexions, as was the case above in M
xvi. 16
Lk ix. 20
Mt xxvii. 54 TO. yivSfiiva Lk xxiii. 47 rd yevofifvov
Mt xxvii. 59; Lk xxiii. 53 ivtrvKt^ev avro, where Mk

18.

Mt

14.
15.

155

115

156

114

16.

XV. 46 has avrov evti\r](Tv

xxviii.

a very rare
these
19.

Mt

two nearly

30.

.........
.......

Mt xxviii. 8
Lk xxiv. 9

Lk

xxiv. 4 iv

(<t$t}ti

darpa-

There

is

123

169

124

169

124

171

125

171

125

172

idpafiov dwayytiXai rois /MOrjTais avrov ;

dnriyytiXav ravra irdvra toTs tvStKa Kal

TToaiv Tois \oinois

[21.

121

parallel passages

xxviii. 3 ws daTparrfj

nrovari

.....

Lk xxiii. 54 iiriKpoxTKiv
word/ used somewhat differently in
(mtpoaaKovari

165
167

another

instance

126

173

following
Western authorities (but not Syr"'"^ with Tisch and
mg, we omit BrjOcjHiyr} in Mk xi. i and read it
striking

if,

WH

only in

Mt

xxi.

If this evidence

is

and

it

20 sections

common

and Lk xix. 29]

76

regarded as sufficient to prove that in at least

is reasonable to suspect in
a
others also

source has supplied Matthew and

Luke

with variations

from and additions to the Marcan narrative which apparently forms

sections, then the difficult question arises,

the basis

of these 58

What was

the nature of this source?

But other considerations

hood of

this hypothesis

(pp.

1 1

ff.)

and Nos.

(i)

Was

it

an Ur-Marcus'i

have shown the general unlikeli-

i, 2,

14 in the foregoing

list

are

an explanatory kind which seem far more likely to

have been inserted than to have been dropped by a later editor.
(2) Or was there an early non-Marcan document to which the
alterations of

compilers of the
only in those 10
of the

first

and

third Gospels

were able to refer not

we recognized
or
some
such
but
also in some
Logia
document,
sections as to which

the

or

use

all

of

the 58 sections which consist mainly of narrative ?

(3) Or was
one of these compilers able to consult the work of the other, in
^

But used twice

in the

'

Gospel of Peter' (chaps. 2 and

P 2

9).

212

Statistics

and Observations

Pt.

in

a more or less complete state ?

Neither of these two suggestions
but both of them are rendered improbable by the
impossible

is

very small bulk of the additions and alterations, compared with

the whole amount of the matter of these sections.
If written
sources of any kind, besides the Marcan one, were available for one
or both of these compilers, would they have used them so very
sparingly

(4) It seems, therefore, less unlikely that these supple-

ments and modifications, so far as they imply a common source,

were due to one or other of the two following causes
(a) Some
:

of them, as I suggested in my first edition as to all of them,

may have been first made in one of the two later Gospels, and
then carried across (whether intentionally ^ or unconsciously) to the
other, either

by copyists

to

whom

they were

probably
seen (pp. 67, 78),
Gospels,

{b)

But

is
it

perhaps the majority,

more
we have

familiar, or

in the course of that oral transmission which, as

almost required by other phenomena of the

appears to me now that others of them, and

may

be best accounted for by Dr. Sanday's

suggestion that they are due to the use by Matthew and Luke of
*
a recension of the text of Mark different from that from which all
the extant

MSS.

of the Gospel are derived'.^

Additional Notes to Part

III.

Additional Note to the quotation from Dr. A. B. Bruce (p. Ii6).

The growth of reverential feeling in narrators may be illustrated

by the increasing use of Kupte, as shown in the following table of the

titles by which Jesus is addressed in the Gospels:

Additional Notes

Pt. Ill

213

Additional Note on the Historic Present in the Septuagint (p. 143).

The numbers
^

be as follows

Ex 24

9,

of the occurrences of the historic present seem to

none in the books not named)
Gen

(there being

(always either

5, opav 1, Kadopav l),

151, 2

Kingdoms

Esdr

Xe'yetz/

Josh

17, or 6pdv

Judg 2

1,

Ruth

(?),

Kingdoms 47,

32, 3

Esdr 8 (being 3

7),

Numb

7 (being

(?),

Kingdoms

\iyeiv

Kingdoms

Chro

2, i

2,

our Ezra and 5 in our Neh),

in
the
25
introductions
to the dramatic speeches,
Job
(22 being Xiyti
and 3 only in the opening and concluding narratives), Esther 2,
I

3, 2

Tobit 10 (8 of them

in the

there are 5 in Theod), Bel

Total in

3.

As

LXX,

to these

1, i

in

text only),

Mace

2, 2

Daniel 1

Mace

1,

(i.

in

e.

Mace

3,

337.

numbers

the following points deserve notice

LXX
4

Mace

232 of the instances occur in the four

(i)
books of Kingdoms, leaving only 105 for the whole of the rest of
the LXX.
Of these 25 are in Job, 24 in the historical parts of
Out of

the total 337,

Exodus (chiefly in chaps, ii, x, and xxxii), and in no other case is

number ten exceeded or even reached except by a combination

the

of two versions of Tobit.

Out of the 232 instances in the four books of Kingdoms, the

Book (=1 Samuel) contains very nearly two-thirds, viz. 151,
which happens to be exactly the same number as Mark contains.
But then i Kingdoms exceeds Mark in length by about one-third,
(2)

First

as

may

be seen by comparing the two books in the pages of any

e.g. in the R. V. minion 8vo 1885, in which i Sam

English Bible

occupies 26 pages, and Mark (without the Appendix) about 15 pages

and a half.
Consequently it appears that the historic presents are
scattered considerably more thickly over the pages of the latter than
of the former, the average to a page being in
in

Mark between 9 and

Sam

about 6 and

10.

Mr. Thackeray (/. T. S., viii. 262 ff., and Gram. ofO. T. in
10) shows in a very interesting way that the Books of Kingdoms seem to have been divided into five parts, which may have been
(3)

Gk.,

i.

give these numbers with confidence in their approximate correctness,

I
found that my independent count agreed very nearly with the

because

results that had been reached by Mr. H. St. J. Thackeray. I owe to him the
numbers in 3 and 4 Mace and in the m text of Tobit, which I had not
examined for myself; and I have been enabled by seeing his lists to make
some other additions and corrections in my own.

Additional Notes

214

Pt.

in

rendered into Greek by four distinct translators, of whom the first

i Ki, the second 2 Ki i.i-xi. i, the third 3 Ki ii. 12-xxi.

undertook

and the

43,

2-3 Ki

xi.

(who was considerably the latest in date) 2 Ki

and 3 Ki xxii with 4 Ki. One of the most striking

fourth

ii.

1 1

differences between the

work of

these four translators appears in

showing (as we have seen)

the second 28, the third 47, but the fourth only
in the two parts of his work.
comparison of the respec-

their use of the historic present, the first

151 instances of

4 and 2

it,

of their departments of work in the pages of the aforesaid

Bible
shows that the first translator has an average of about
English
6 historic presents to a page, the second an average of nearly 4 and
tive lengths

the third of rather

more than

2, while the fourth translator has the

few sporadic instances only, which we find also to be the

usage
case in Chronicles, Esdras, and other late historical books.
in a

On

the whole,

Taking

i.

two

results

emerge

amount

into account the vastly larger

of historical

matter in the O. T. and Apocrypha than in the N. T., it is clear that

the Greek historic present was used much more freely by the writers
of the latter than by the translators and (in a few cases) authors of
the former, the numbers being in the
377, and in the N. T.

LXX

408

without Matthew's and Luke's parables, or

428

including

them.
ii.

In proportion to the comparative length of their works, no

LXX

equals Mark in
the frequency of this usage, though the translator of i Kingdoms is
not very far distant from him.
On the whole, then, it remains

one of the many translators or writers of the

a notable characteristic of Mark, though not so exclusively as was

claimed in the first edition of this book.

Additional Note on the Shortening of Narratives in Matthew

This tendency of the First Evangelist

upon what has been

may

well described as his

'

(p. 160).

perhaps throw

way of

light

reduplicating, so

to speak, the personages of one narrative in order to make up for

the omission of another.
He is silent as to the healing of the
.

demoniac

at

Capernaum [Mk

i.

21-8,

Lk

iv.

31-7], but instead

two Gadarene demoniacs, at the same

time modifying the language in which he describes this latter incident
of

this

On

to one.

he gives us

[viii.

2 8]

a rather rough estimate, the proportion seems to be about four

Additional Notes

pt. Ill

after the pattern of the

former

^
;

in like

215

manner he speaks of

the

healing of two blind men at Jericho [xx. 30], but only because he
had passed over the healing of the blind man at Bethsaida [Mk viii.
these pairs of similar miracles, it
22-6].'^ In the cases of each of
is natural to suppose that the two would have been related together
in the oral teaching of the Evangelist, or of other teachers M'hose pro-

cedure he followed, and that the one of the two which seemed
the less striking and important would gradually have dropped
into the background.

Thus

the

way would have been prepared

of the two, which certainly

shortening narrative, which seems to have an
If some such explanation is not accepted,
with
Matthew.
object
the duplications must be left as quite unaccountable.
for that conflation, instead of repetition,

has the

effect of

1
Doubtless the reference is to the introduction in Mt viii. 29 of the
question Art thou come to ... which occurs in Mk i. 24 and Lk iv. 34,
but not in Mk v. 7 or Lk viii. 28.
'

'

Sanday, The Gospels in

the

Second Century,

p. 154.

CONCLUDING SUMMARY
It was explained in the Preface that this book had the

and merely preparatory' purpose of bringing

together a collection of materials and that it was therefore
'limited

',

the endeavour of the writer to keep, as far as possible, his

own opinions in the background, and to let the facts speak

be no serious departure from this

these concluding pages, he not only recapitu-

for themselves.

method

if,

in

It will

few of the principal matters which have been dealt

with, but indicates, briefly and slightly, the directions in
which they have seemed to point.

lates a

A.

was devoted

'

words and phrases charactereach

and
we saw that such expressions
of
Evangelist
occur not only in the peculiar parts, but also, though less
Part

to the

'

istic

'

abundantly, in the
it

'

common

'

appears that these writers,

Thus
even when they were com-

parts of each Gospel.

as Matthew and Luke evidently were to a

extent allowed themselves to deal freely with

pilers

large
their

materials, being more careful to presei-ve the substance than

the exact words (cf. also p. 113). And the same thing may

be inferred from several of the Doublets

(pp.

80

ff.),

from the

use of certain recurring formulas (pp. 168 ff.), and from the
far greater similarity of Luke's language, than that of

Matthew or Mark,

to the language not only of Acts, but of

the Pauline Epistles and

Hebrews

(pp. 189

ff.

cf.

also p. 196).

B.
I.

When

endeavouring

we saw

in

in Part II to find indications of

Section

I many identities in language

between the different Gospels, which were so close and

sources,

Summary

Concluding

217

sometimes so prolonged as to suggest very strongly the

use of written Greek documents. And the hypotheses, to
be referred to below, of the Logia and the Marcan memoirs
fall in with this suggestion.

as sources,

But on the other hand we found in Sections II and

III still more distinct traces of oral transmission, both- in
the different uses made of the same words, and in the trans2.

positions of
It

3.

words and sentences.

seems then

we may be unable
which

is

but necessary to allow for the

of transmission, even though

all

influence of both these

modes

to apportion the

amount of

influence

how they accomTo make such appor-

to be ascribed to each, or to explain

panied or succeeded one another.

tionment or explanation was not even attempted in the first

edition; but in the second I would express my strong
opinion that at least the Second and Third Evangelists had
provided themselves with written documents as their main
sources, but that they often omitted to refer closely to

them, partly because of the physical difficulties which there

must then have been in consulting MSS.,^ and partly
because of the oral knowledge of the life and sayings of
Jesus Christ which they had previously acquired as learners
and used as teachers, and upon which therefore it would be
natural for

them

to

fall

back very frequently.

C.

The Doublets

treated in Part

II,

Section IV, are important

more respects than one but chiefly because several of

them suggest the use in Matthew and Luke ^ of two sources,

in

'

See on

this point Dr.

Sanday

in the

forthcoming Studies in

the

Synoptic

Problem.

The

only one Doublet, and that a not very distinct one (see
can be noted in Mark, is, so far as it goes, an argument
against the use in that Gospel of the Logia (or any other second source
besides the Petrine memoirs). That Mark did use the Logia was argued
2

p.

fact that

99),

very

fully

but

as

it

seems

to

me

Theologische Studien Herm Prof. Dr.

not at

all

conclusively

Bernhard Weiss zu

dargebracht (GOttingen, 1897), pp. 284

ff.

by

Titius in

seinent 70 Jjeburlstage

2i8

Summary

Concluding

unreasonable to identify with the

Petrine memoirs written by Mark, and the Logia composed

which

it

seems

not

by Matthew, according to the well-known testimony of

The chief difficulty in the way of this identificaPapias.^
tion

independent
refers (see,

why

in

consists

the absence

of

translations of the

on the contrary,

the compilers of the

distinct

Logia

p. 54),

first

and

have used the same translation.

traces

to which

but there

is

of

the

Papias

no reason

third Gospels should not

It is

however safer, as well

as more usual now, to refer to the second source merely as Q-

D.
In Part III

Mark shows

it

was shown that of the Synoptic Gospels

and
(if any) traces (pp. 117 fif.),

the smallest

Matthew shows the most decided

traces (see

especially

pp. 163 ff.) of adaptation for the purposes of catechetical

or other teaching, Luke holding an intermediate position
this respect,

in

but nearer to Matthew than to Mark.

This seems to correspond remarkably to the degree of

familiarity with the language of the three Gospels respec-

which appears to have existed among Christians in

the following decades, so far as we can judge from the
references to the evangelical history in the writings of the
tively

Thus the Gospels which

were most used bear most traces of adaptation for use.
sub-apostolic age and in Justin.^

E.
Difficult questions are suggested

Matthew and Luke

by the agreements

against Mark, even

in places

of

where they

In
are evidently using his narrative as a Grundschrift.
the pages about Mark in Part III, which have just been
^

See

p. xiv above.

Opinions will differ as to some particular instances, but certainly this

careful examination of the
is the general impression conveyed by a
references collected in the Indices to Lightfoot's Apostolic Fathers and Otto's
Justin Martyr.

Summary

219

referred to, reasons have been suggested for

many omissions

Concluding

and some alterations which would produce this result.

Other alterations and some small additions, which cannot
the same way, are dealt with

be accounted

for

Appendix B

and I have tried to show that, though

have arisen quite independently, they are not

they cannot

in

(p. 208),

all

the hypothesis that either

the other's Gospel.

sufficient to necessitate

or

in

Luke had seen

Matthew

F.

The close correspondence

of the phraseology of St. Luke's

the
We
with
that
of
'-Sections of the Acts (see
Gospel
pp. 183 ff., referring to the tables on pp. 16 fif.) seems to me
'

bearing on the date of that Gospel, and

inferentially of the other two, that I call attention to it
so important in

its

again here.
In

these

inferences

and

suggestions there

is

hardly

anything which has not been put forward often before

but if the grounds on which they rest have been made
more distinct and tangible, so that they have thus lost
;

something of their conjectural or hypothetical character,

a little progress will have been made enough perhaps to

encourage the hope of more progress

the Synoptic Problem.

in

the study of

INDEX
Abbott, Dr. E. A.,

Compound verbs, 1 74 f.
'Context-supplements' in Mark,

14,

viii, xiii,

24, 31, 35, 70, 117, 131, 134,

144, 150, 151, 152.
Acts : its linguistic relations with

125

Luke, 174 ff. with Paul, 189 ff.

with
Hebrews, 192 f.
LXX, 203 ff. the two parts of
;

Dalman,

with

Deissmann,

Additions of minor kinds to the

narrative in Mark, 127.
Agreements of Matthew and Luke
against Mark, 208 ff.
Allen, Archdeacon W. C, 52, 65,
84, 118, 120,

Diminutives in Mark, 132.

Documents, use of written,

54,

107.

131,137,142,167.

Double negatives

Mark,

135.

Doublets, 80

disparage-

Driver, Dr., 54, 113.

apparent

Apostles,

ments

in

S., 174, 183.

134.

Dictation a cause of errors, 67.

Different applications of the same
words, 67 ff.

181.

Anacoluthon

32, 38, 52.

Davidson, Dr.

it,

f.

in

Mark,

Drummond, Dr. J., 70.

Duplicate expressions in
139 ff.

Mark, 121 f.
Aramaic phrases in Mark, 130.
Asyndeton in Mark, 137.
of, in

hi

and

Kal in

142.

ff.

Mark,

Mark, 150.

Bacon, Prof. B. W., 66, 83, 100,

162.

Badham's

Formation

of

the

Gospels, 80.
Blass, 31,48, 56, 133,153Briggs, Dr. C. A., 163.
Bruce, Dr. A. B., ^6, 116, 120,
121.

Edersheim, Dr., 163, 167.

Enoch, Book of, 164.
TKfyev, fXeyov, 12, 52.
evdfcas, fiSvs, 12, I4I.

Field, Dr. F., 71, 122, 123.

Fivefold divisions of books, 164.
Formulas,' repetitions and transferences of, 168 ff.
'

Burkitt, Prof., 54, 154, 183, 186,

210.
Burton, Prof. E. De W., 67, 162.

Caesar, Julius, on the Druids, 54.

Carpenter
tersby's

and
Harford-BatHexateuch, 2, 113.

Four Gospels, sayings contained

in them all, 88.
Freedom used by compilers, 26,
"3, 173-

Cary, G. L., 68.

Geden,

Characteristic words and phrases

of the three Synoptists, 4 ff., 184.

Gore, Bishop, 158.

Gould, Prof., 46, 76, 118.

Prof., 54, 207.

Charles, Dr. R. H., 116, 164.

Chase, Bishop, 181.

Classical

and non-classical words,

50, 78, no, 112,

113, 181, 183.
He that hath ears,' &c., 106.
Hebraisms in Luke, 198.

Harnack, 49,
'

135, 207.

Compilation in Mark, suggested

signs of, 116.

Compilation of discourses in Matthew, 161 ff.

Hebrews, Epistle to, 192 f.

Hershon's Talmudic Miscellany,
167.

Index

222
Historic present, 143

ff.,

statistics

213.

Hobart, Dr., 189.

Hobson, A. A., on Tatian, 6y, 80,
162.

114
200.
it,

and observations upon

words peculiar to it,

ff.;

Matthew, Gospel of: characteristic words and phrases, 3 ff.

Hort, Dr., 16.

Doublets, 82 ; the quotations in

it, 154 ; other statistics and observations upon it, I58ff. words

Imperfect tense rare in Matthew,

9, 51.

Inge, Prof. W. R., 168.

Irenaeus, 116, 127, 164,

peculiar to

Max

and

'lepouffaXjj/i

Miiller,

199.

on memory

in the

East, 54.
Memory highly trained in Judaea,

141, 144.

t'Sov, 14,

it,

'ifpocoXu/xa, 19.

54-

Jason of Cyrene, his history in

five books, 164.
'Jews, the,' the occurrences of
this

152.

title,

John, Gospel of, 88, 138, 143, 144,

151, 152,167.
Josephus, 54, 144.
Jiilicher, 84, ill, 114, 131, 154.

Justin Martyr, use of the Gospels

by, 218.

Knowling, Dr., 181, 185, 188.

and Se in Mark, 150.
Kotvij Greek, 135, 143.

Menzies, Dr. A., 84.

Mishnah, numerical arrangements
in, 166.

Moffatt, Dr. James, 67.

Moulton, Dr. J. H., 8, 14, 31, 38,
40, 48, 52, 56, 59, 65, 71, 131,
132, 133, 144, 175Moulton, R. G., 164.

Moulton (W.

and

F.)

Nestle,

2, 129.

Numerical arrangements

Kai

Geden's

Concordance^ xiv, 207.

thew, 163

in

Mat-

ff.

Kvpie, 212.

Optative mood, 35, 38, 46, 53Oral transmission, indications

67,77. 173,217.

Lake, Prof. K., 39, 99, 142.

Latinisms in Mark, 132.
Lightfoot, Dr. John, 61.
Lightfoot, Bp. Joseph B., xiii.

Logia ascribed

And

see

'

to

Overbeck on Acts, 174, 183.

Oxyrhynchus, Sayings of Jesus

characteristic

99

fif.,

linguistic

27

fF.

194

ff.

and

ovpavoi, 52.

Paley

on

'tentative

words peculiar

to

it,

miracles',

117.

Papias,

relations

at, 70, loi.

oiipavos

words and

Doublets,
with
Acts, 174 ff.; with the *We'Sections of Acts, 182 ff.; with
Pauline Epistles, 189 ff.; with
with LXX,
Hebrews, 192 f.
198, 201 ff. smaller additions,
phrases, 15

found

Matthew, 107.

'.

Lord's Prayer in Matthew, 32, 166.

Luke, Gospel of: Preface to,
vii

of,

xiiif.,

54, 115, 126, 164,

218.

Papyri, 59, 61, 144.

Parables in *Q', 112.

Passion-narrative, not referred to
in 'Q', 112.
Pauline Epistles, 189 ff., 192.
Pauline expressions in Luke, 196.
'

201.

Maccabees, Second Book of, 164.

Maccabees, Fourth Book of, 52.
Maclean, Bishop, 131.
Mark, Gospel of: characteristic
words and phrases, 10 ff.
use of it as a
Doublet, 99
Grundschrift, 114, 218 various
;

Peter, Gospel of,' 43, 211.

Phrynichus, 132, 134.
Ftr^e both, 164, 166 f.
Pleonastic way of writing in Mark,

141.

Plummer, Dr. A.,

142, 198.

Plummer, C,

67.

Polycarp, 91, 127.

viii,

38, 43, 76,

Index
Proper names in Mark, 131.
Prophecies applied by Matthew,

223

Swete, Dr., 46, 61,

84, 132,

"jS,

133, 154, 156, 158.

157.

Psalms,

five

books

of,

163

Tatian's Diatessaron, 67, 80, 162.

Thackeray, H. St. J., 52, 213.

f.

TToapovv, TrcipaaiSy 121,

TTTOIfia,

'

Theophilus, 183.
Tischendorf's Synopsis

124-

the supposed document so

designated, 81, 107 fiF.
Quotations from Old Testament in
Matthew, 1 54 ff.

*,

Ramsay,

Sir

W.

Robinson, Dean

M., 113.
J. Armitage, 107,

121, 131, 132, 153, 159.

in

Rude, harsh, &c., words

131

gelica, 81.
Titius, 217.
Titles by which Jesus
212.

tences,

Salmon, Dr. G., 93, 120.

Sanday, Dr., vi, viii, 153, 212,
215, 217.
Schiller-Szinessy, 54.
Schmiedel, 70, 116, 183.
Schiirer, 54, 130.
Scott, E. F., 167.
Scott-Moncrieff, C. E., 116.
Septuagint, 52, 135, 143,
198 ff., 213.

'J^ ff.

Turner, C. H., 210.

Turpie's The Old Testament in
the

Rushbrooke's Synopticon, 65, 81.

addressed,

Transpositions of words and sen-

Mark,

ff-

is

Evan-

New,

56.

Ur-Marcus,

hypothesis

of

an,

115, 152, 211.

'

We'-Sections of Acts,
Weiss, Bernhard, 181.
Wellhausen, 112, 113.

Wendt,

i82ff., 219.

116.

Westcott, Bishop, 26, 154, 194.

Westcott and Hort (introdtiction

and Notes),

46, 59, 95, 140.

151,

Winer's Grammar (ed. W. F.

Moulton), 35, 45, 46, 48, 56, 1 50.

Sermons on the Mount and Level

Woods, F. H., 112, 114.

Words, number of, in the Synoptic

Place, 64, 112.

Shortenings of narrative in Matthew, 158 ff., 214.

Speaker's Commentary, 120, 125.
Stanton, Dr. V. H., 112.
Statistics,

danger

in using, vi

80, 108, 212, 217.

Gospels

in,

age,
218.

use

of

Wright, Dr. A., ^^, 80, 84,

3 1,

133. 181.

f.

Studies in the Synoptic Problem,

Sub-apostolic

Gospels, 2.
peculiar to each Synoptist
and to Acts, 199 ff.

Words

York Powell, Prof., on powers of

memory, 54.

the
Zeller

THE END

on Acts,

174, 182

f.

OXFORD
PRINTED AT THE CLARENDON PRESS
BY HORACE HART, M.A.
PRINTER TO THE UNIVERSITY

CLAKENDON PEESS BOOKS

THEOLOGY
The Holy

Scriptures,

Apocrypha, etc

The

Bible in English
Reprint of the Authorized Version of 1611.
The Authorized Version.

4to. i833.

38.net.

Complete lists of Oxford Bibles, Oxford Bibles for Teachers, Oxford Prayer
Books, Church Sets, etc, in all styles and bindings can be obtained from
any bookseller, or from Mr. Henry Frowde, Oxford University Press,
Amen Corner, London, E.C.

The Revised

Version.

[The Revised Version

is

the joint property of the Universities of Oxford

and Cambridge.]
Edition for the Church Desk.
Folio.
In buckram, with the Apocrypha, 2 2s. net.
Grained Cowhide, 2 10s. ; with the Apocrypha, 3 ;
Morocco, 4 4s.; with the Apocrypha, 4 16s.
Library editions, in large type

Bound

(pica).

in cloth

Bound in
Turkey

in

and greatly reduced

in price.

Royal 8vo, with large margins with the Apocrypha, 6 vols., from 1 9s. ;
the Apocrypha only, 10s. 6d. the other five volumes, 18s. 6d.
Demy 8vo, with the Apocrypha, 6 vols., 1 Is. ; the Apocrypha only,
:

7s. 6d.

the other five volumes, 14s.

Single volume editions

Royal 8vo, on Oxford India Paper, and in large type (pica), in Persian,
2 12s. 6d.; with the Apocrypha, in Turkey Morocco, 3 19s.
Royal 8vo, small pica type. In cloth, 10s. 6d. ; in leather bindings, from
:

19s. 6d.
8vo, small pica type. In cloth, 7s. 6d. ; in leather bindings, from 10s. 6d.
In cloth, 4s. ; with the Apocrypha, 6s. ; the Apocrypha
8vo, minion type.
only, 3s.
16mo, ruby type. In cloth, 2s. 6d. ; with the Apocrypha, 4s. ; the
Apocrypha only, 2s. ; with the Oxford Helps, in leather, from 7s.
16mo, nonpareil type. In leather, from 3s.
In cloth boards, from 8d. ; with Oxford Helps,
16mo, pearl type.

from

2s. 6d.

The Revised Version with marginal

8vo, in bourgeois type, from 6s.
leather,

from

references.

on Oxford India paper, bound in

15s.

8vo, in minion type, from 5s. ; with the Apocrypha, from 7s. 6d. ; with Oxford
Helps, from lis. ; on Oxford India paper, bound in leather, from 14s.
16mo, in nonpareil type, in leather, from 6s. ; on Oxford India paper,

bound

in leather,

from

10s. 6d.

1 he X arallel Bible,

containing the Authorized and Revised Versions in

Small quarto, in minion type. On ordinary paper, from
parallel columns.
10s. 6d. ; on Oxford India paper, bound in leather, from 16s.
Two-Version Bible, being the Authorized Version with the
differences of the Revised Version printed in the margins, so that both texts
can be read from the same page. With references and maps. Bourgeois
type. Cloth, 7s. 6d. ; leather, from 10s. 6d. ; on Oxford India paper cloth,
10s. 6d. ; leather, from 15s. ; interleaved with writing-paper, and bound in
With the Oxford Helps, leather, from 18s. 6d. Printed
leather, from 1 Is.
on writing-paper with wide margins for notes, from 10s. 6d. net.

The

Elementary Helps

to the

Study of the Bible

Oxford Bible

for Teachers, containing the texts of the Old and

Testaments, with or without marginal references, and in either the
Authorized or Revised Versions, together with the Oxford Helps to the Bible

New

and 124 full-page plates.

In many styles and bindings, from 3s. to 5.
complete
obtained from Mr. Henry Frowde, Amen Corner, London, E.G.
(see below),

The Oxford Helps

list

can be

to the
of the Bible, containing
Introductions to the several Books, the History and Antiquities of the Jews,
the Natural History of Palestine, with copious tables, concordance and
With 124 full-page plates.
indices, and a series of maps.

Study

8vo, in long primer type cloth, 5s. ; leather, from 6s. 6d.
8vo, in nonpareil type cloth, 2s. 6d. ; leather, 3s. 6d.
16mo, in pearl type stiff covers, Is. net ; cloth. Is. 6d. ; leather, from 2s.

Bible Illustrations,
the above.

Crown

being 124 fuU-page plates, forming an appendix to

8vo, cloth, 2s. 6d.

Old Testament History

narrated for the most part in the words of

By George Carter. With maps. Crown 8vo. 2s.

Annotated Psalter. Arranged by J. M.Thompsox. FcapSvo.

the Bible.

An

2s.

Dr. Stokoe's Manuals. Crown 8vo

Old Testament History for Schools. By t. h. Stokoe.

Part i.
Part II.
to the Settlement in Palestine.
(Third edition.) From the Creation
From the Settlement to the Disruption. Part III. From the Disruption to
the Return from Captivity. Extra fcap 8vo. 2s. 6d. each, with maps.

Manual of the Four Gospels,

Part

I,

The Gospel

Narrative, 2s.

Manual of the Acts. ss.

The Life and Letters of
Part

First

I,

The

Life of St. Paul, 2s.

with Maps, ss. ed. Or, separately.

11, The Gospel Teaching, 2s.

Part

Paul.

St.

Part

II,

The

ss. ed.
Or, separately.
Letters of St. Paul, 2s.

Letters of the Church. 3s.

Days and Early Is.
6d. Part
Letters of the

First

Days of the Church,

II,

Early

Graduated Lessons on the Old Testament.

Or, Part i.
Church, 2s.

By u.

z.

Rule,

by Li,. J. M. Bebb, Selected Readings from the O. T. with paraphrases and connecting paragraphs with notes for teachers and pupils. For
use in lower forms, and in elementary and Sunday Schools. The text is that
of the R.V., but the book may be used with the A.V. In three volumes.
edited

Extra fcap 8vo. Is. 6d. each in paper covers, or Is. 9d. each in cloth. Vol. I.
Creation to Death of Moses. Vol. II. Conouest of Canaan, Psalms, etc.
Vol. III. Israel and Judah, the Captivity, the Prophets.

The Gospel according to St.

INlark. Ed. by a.

Notes on the Gospel of St. Luke,

E.

J.

Moore Smith.

Extra fcap 8vo,

A Greek Testament Primer,

stiff

covers.

Walpole. is.ed.

By Miss

Is. 6d.

being an easy grammar and readingBy E. Miller. Second

for the use of students beginning Greek.

edition.
Extra fcap 8vo, paper, 2s. ; cloth, 3s. 6d.

book

s.

for Junior Classes.

History of the Bible

List of Editions of the Bible in EngUsh, by h.
Second

8vo.

edition.

Cotton.

8s. 6d.

RhemeS and Doway

showing what has been done by Roman Catholics

By H. Cotton. 8vo. 9s.

for the diifusion of the Bible in English.

The Part
Bible, by
tables

of
J.

Rheims

Making of the EngHsh

the

in

G. Carleton, containing historical and

and analyses

WyclifFe's Bible,

critical introduction,

9s. 6d. net.

8vo.

thereof.

portion edited

by W. W. Skeat.

See

p. 6.

Studia Biblica et Ecclesiastica.

Essays chiefly in Biblical and

subjects. 8vo.
Vol. II, 12s. 6d. Vol. Ill, 16s. Vol. IV, 12s. 6d.
Vol. I, 10s. 6d.
Vol. V, complete, 16s., or, in separate parts. Part I, Life of St. Nino, by
M. and'J. O. Wahdrop. 3s. 6d. Part II, Texts from Mount Athos, by
K. Lake. 3s, 6d, Part III, Place of the Peshitto Version in the Apparatus Criticus of the Greek New Testament. 2s. 6d. Part IV, Baptism
and Christian Archaeology, by C. F, Rogers. 4s. 6d.

Patristic criticism,

and kindred

The Gospel of Barnabas.

MS.

in the Imperial Library,

with a facsimile. 16s. net.

Edited and translated from the Italian

Vienna, by Lonsdale and Laura Ragg. 8vo,

The Journal of Theological

Baker and

F. E.

Annual subscription

Studies. Edited by J. F. BethunePublished Quarterly, price 3s. 6d. net.

net, post free.
Many of the back numbers are still

Brightman.
12s.

obtainable.

The Old Testament and Apocrypha

The

Psalter, by Richard Rolle of Hasipole.

Bramley.

The

With an

introduction

Parallel Psalter

and glossary.

8vo.

Edited
1 Is.

by H. R.

being the Prayer-Book version of the Psalms

and a new version arranged on opposite pages, with an introduction and

Second edition. Extra fcap 8vo. 3s. 6d. net.
glossaries by S. R. Driver.

The Book
introductions

of Job in the Revised Version.

and

brief

by

annotations,

S.

R.

Edited, with

Crown

Driver.

8vo.

2s. 6d. net.

The Hebrew Prophets

in the

Revised Version.

and annotated by F. H. Woods and F. E. Powell. In four

Vol. I (Amos, Hosea, Isaiah i-xxxix, Micah), 2s. 6d. net.

Lectures on EcclesiasteS.
Crown
Israel's

8vo.

By

G. G. Bradley.

vols.,

Arranged
crown 8vo.

Second

edition.

5s. 6d.

Hope of Immortality.

EcclesiasticUS, translated from

A. Neubauer. Crown 8vo. 2s. 6d.

the
3

By

c. F.

Burney. bvo.

Hebrew by A.

E.

2s. ed. net.

Cowley and

The Place

of Ecclesiasticus in Semitic Literature.

essay by D. S. Margoliouth.

The Five Books

H. CoiTON.

The Book
and

8vo.

An

2s. 6d.

4to.

of Maccabees,

with notes and iUustrations by

10s. 6d.

of Enoch,

revised),

translated from Dillmann's Ethiopic text (emended

and edited by R. H. Charles. 8vo. [Out of print,]

The Book of the

Secrets of Enoch,

by W. R. MoRFiLL, and
Charles.

Small

8vo.

translated from the Slavonic

edited, vnth introduction, notes, etc,

by R. H.

7s. 6d.

History and Song of Deborah

Cooke,

8vo.

Paper covers.

Duplicate passages in the Old Testament.

Deuterographs.
by R.

B. GiRDLESTONE.

8vo.

Crown

Authorized translation.

Libri

Arranged

7s. 6d.

Old Testament.

the

in

Astronomy

(Judges iv and V).

By g. a.
(Published by Mr. Fro wde.)

Is. 6d.

8vo.

By

G. Schiaparelli.

3s. 6d. net.

Psalmorum Versio antiqua Latina, cum Paraphrasi AngioEdidit B. Thorpe.

Saxonica.

8vo.

10s. 6d.

Psalmorum

Versio antiqua Gallica e Cod. MS in Bibi.

Bodleiana adservato, una cum Versione Metrica aliisque Monumentis perveNunc primura descripsit et edidit F. Michel, 8vo. 10s. 6d. net.
tustis.
Chandler's Life of David. Svo. 7s. 6d. net.
Libri

Faussett's Sacred Chronology.

Notes on the
By G.

J.

Svo.

10s. 6d. net.

Hebrew and Chaldee

Hebrew Text of the Book

Spurrell.

Second

Notes on Samuel.

By

edition.

S.

Crown

R. Driver.

Svo.

of Genesis.

12s. 6d.

[Out of print]

Notes on the Hebrew Text of the Books of Kings.

C. F.

BuRNEY.

Svo.

By

14s. net.

Hebrew and English Lexicon

of the Old Testament,

with an Appendix containing the Biblical Aramaic, based on the Thesaurus

and Lexicon of Gesenius, by F. Brown, S. R. Driver, and C. A. Briggs.
Small 4to. Cloth, 34s. net ; morocco back, 45s. net. The several Parts can
be supplied to complete sets.

Gesenius's
Kautzsch.

Hebrew Grammar,
New edition

A Treatise on the Use of the

Crown
R. Driver. Third
A Commentary on the Book
Abraham

Driver.

edited and

enlarged by E.

Tenses in Hebrew.

Svo.

edition.

S.

as

in preparation.

Edited from a
Crown Svo. Paper covers,
Ihn Ezra.

MS

of Proverbs,
in the Bodleian

3s. 6d.

By

7s. 6d. net.

attributed

to

Library by S. R.

of Tobit. a Chaldee Text, from a unique MS in tlie

Bodleian Library ; with other Rabbinical texts, English translations, and the
Edited by A. Neubaueh. Crown 8vo. 6s.
Itala,

The Book

Ecclesiasticus (xxxix. 15

The Hebrew, with early

xlix. 11).
versions and English translation, etc, edited by A. E. Cowley and A. Neubauer.
With 2 facsimiles. 4to. 10s. 6d. net.
Translation, see p. 67.

Facsimiles of the Fragments hitherto recovered

of Ecclesiasticus in Hebrew.
(Published jointly by the Oxford

Book

The Psalms

in

of the
60 leaves in Collotype. 1 Is. net.
and Cambridge University Presses.)

Hebrew without

stiff covers.

points,

Accentuation of Psalms, Proverbs, and Job.

8vo.

2s.

By w. Wickes.

5s.

Hebrew Prose Accentuation.

Lightfoot's
Edition

Horae Hebraicae

by R. Gaxdell.

4 vols.

Svo.

the same.

By

los. ed.

Talmudicae.

et
1

svo.

new

Is.

Greek
VetUS Testamentum

ex Versione Septuaginta Interpretum secundum

exemplar Vaticanum Romae editum. Accedit potior varietas Codicis Alex18mo. 6s. each volume.
andrini. Tomi IH.

A Concordance

to the Septuagint and

other Greek Versions of

late EnwiK Hatch and

H. A. Redpath. With Supplement. By H. A. Redpath. Fasc. I, containing
a Concordance to the proper names occurring in the Septuagint Fasc. H,
containing a Concordance to Ecclesiasticus, other Addenda, and the Hebrew
Index to the whole work. Imperial 4to. Cloth in 3 vols. 8 8s. net (or
Parts II-VI,
Concordance, 2 vols., 6 17s. 6d. net.
Supplement, 2 net).
21s. net each ; Supplements I and II, 16s. net each.

the O. T. (including the Apocryphal Books)

by the

Origenis

Hexaplorum quae SUperSUnt

sive

Veterum

inter-

pretum Graecorum in totum Vetus Testamentum Fragmenta. Edidit F. Field.

3 vols. 4to. 5 5s. net.

Essays in Biblical Greek.

By Edwik Hatch,

bvo.

los. ed. net.

The Book of Wisdom

:
the Greek Text, the Latin Vulgate, and the
Authorized Enghsh Version ; with an introduction, critical apparatus, and
a commentary. By W. J. Deane. 4lo. 12s. 6d. net.

The Greek

Versions of the Testaments of the Twelve

Patriarchs. Edited from nine MSS,

By R. H. Charles. Svo. 18s, net.

with variants from other versions.

Coptic
Tattam's Major and Minor Prophets.
5

See

p. 85.

The New Testament

New

The

Greek

and English ; being

Parallel
Testament,
the Authorized Version, 1611; the Revised Version, 1881; and the Greek
Text followed in the Revised Version. 8vo. 9s. net.

The New Testament

E. Cardwell.

2 vols.

in Greek
Crown 8vo.

and English.

1837.

Edited

by

6s.

Greek

The Greek Testament,

with the Readings adopted by the Revisers of

the Authorized Version. (1) Pica type. DemySvo. 10s. 6d. (2) Long Primer
Fcap 8vo. 4s. 6d. (3) The same, on
type. With marginal references.
writing-paper, with wide margin, 15s. (4) The same, on India paper. 6s.

Novum Testamentum

Graece. Accedunt paraUela S. Scnpturae

3s. On writing-paper, with wide margin, 7s. 6d.
Critical Appendices to the above,by W. Sanday. Extra fcap 8vo. 3s. 6d.
loca,etc. Ed.

C.Lloyd. 18mo.

Novum Testamentum
dices.

Cloth, 6s.

Graece

paste grain,

7s. 6d.

(ed. Lloyd), with Sanday's Appenmorocco, 10s. 6d.

Novum Testamentum Graece juxta Exemplar MiUianum.

Fcap

8vo.

On

2s. 6d.

writing-paper, with wide margin,

Evangelia Sacra Graece.

Novum Testamentum
in ordine parallelo dispositi.

Fcap Svo,

Graece.

deciphered

facsimiles, large 4to, in

7s. 6d.

is. ed.

Antiquissimomm Codlcum Textus

Tomi IIL Svo. 1 4s.

Edidit E. H. Hansell.

Athos Fragments of Codex

Photographed and

limp.

of the Pauline Epistles.

Full-size collotype
by Kirsopp Lake.

an envelope.

21s. net.

Athos Fragments of the Shepherd of Hermas.

graphed and transcribed by Kirsopp Lake.
17s. 6d. net.
large 4to, in an envelope.

Photo-

Full-size collotype facsimiles,

Outlines of the Textual Criticism of the New Testament.

By C. E. Hammond. Sixth edition. Crown 8vo. 4s. 6d.
GresweU's Harmonia Evangelica. Fifth edition, svo. 9s. ed. Prolegomena. 8vo.ss.net. DissertationsonthcHarmony. 25s.neL
Jones's Canon of the New Testament, svo. 3 vols. iss. net
DiateSSaron. Edited by J. White. 3s. ed.
Horae Synopticae. By Sir J. C Hawkins, Bart. 8vo. IDs. 6d. net.

Dr. Sanday's Books

Sacred Sites of the Gospels,
maps, and plans.

Svo.

with sixty-three fuU-page illustrations,

13s. 6d. net.

Criticism of the Fourth Gospel. 8vo. 7s. ed. net.

Life of Christ in Recent Research,

The

illustrations.

svo,

with two

7s. 6d. net.

Presidential Address
History of Religions, 1908.

to the Christian Section of the Congress for the

Svo.
Is. net.
6

The Logia

Two

Lectures on the

in 1897,

'

Sayings of Jesus',

by W. Lock and W. Sanday.

8vo.

delivered at Oxford

Is. 6d. net.

The Oxyrhynchus Logia and the Apocryphal Gospels.

By C. Taylor. 8vo, paper covers, 2s. 6d. net.
The Oxyrhynchus Sayings of Jesus, found in 1903 with the
;

'
Sayings called Logia ', found in 1897. By C. Taylor. 8vo. 2s. net.
Published by Mr. Frowde for the Egypt Exploration Fund.
By B. P. Grenfell and A. S. Hunt.

AOriA IHZOY,
8vo,

mentary.

from an early Greek papyrus, with tran'slation and comwith two tone
stiff boards, with two collotypes, 2s. net;

blocks, 6d. net.

Sayings of Jesus

New

and Fragment of a Lost Gospel. With one Plate.

Fragment of an Uncanonical Gospel from Oxyrhynchus. With one Plate.

Is. net.
Is. net.

Coptic and Syriac

of the New Testament,

The Coptic Version

in the Northern
With introduction,
Memphitic and Bohairic.
The Gospels
critical apparatus, and English translation. 8vo. Vols I and 1 1
2 2s. net Vols. Ill and IV. The Epistles. 2 2s. net.
Tetraeuangelium Sanctum luxta simpllcem Syrorum versionem ad
fidem codicum, Massorae, editionum denuo recognitum. Lectionum supellectilem quam conquisiverat P. E. Pusey auxit, digessit, edidit G. H.
Gwilliam. Accedunt capitulorum notatio, concordiarum tabulae, translatio

Dialect, otherwise

called

Latina, annotationes.

Crown

4to.

Collatio Cod. Lewisiani

2s. net.

Evangeliorum Syriacorum cum

Cod. Curetoniano, auctore A. Bonus.

Demy

4to.

8s. 6d. net.

Latin
Old-Latin Biblical Texts

small 4to,

stiff

covers.

Matthew, from the St. Germain MS (g,). Edited by J,

No. II. Portions of St. Mark and St. Matthew,
Wordsworth. 6s. net.
from the Bobbio MS (k), etc. Edited by J. Wordsworth, W. Sanday, and
H. J. White. 1 Is. net.
No. III. The Four Gospels, from the Munich
MS (q), now numbered Lat. 6224. Edited by H. J. White. 12s. 6d. net.
No. IV. Portions of the Acts, of the Epistle of St. James, and of the
First Epistle of St. Peter, from the Bobbio Palimpsest (s), now numbered
Cod. 16 in the Imperial Library at Vienna. Edited by H. J. White.
No. V. The Gospels from the Codex Corbeiensis (ff^ or ffo) with
5s. net.
Fragments of the Catholic Epistles, Acts, and Apocalypse from the
Fleury Palimpsest (h). Edited by E. S. Buchanan. 12s. 6d. net.

No.

I.

St.

NoUUm Testamentum

Latine, secundum Editionem Sanctl HieroRecensuit I. Wordsworth, Episcopus Sarisburiensis ; in operis

societatem adsumto H. I. White. 4to. Part I (Gospels), 2 12s. 6d. (Some
of the fasciculi of Part I can still be obtained separately.) Part II, fasc. i
(Romans), in the press. Part III, fasc. i (Acts), 12s. 6d.

nymi.

Notes on the Early History of the Vulgate Gospels. By

Dom John Chapman, O.S.B. 8vo. 16s.net.

Gothic
Sacrorum Evangeliorum Versio Gothica cum
Latina et annotationibus Erici Benzelii edidit Edwardus
4to.

10s. net.

Lye

interpretatione
(1750).

Large

The

Fathers of the Church and

Ecclesiastical History

Editions with Latin Commentaries

Catenae GraeCOrum Patrum

Tomi VIII.

Cramer.

ClementlS
3

8vo.

Novum Testamentum

in

edidit J.

A.

8s. net.

Alexandnni Opera, ex

Guiu Dindorfii.

rec.

Tomi IV.

8vo.

net.

Cyrilll Archiepiscopi Alexandrini

Tomi II. Svo. 3 2s.

in

XII Prophetas edidit P. E. Puset.

In D. Joannis Evangelium. Accedunt Fragmenta Varia. Edidit post

Aubertum P. E. Pusey. Tomi III. Svo. 2 5s.
Commentarii in Lucae Evangelium quae supersunt Syriace edidit
R. Payne Smith. 4to. 1 2s. Translation, 2 vols. Svo. 14s.

Ephraemi Syri, Rabulae, Balaei aliorumque

Eusebii Opera recensuit T. Gaisford.

Opera

Evangelicae Praeparationis Libri XV. Tomi IV. 8vo.

Evangelicae Demonstrationis Libri X. Tomi II. Svo.
Contra Hieroclem et Marcellum Libri. Svo. 7s.
Annotationes Variorum. Tomi II. Svo. 17s.

Canon MuratorianUS.
Tregeixes.

Evagrii

4to.

Phllosophumena;

primum

edidit

supersunt edidit G. Jacobson.

Reliquiae Sacrae
Second

Libri

Svo.

II.

SocratlS
Tomi

S. P.

4s.

Refiitatio e Codice
10s.

Clementis Romani, Ignatii, Polycarpi, quae

Tomi II. Fourth edition. Svo. 1 Is.

secundi tertiique saeculi recensuit

Svo.

edition, 1846.

Third edition, 1S58.

Svo.

M.

Routh.

J.

5s. net.

Scriptorum Ecclesiasticorum Opuseula

Tomi

by

Septem recensuit E. Carbwell.

sive omnium Haeresium

Emmanuel Miller. Svo.

Patrum ApOStolicorum
Tomi V.

42s. net.
15s.

Edited, with notes and facsimile,

Fl. Josephl de bello Judaico

Tomi II. Svo. 17s.
Parisino nunc

p. 85.

10s. 6d.

Hlstoria Ecclesiastica, ex rec. H. Valesii.

OrigeniS

See

Selecta.

recensuit

M.

j.

Routh.

lOs.

Scholastic! Historia Ecclesiastica Gr. et Lat. edidit R. Husset.

III.

1S53.

Svo.

15s. net.

SoZOmeni Historia Ecclesiastica edidit R.HussEY.

Theodoretl

Tomi

III.

Svo.

15s.net.

Ecclesiasticae HistoriaeLibriVrec.T. Gaisford. Svo. 7s. 6d. net.

Graecarum AiFectionum Curatio

Notitia Scriptorum SS. Patrum.

7s. 6d. net.
.

rec. T.

By

Gaisford. Svo.

7s. 6d.

g. Dowling.

8vo.

j.

Editions with English Commentaries

or Introductions
St. AthanasiuS.
Life by W. Bright.

Orations against the Arians.

Crown

8vo.

With an account of his

9s.

Historical Writings, according to the Benedictine Text.

Crown 8vo.
With an introduction by W. Bright.
10s. 6d.

St.

Select Anti-Pelagian Treatises, and the Acts of the

With introduction by W. Bright. Crown 8vo.
[Out of print.]

Augustine.

Second Council of Orange.

St. Basil
on the Holy Spirit. Revised text, with notes and introduction,
by C. F. H. Johnston. Crown Bvo. 7s. 6d.
:

Editlo Princeps of the Epistle of, by Archbishop Ussher, as

With a dissertation by J. H. Backhouse.
printed at Oxford, a. d. 1643.

Barnabas,
Small

4to.

3s. 6d.

Canons of the

First

stantinople, Ephesus,
edition.
Crown 8vo.

Four General Councils

Second

7s. 6d.

Eusebius' Ecclesiastical History,

introduction

of Nicaea, Con-

With notes by W. Bright.

and Chalcedon.

by W. Bright.

Second

according to Burton's text, with

Crown

edition.

8vo.

8s. 6d.

Eusebii Pamphili Evangelicae Praeparationis Libri

XV.

Revised text edited, with introduction, notes, English translation, and indices,
by E. H. GiFFORD. 4 vols. [Vols. I, H, text, with critical notes. Vol. HI,
in two parts, translation.
Vol. IV, notes and indices.] 8vo. 5 5s. net.
(Vol. Ill, divided into two parts, containing the translation, 1 5s. net.)

The Bodleian Manuscript

Chronicles of Eusebius,
duction by J. K. Fotheringhaji.

John of Ephesus.

Seep.

of Jerome's Aversion of the

reproduced in collotype, with an introbuckram. 2 10s. net.

4to,

SS. Translation,

by R. Payne Smith.

8vo.

10s.

about the Contemplative Life ; or, the Fourth Book of

:
the Treatise concerning Virtues. Edited, with a defence of its genuineness,
by F. C. CoNYBEARE. With a facsimile. 8vo. 14s. net.

Philo

Socrates' Ecclesiastical History, according to Hussey's Text, with

introduction by W. Bright. Second edition. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d.

Tertulliani
T.

Apologeticus ad versus Gentes pro Christianis.

H. Bindley.

De

Crown

8vo.

Edited by

7s. 6d. net.

Praescriptione Haereticorum ad Martyras ad Scapulam.

Edited by T. H. Bindley. Crown 8vo. 5s. net.
:

Works

of the English Divmes. 8vo

Sixteenth, seventeenth, eighteenth and early

nineteenth centuries
Hooker and Butler
Hooker's Works, with Walton's Life, arranged by John Keble.
Editions of

edition, revised

by R. W. Church and

F. Paget.

vols.

Seventh

12s. each.

[Vol. II

contains the Fifth Book.]

Introduction to Hooker's Ecclesiastical Polity,

By

F. Paget.

Ihe Text,

Second

edition,

as arranged

by

J.

The Works of Bishop

14s. each.

Crown

8vo, Vol.

Keble.

2 vols.

I,

Analogy,

lis.

By W.

Butler.

5s. 6d.

E. Gladstone.

10s. 6d.

Crown

2 vols.

Vol. II, Sermons, 5s.

Studies subsidiary to the AVorks of Bishop

Uniform with the above.

Book V.

os. net.

Butler.

8vo, 4s. 6d.

Pearson'sExpositionoftheCreed. Revised by E. Burton. Sixth edition. 10s. 6d.

Minor Theological Works. Edited by E. Churton. 2 vols. 10s.
Enchiridion Theologicuji Anti-Rojianum.
I. Jeremv Taylor's Dissuasive from
Popery, and Real Presence. 8s.
7s. 6d.
II. Barrow's Supremacy of the Pope, and Unity of the Church.
lis.
III. Tracts by Wake, Patrick, Stillingfleet, Clagett, and others,
Addison's Evidences.
Allix's Works.

3s. 6d. net.

3s. each.
Bentley's Sermons. 4s.
History of the Acts. 9s. 6d.
Bragge's Works. 3 vols. 1 12s. 6d.
Bull's Works, with Nelson's Life. Ed. by E. Burton. 8 vols. 2 9s.
Burnet's Exposition of the XXXIX Articles. 7s.
Butler's Works, 1849. 2 vols. Sermons. 3s. 6d. Analogy. 3s. 6d.
Clergyman's Instructor. Sixth edition. 6s. 6d.
Comber's Works. 7 vols. 1 lis. 6d.
Fell's Paraphrase on St. Paul's Epistles. 7s.
Fleetwood's Works. 3 vols. 1 Is. 6d.
Hall's Works. Edited by P. Wynter. 10 vols. 3 3s.
Hammond's Paraphrase on the New Testament. 4 vols. 30s.
Paraphrase on the Psalms. 4 vols. 20s.
Horbery's Works. 2 vols. 8s.
Hooper's Works. 2 vols. 8s.
Jackson's (Dr. Thomas) Works. 12 vols. 3 6s.
Jewel's Works. Edited by R. W. Jelf. 8 vols. 1 10s.

4 vols.

Biscoe's

Leslie's

Works.

7 vols.

40s.

Lewis' (John) Life of Wiclif. 3s. 6d. Life of Pecock. 3s. 6d.
Lewis' (Thomas) Origines Hebraicae. 3 vols. 16s. 6d.
Newcombe's Observations. 6s. net.
Patrick's Theological Works. 9 vols. 1 Is.
Sanderson's Works. Edited by W. Jacobson. 6 vols. 1 10s.
Scott's Works. 6 vols. 1 7s.
Smalridge's Sermons. 2 vols. 8s.
Sherlock's Discourses. 4 vols. 42s. net.
Stili.ingfleet's Origines Sacrae.
2 vols. 9s.
Grounds of Protestant Religion. 2 vols. 10s.
Stanhope's Paraphrase. 2 vols. 10s.
Taverner's Postils. 5s. 6d.
Wall's History of Infant Baptism. By H. Cotton. 2 vols. 1 Is.
Waterland's Works, with Life by Van Mildert. 6 vols. 2 lis.
Doctrine of the Eucharist. 3rd ed. Cr. 8vo. 6s. 6d.
Wheatley's Illustration of the Book of Common Prayer.. 5s.
,
10

Early Ecclesiastical History

The New Testament

in the Apostolic Fathers.

mittee of the Oxford Society of Historical Theology. 8vo.

Origins of Christianity. By C. Bigg. Edited

The

8vo.

by

T. B. Strong.

12s. 6d. net.

The Church's Task under the Empire,

and excursus, by

C. Bigg.

8vo.

Bingham's Antiquities
10 vols.

8vo.

The Church
edition.

3 3s.
in the

Fcap

8vo.

Heurtley.

8vo.

with

preface, notes,

5s. net.

of the Christian Church, and other Works.

ApOStoHc Age. By W. W.

Second

Shirley.

3s. 6d.

Harmonia SymboHca:

By a Com-

6s. net.

Creeds of the Western Church.

By

C.

6s. 6d.

on the Athanasian Creed. By

W. Ojimanney. Svo. 16s.
Ecclesiae Occidentalis Monumenta luris Antiquissima
Canonum et Conciliorum Graecorum Interpretationes Latinae. Edidit
Critical Dissertation

G. D,

H. Turner. 4to, stiff covers. Tom. I, Fasc. I, pars I, 10s. 6d. net; pars
Tom. II, pars I, 18s. net.
The
of Truth : being a Manual of the Paullclan Church of
Armenia. By F. C. Conybeahe. Svo. 15s. net.
C.

II, 21s. net.

Key

Baptism and Christian Archaeology,

Biblica, Vol.

V.

By

C. F. Rogers.

8vo.

being an ofifpnnt of studia

5s. net.

Ecclesiastical History of Britain, etc

Sources

Adamnani Vita
and glossary, by

J.

S. Columbae.
Edited, with introduction, notes,
T. Fowler. Crown Svo, leather back. 8s. 6d. net.
With translation, 9s. 6d. net.

Baedae Opera Historica.

Crown

Svo.

Edited by C. Plummer.

Councils and Ecclesiastical

and

Two

Documents

relating

to

Edited after Spelman and Wilkins, by A. W.

and W. SixTBBs. Medium Svo. Vols. I-III,i;3 13s. 6d. net. Also Vol.
I and II) and Vol. Ill, separately, 14s. net per volume.
Britain

Ireland.

Nova Legenda

Angliae,

others, and first printed 1516.

Svo. 1 16s. net.

Wyclif.

volumes.

31s. net.

Great

Haddan
II (Parts

.as coUected by John of Tynemouth and

Re-edited 1902 by C. Horstmax. 2 vols.

A Catalogue of the Works. By W. W.

Select English Works.
First edited
Trialogus.

Shirley.

Svo.

3s. 6d.

Arnold. 3 vols. Svo. 1 Is. net.

by G. Lechler. Svo. 7s.
Collected by H. Jenkyns. 4 vols. Svo. 1 10s.

Cranmer's Works.
Cranmer's Catechism

'

By

T.

'

Edward Burton

(1829).

with

the

Latin

Svo, with woodcuts.

11

Original.

7s. 6d. net.

Edited

by

Records of the Reformation.

now for the first time
1

printed.

The Divorce, 1527-1533. Mostly

Collected and arranged by N. Pocock. 2 vols.

16s.

Primers put forth in the reign of Henry VIII. svo. 5s.

The Reformation of Ecclesiastical Laws, as attempted in the
Edward VI, and

reigns of Henry VIII,

Svo. 6s. 6d.

Conferences on the
1690.

Book

Edited by E. Cardwell.

of

Edited by E. Cardwell.

Elizabeth.

Common

Third edition.

from issi to

Prayer

Svo.

7s. 6d. net.

Documentary Annals of the Reformed

Church

of

England; Injunctions, Declarations, Orders, Articles of Inquiry, etc, from

1546 to 1716. Collected by E. Cardwell. 2 vols. Svo. 25s. net.

Formularies of Faith
Henry VII I's

reign.

Svo.

set

forth

by the King's authority during

7s.

Homilies appointed to be read in Churches. By J. Griffiths. Svo. 7s. 6d.

Hamilton's Catechism, 1552.
Edited, with introduction and
glossary,

by T. G. Law.

With a Preface by W. E. Gladstone.

Svo.

12s. 6d.

Noelll CatechlSmUS sive prima institutiodisciplinaquePietatisChristianae

Latine explicata.

Editio nova cura G. Jacobsok.

Svo.

5s. 6d.

Sylloge Confessionum

sub tempus Reformandae Ecclesiae edit. Subjic.

Catechismus Heidelbergensis et Canones Synodi Dordrecht. Svo. 8s.

Histories written in the seventeenth (or early

eighteenth) and edited in the nineteenth century
Stillingfleet's Origines Britannicae, with Lloyd's Historical
Account of Church Government. Edited by T. P. Pantin. 2 vols. Svo. 10s.

Inett's Origines Anglicanae (in continuation of StilUngfleet). Edited

by J. Griffiths. 1S55. 3 vols. Svo. 15s.
Fuller's Church History of Britain.
Edited by J. s. Brewer.
1S45.

Le

6 vols.

Svo.

12s. 6d. net.

Neve's Fasti Ecclesiae Anglicanae.

tinued from 1715 to 1S53

by

T. D.

Hardy.

vols.

Corrected and con-

Svo.

10s. net.

Strype's Memorials of Cranmer.

2 vols. svo. us. net. Life of

Life of Whitgift. 3 vols. Svo. 16s.6d.net.
Aylmer. Svo. 5s.6d.net.
General Index. 2 vols. Svo. lls.net.

Burnet's History of the Reformation.

7 vols.

Svo.

Prideaux's Connection
10s.

of Sacred and Profane History.

Shuckford's Continuation, 10s,

Gibson's SynoduS Anglicana.

Svo.

Revised by N. Pocock.

10s.

6s.

12

2 vols.

Edited by E. Cardwell.

Svo.

1854.

Recent Works in English Ecclesiastical History

History of the Church of England from the aboUtion of the
Roman Jurisdiction. By W. R. Dixon. 3rd edition. 6 vols.
Chapters of Early English Church History.
Third edition.

With a map.

8vo.

With

By W.

of Episcopal Succession in England.

By Henry Gee.

16s.

By w.

per

vol.

Bright.

12s.

Registrum Sacrum Anglicanum

The EUzabethan Clergy

8vo.

an attempt to exhibit the course

Stubbs. 2nd ed. 4to. 10s. 6d.

and the Settlement of Religion, 1558-1564.

documents and lists. 8vo. 10s. 6d. net.

illustrative

Liturgiology
Liturgies, Eastern and Western.

Vol. i. Eastern Liturgies.

Edited, with introductions and appendices, by F. E. Brightman, on the basis
of a work by C. E. Hammond. 8vo. 1 Is. net.

Rituale

Armenorum

:
the Administration of the Sacraments and the
Breviary Rites of the Armenian Church, with the Greek Rites of Baptism
and Epiphany. Edited by F. C. Conybeare; with the East Syrian Epiphany
8vo. 21s. net.
Rites, translated by A. J. Maclean.

CardweU'sTwoBooksof Common Prayer.

Gelasian Sacramentary,
Edited by H. A. Wilson.

Liber

Medium

Ed.

3.

8vo.

Sacramentomm Romanae

8vo.

7s.net.

Ecclesiae.

18s. net.

Leofric Missal,

with some account of the Red Book of Derby, the Missal

of Robert of Jumieges, etc. Edited by F. E. Warren. 4to. 1 10s. net.

Ancient Liturgy of the Church of England,

according to the

Uses of Sarum, York, Hereford, and Bangor, and the Roman Liturgy
arranged in parallel columns. By W. Maskell. 8vo. 15s. net.

Monumenta

Ritualia Ecclesiae Anglicanae

the occasional

Offices of the Church of England according to the old Use of Salisbury, the
Prymer in English, and other prayers and forms, with dissertations and
notes.
By the same. Second edition. Three volumes. 8vo. 2 10s. net.

The Liturgy and Ritual

Warren.

8vo.

of the Celtic Church.

By

f. e.

16s. net.

Sharp on the Rubric, svo. 6s. net.

Helps to the Study of the Book of

Common

W.

Prayer. By

R. W. Stephens. Crown Svo. Cloth, 2s. 6d. net; also in leather bindings.
Printed on Oxford India paper and bound with the Prayer Book, from lis. 6d.

The Oxford Hymn Book

Music Edition.

Crown

Svo, Ss. 6d. net

gUt edges,

4s.

net

India

W^Ol'ds Only. Crown Svo, is. 6d. net ; gilt edges,

paper, 5s, net.
2s. net ; India paper, 3s. net. 32mo, cut flush, 6d. net ; cloth boards, 9d. net ;
India paper, 2s. net.
13

PHILOSOPHY
Ancient Philosophy
(For editions, translations, &c., see pages 44-47)

Greek Theories of Elementary Cognition

Aristotle.

By

J.

I.

Beare.

from Aicmaeon to

12s. 6d. net.

Plato's Doctrine of Ideas.

By

J.

A. Stewart.

8vo.

6s. net.

Mediaeval and Modern Philosophy

Opera hactenus inedita Rogeri Baconi.

Edited by Robert
Steele. 8vo. Fasc. I, De Viciis Contractis in Studio Theologie. 5s. net.
Fasc. n, Communium Naturalium Lib. I. 10s. 6d. net.

loannis Saresberiensis Policratici Libri vni recognovit commentario etc instruxit C. C. J. Webb. Two volumes. 8vo. 36s. net.
Bacon's Novum Organum, edited, with introduction, notes, etc,
by T. Fowler.

Second

Svo.

edition.

15s.

Novum Organum, edited by G. W. KrrcHiN.

Bentham's Introduction to the Principles of
Crown

Legislation.

Svo.

Svo.

9s. 6d.

JNIorals

and

6s. 6d.

The Works of George Berkeley, formerly Bishop of Cloyne.

with
and an account of his Life and Philosophy,
Erefaces,
y A. C. Fraser. New edition (1901) in crown Svo. Four volumes. 1 4s.
Some copies of the Svo edition of the Life are still on sale, price 16s.
Selections from Berkeley, with introduction and notes, for the use of
Students. By the same Editor. Fifth edition. Crown Svo. 7s. 6d.
The Cambridge PlatonistS : being selections from their Writings,
with introduction by E. T. CicviPAGNAC. Crown Svo. 6s. 6d. net.
Leibniz's Monadology and other PhUosophlcal Writings, translated,
with introduction and notes, by R. Latta. Crown Svo. 8s. 6d.
Locke S Essay. Collated and annotated with prolegomena, biographical,
Two volumes. Svo. 1 12s.
critical, and historical, by A. C. Eraser.
annotations, appendices,

Locke's Conduct of the Understanding.

Extra fcap Svo.

Edited byT. Fowleh.

2s. 6d.

A Study in the

Ethics of Spinoza.

By h. h.

Joachui.

svo.

lOs. 6d. net.

Hume's

Treatise of
Second

BiGGE.

Hume's

Human
Crown

edition.

Enquiries.

Nature.

Svo.

Edited by L. a. Selby-

6s. net.

Crown

Edited by L. A. Selby-Bigge.

Svo.

British

Moralists, being

Selections from writers

principally of the

Edited by L. A. Selby-Bigge. Two volumes.

Uniform with Hume's and Berkeley's Works.

eighteenth century.
Svo.

12s. net.

Butler's

Works,

edited

Svo or Crown Svo Vol.

by W. E. Gladstone.

(Analogy)

Two

14s. or 5s. 6d, Vol. II

The Optimism
1908.

Second

6s. net.

edition.

of Butler's Analogy.
By Henry Scott-Holland. 2s. net,
14

Crown

volumes.

Medium

(Sermons)

14s. or 5s.

The Romanes Lecture,

Recent Philosophy
Kant's Theory of Knowledge. By h. a.Prichard. svo. 6s. ed. net.
of Hegel, translated from the Encyclopaedia of the PhiloSecond edition.
sophical Sciences, with Prolegomena, by W. Wallace.

The Logic
Two

Crown

volumes.

Svo.

10s. 6d. each.

Hegel's Philosophy of Mind, translated, with

by W. Wallace.

Crown

Svo.

five introductory essays,

10s. 6d.

in Three Booksof Thought, of Investigation, and of

Knowledge. Translated by B. Bosanuuet. Seconded. 2 vols. Cr. Svo. 12s.
Lotze's Metaphysic, in Three Books Ontology, Cosmology, and
Psychology. Translated by B. Bosanuuet. Seconded. 2 vols. Cr. Svo. 12s.

Lotze's Logic,

Bluntschh's Theory of the State.

German

Third edition, 1901.

edition.

Translated from the sixth

Crown

Svo, half-bound, 8s. 6d.

Green's Prolegomena to Ethics.

Edited by a. c. Bradley. Fifth

With a Preface by E. Caird. Crown Svo. 6s. net.
Types of Ethical Theory, by J. Martineau. Third edition. Two
volumes. Crown Svo. las.
Study of Religion its Sources and Contents. By the same
author. Second edition. Two volumes. Crown Svo.
los.
The Principles of Morals. By T. Fowler and J. M. Wilson. Svo.
edition, 1906.

lis.

Logic
Two

Also, separately Part

;

or.

I, 3s.

6d,

Part

II, 10s. 6d.

The Morphology of Knowledge.

volumes.

Svo.

ByB. Bosanquet.

Is. net.

Lectures and Essays on Natural Theology and Ethics.

By W. Wallace. Edited by E. Caird. With portrait.
Studies in History and Jurisprudence. By
1901.

2 vols.

The Theory

Svo.

of

Svo.

Rt.

12s. 6d.

Hon.

j.

Bryce.

5s. net.

Good and

Evil.

By H.

Rashdall.

svo.

2 vols.

14s. net.

The Herbert Spencer Lectures,

svo.

1905,

by Frederic Harrisov.

TheVoluntaryistCi'eed, By Auberon Herbert. 2s.net. 1907.

Probability, the Foundation of Eugenics.
By Francis Galton. Is. net.
Individualism
and After. By Benjamin Kidd. Is. net.
1908.

2s.net. 1906.

An

Introduction to Logic. By H. W. B. Joseph. Svo.

Essay on Truth. By H. H. Joachim. Svo. 6s. net.
The Ethical Aspects of Evolution. By w. Benett.

9s. 6d.

net

6s. net.

Elementary Logic

The Elements

of Deductive Logic.

edition, with a collection of examples.

The Elements
Extra fcap Svo.

of Inductive Logic.
6s.

By

Extra fcap Svo.

t. Fowler.

Tenth

3s. 6d.

By the same. Sbcth edition.

In one volume with Deductive Logic, 7s. 6d.
15

ORIENTAL LANGUAGES
See also Anecdota Oxoniensia, pp.

98, 99.

Sacred Books of the East

Translated by various Scholars, and edited by the late
Right Hon. F. Max Muller. Forty-nine volumes
An Index Volume (Vol. L) is in the press.

Sacred Books of India. Brahmanism

Twenty-one volumes
Vedic Hymns,

Part I, translated by F. Max Mijller. Part II, translated

by H. Oldenberg. Two volumes (XXXII, XLVI). 18s.6d.netandl4s.net.
of the Atharva-veda, translated by m. Bloomfield.

Hymns
The

One volume

21s. net.

(XLII).

by Juuus Eggeung.
AS'atapatha-Brahma?^a,
Five volumes (XII, XXVI, XLI, XLIII), 12s. 6d. net each
translated

(XLIV),

The Gnhya- Sutras,

The

18s. 6d. net.

translated

by H. Oldenberg.

Two volumes (XXIX, XXX), each 12s. 6d. net.

Upanishads, translated by F. Max Muller.
Two volumes (I, XV Second edition), each 10s. 6d. net.

The Bhagavadgita,
One volume

translated by Kashinath Trimbak Telakg.

(VIII), with the Sanatsu^atiya and Anugita. 10s. 6d. net..

The Vedanta- Sutras,

with *Sankara's Commentary, by G. Thibaut.

each 12s. 6d. net.
The third volume (XLVIII) with Ramanu^ra's iSribhashya. 25s. net.
Vol. XXXIV Part I of the Vedanta-Sutras is temporarily out of print.

Two volumes (XXXIV, XXXVIII),

The Sacred Laws

Two

volumes

(II

of the Aryas,

translated

by G. BtjHLER.

(Second edition) and XIV), each

10s. 6d. net.

The

Institutes of Vish/iU, translated by Juuus Jolly.

One volume (VII). 10s. 6d. net.
Manu, translated by Georg Buhler. One volume (XXV). 21s.

The Minor Law-books,

translated

One volume (XXXIII, Narada,

net.

by Juuus Jolly.

Bnhaspati).

10s. 6d. net.

Jainism and Buddhism. Twelve volumes

The Gaina-SutraS, translated from Prakrit by H. Jacobi.
Two

The

volumes (XXII, XLV).

Saddharma-pU72C?arika,

10s. 6d.

One volume (XXI).

Mahayana Texts,

net and 12s. 6d. net.

translated from Sanskrit

by H. Kebk.

12s. 6d. net.

by E. B. Cowell, F. Max MiJLiEB, and J. Takakusu.

From the Sanskrit. 12s. 6d. net.

One volume (XLIX).

The Dhammapada and

translated by F. Max
(X, Ed. 2). From the Pah. 10s.6d.net.
translated from the Pali by T. W. Rhys Davids.

MiJLLERandV. Fausboll. One

Buddhist SuttaS,

Sutta-Nipata,

vol.

One volume

(XI).

16

10s. 6d. net.

PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE

CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET

UNIVERSITY OF

TORONTO LIBRARY